/ / / (-
^A^^t^m^y^e
S ^
x
/
\
>l '
A aew Y*.ivoA { taflurrvuua \x/it\^-
^'^ t^ui / j^ \ L- ^^
a, jp-r. 1.
BOOK VII.
OF
FIGURATIVE SYNTAX.
What is meant by Figures in Syntax, of their use, and
that they may be all reduced to four.
WE have already divided syntax into two parts, simple and
figurative; and we took notice that the figurative was
that which receded from the customary and natural rules, to follow
some particular turns of expression authorised by the learned,
which is what we understand here by the word FIGURE.
So necessary is the knowledge of these .figures, that without it,
it is almost impossible to understand the antient authors, or to
write pure and elegant Latin.
We shall reduce them all to four, after the example of the
learned Sanctius, who says that all the rest are chimeras. Man-
strosi partus grammaticorum. In Miner, sua, lib. 4.
For by this word figure is meant, either a defect and omission of
some part of a sentence; and this, is generally called ELLIPSIS :
Or something superfluous and redundant, and this is called a
PLEONASM :
Or a disproportion and disagreement in the parts, when the
construction is framed rather according to the sense than the
words, and this we shall call SYLLEPSIS. Though some modern
grammarians give it the name of SYNTHESIS :
Or an inversion of the regular and natural order of words in a
sentence, and this we call HYPERBATON.
To these figures some likewise join that of HELLENISM, or
GREEK PHRASE, which is when we use such expressions in Latin;
in imitation of the Greeks, as cannot be defended by the rules of
Latin syntax.'
And as for ANTIPTOSIS, or ENALLAGE, we shall -prove at the
latter end that it is as unnecessary as the rest which we have omrt-
ted, and that the whole may be reduced to these four figures.
168 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
t
CHAPTER I.
Of the jirst jigure called ELLIPSIS.
THE first figure is called ELLIPSIS, that is, defect or omission^
and this is of two sorts. For sometimes we ought to under-
stand what is not at all mentioned in a sentence: and sometimes
we understand a noun or a verb that has been already expressed,
whether we take it in the same or in a different sense ; this is
what we call Zeugma.
Now the first sort of ellipsis is huilt particularly on what we find
in antier\t authors, who expressing their thpughts more at large,
and with the greatest simplicity, have thereby shewn us the na-
tural government, and what we are to suppose in the more figura-
tive and concise manner of writing, which was afterwards adopt-
ed. The most general rules that we ought to consider here, and
Which have been partly hinted at already in the preceding re-
jnarks, and in the Syntax, may be reduced to nine or ten heads,
and these should be looked upon as fundamental maxims, in order
to take the thread of the discourse, and to understand an author
thoroughly.
I. GENERAL MAXIM. Every sentence is composed of 9
noun and a verb, and therefore where the verb is not expressed, it
inust be understood.
Hence what the grammarians call apposition, as Anna soror ;
Urbs Athence, is properly an ellipsis of'he substantive verb, for
Anna ens, or (because this participle is obsolete) qucs est soror t
Urbs qua est, or qua dicitur Athencs : just as Csesar says, Carmo-
pienses qua est Jirmis&ima civitas, lib. 2. B. C. Hence it is that the.
French hardly ever make an apposition by substantives only, be-
cause this language has an aversion to the figure ellipsis. But either
they put one of the nouns in tfce genitive, La mile de Rome, the
city of Rome ; or they add a verb, La ville qui est appelee Rome, the
city which is called Jtome ; or they add an adjective to one of the
two substantives, Rome ville celebre, Rome ajamous city ; Anne ma
sceur, my sister Anne ; and not Rome ville ; speur Anne. For whiclj
reason they do not translate, Or a pro nobis peccatoribus, Priezpour
nous pecheurs, pray for us sinners ; but, priez pour nous pauvres pe-
cheurs, pray for us poor sinners, pr priez pour nous qui sommes pecheurs,
prayjor us luho are sinners. And in like manner the rest.
Now the apposition is not only formed of one word, but like-
wise of many, Donarem tripodas, prcemia Jortium, Hor. that is, qu}
sunt prtsmiajbrtium. Vicina coegi ut quamyis avido parerent arva
Colono : gratum opus agricolis, Virg.
But it is customary to refer to apposition, words that have more
of the nature of an adjective ; as homy servus ; Victor exercitus ;
Nemo homo, &c.
t There
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 169
There are also a great many occasions on which the verb is un-
derstood, especially the substantive verb, Sed vos qui tandem, sup.
estis? And some other verb likewise, as in Pompeianum cogito, Cic.
sup. ire. Dii meliora, sup. faciant.
When one speaks proverbia-lly, Fortuna fortes, Cic. sup. adjuvat,
By a rhetorical figure, QMS ego, Virg. sup. castigarem ; and on
many other occasions which may be learnt by use, or may be seen
in the 2d list hereto annexed.
II. The Nominative understood before the Verb.
II. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb hath its nominative
expressed or understood ; but there are commonly three ways of
suppressing the nominative.
1. In the first and second person, Amavi te t quo die cognovi, Cic.
sup. ego. Quid fads ? sup. tu ; &c.
2. In verbs relating to the generality of mankind, Aiunt , ferunt,
predicant, sup. homines.
3. In verbs that are called impersonal. Vivitur, sup. vita. For
since we say, Vivere vitam, it follows that we may also say Vivitur
vita, because the accusative of the verb active may always be
rendered by the nominative of the passive. In like manner when
we say, peccatur, we are to understand peccatum, and Cicero has
expressed it, Quo in genere multa peccantur. Vigilatur, sup. nox t
as Ovid has it, Nodes vigi/antur amorce. Festinatur, properatur,
sup. res, orfuga ; as Virgil hath expressed it, Festinatefugaw ; and
the rest in the same manner. The reason of this is because these
verbs are called impersonal through a mistake, as we have already
shewn, p. 122. and following, and that they may have their nomi-
native and persons like the rest.
Hereto we may refer those verbs which Sanctius calleth Verla
nahirce, that express a natural effect, as Pluit, tonat, fulgurat, nin-
git, lucescit, where we understand, Deus, cesium, or natura ; or the
noun itself whence the verb is derived, as pluvia, nix, lux, &c.
since we find that the vulgar languages oftentimes put this nomi-
native, at least with an adjective, as in French, it a p/u une grosse
pluie, it has rained a heavy shower .- And in Latin other nouns are
joined, as saxa pluunt, Stat. Tantum plidt ilice glunais, Virg.
The infinitive oftentimes supplieth the place of the nominative,
and ought to be understood as such in discourse, because it is con-
sidered as a verbal noun, according to what hath been already
said, p. 113.
III. The Accusative understood after the Verb.
III. GENERAL MAXIM. Every verb active hath its accu-
ative expressed or understood. But it is oftentimes omitted, and
especially before the relative qui, qua, quod, as Facilius reperias,
(sup. homines ) qui Romamprqficiscantur, quclm ego qui Atftenas, Cic.
See likewise what hath been said on the 14th rule, and in the re-
marks on the Verbs, chap. 1.
But
170 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
But it is also observable that the infinitive, as a noun verbal,
may be frequently understood for the case of its own verb, as we
have made appear in different places. Thus when I say currit, we
are to understand cursum, or TO currere, which is the same thing.
Pergit, we must understand pergere, and the rest in the same man-
ner ; which would seem odd at first, if we did not find that the an-
tients expressed themselves in this manner, Pergis pergere, Plaut.
Pergam ire domum, Ter. And thus it is the Greeks say ep tpdvoct,
dixit dicere, and the like.
IV. 'When the Infinitive is alone, the verb that governs it
is understood.
IV. GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever the infinitive is by it-
self in a sentence, we must understand a verb by which it is go-
verned, as ccepit, solebat, or some other. Ego illud sedido negare
Jactum, Ter. sup. ccepi. Facile omnes perferre ac pati, Id. sup. so~
lebat ; which is more usual with poets and historians, though we
sometimes meet with it in Cicero, Galba autem multas similitudines
qfferre, multaque pro cequitate dicere : where we ought always to
understand a verb, without pretending that the infinitive is there
instead of the preter-imperfect, by a figure that has no sort of
foundation.
Sometimes a participle is understood, as in Ca3sar. Divitiacus
complexus obsecrare ccepit, ne quid gravius infratrem statueret; scire
se ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo plus quam se doloris capere, for
dicens se scire, &c.
V. When an Adjective is alone, some substantive or other
is understood. Of the word Negotium.
V. GENERAL MAXIM. Every adjective supposeth its sub-
stantive expressed or understood. Thus, because juvenis, servus,
&c. are adjectives, they suppose homo ; because bubula, suiUa y &c.
are also adjectives, they suppose caro. There are a great many of
this sort, of which we shall presently give a list.
But when the adjective is in the neuter gender, the word NE-
GOTIUM is generally understood for its substantive, which word
by the antients was taken for RES, the same as the TO* IIPArMA
of the Greeks, or the VERBUM of the Hebrews.
. Cicero himself has used it in this sense, when he says of C. An-
tony who did not pay him : Teucris ilia, lentum negotium. Ad At-
tic. It is an affair that goes on but very slowly. And in another
place ; Ad tanti belli opinionem, quod ego negotium, &c. And in this
sense Ulpian has used it, when he says, that there are more things
than words in nature, Ut plura sint negotia quam vocabula.
We even frequently find that Cicero takes Res and Negotium^
for the same thing. Ejus NEGOTIUM sic velim suscipias, ut si esset
RES mea. Which is proper to be observed in order to understand
the force of several expressions, and of many elegant particles,
which this author makes use of, as Rerum autem omnium nee aptius
est
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 171
est quidquam ad opes tuendas, quam diligi ; nee alienius quam timeri ;
Offic. 1. Where we see that aptius and alienius, being of the neuter
gender, do suppose negotium for their substantive, which refers
however to the word res, mentioned by him before, as to its sy-
nonymous term. Again, Sed ego hoc utor argumento quam-ob-
rem me ex animo, vereque diligi arbitrer. For quamobrem, which is
taken for an adverb, is composed of three words. And res here
refers to argumentum, which he mentioned before, as if it were 06
quod argume ntum, or ob quod negotium , on which account.
So in his oration against Verres, where he says, Fecerunt ut
istum accusarem, d quo mea lungissime ratio, voluntasque abhorrebat;
that is, a quo negotio accusationis, according to Asconius. And
whence Terence says, Utinam hoc sit modo defunctum, we must un-
derstand negotium, according to Donatus.
And therefore when we say, Triste lupus stabulis ; Varium 8$
mutabilc semper Jemina, we ought to understand this same negotium,
without looking for another turn by the feminine, in order to say
with the grammarians, that it is Res tristis, Res mutabilis : as if
Wegotium could not perform the-same office as Res.
In like manner the names of arts and sciences are generally in
the neuter in Cicero, because this substantive is understood. MM-
sicorum perstudiosus, Cic. Nisi in physicis plumbei sumus, Cic. Phy*
sica ilia ipsa 8$ mathematica qua posuisti, Cic. sup. negotia.
It ought likewise to be understood, when the relative is in the
neuter gender, as Non est quod gratias agas ; that is, non est nego-
tium, or nuttum est negotium propter quod gratias agas, or agere de~
leas.
Classe virisque potens, per qua f era bellaferuntur, Ovid.
And in like manner, Lunam 4" Stellas, qua tujunddsti ; that is, qucs
negotia.
Hereby we see that the grammarians had no great reason to
call this a Syllepsis, or to say that the neuter gender was more
noble than the other two, and therefore included them both. For
herein they have committed two considerable mistakes : The first
is their not understanding what is properly meant by the neuter,
which is only a negative gender, and consequently cannot be more
noble than the other two, nor include them both. The second
is their mistaking the cause of this construction in the neuter^
which is no other than the ellipsis of the word negotia ; for which
reason they imagined it could be used only in regard to inanimate
things, whereas we meet with instances of it in others, as hath
been shewn in the Syntax, rule 5. p. 11. and as we are further able
to demonstrate by authorities, as when Tacitus says, Parentes,
liberos,Jratres, vilia habere; that is, vilia negotia, to slight them.
And Lucretius :
Ductores Danaum delecti prima virorum.
And this figure of NEGOTIA understood, is so familiar in the
Latin tongue, that Cicero makes use of it on many occasions,
where he might have done otherwise, as when he says, Annus sa-
lubris fy pestilens contraria (for contrani) that is, sunt contraria ne~
gotta.
173 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
gatia, aft contrary things. And in his book on Old Age ; Scepe enim
interfuiquerelis meorum cequalium^ qua C. Salinator t qucE Sp. Albinus,
deplorare solebant ; he could not say, querelis qua;, without under-
standing negotia ; since it is plain, that quce refers to those com-
plaints, as it appears likewise by Gaza's Greek translation : -cjoX-
Xax;? ytig roi tys^tsTv^ot OAYPMOI2 OY2 t'tdrQao-i xa,ro(}vge<r6oii :
and therefore that he might have put quas, if he had not under-
stood this other noun, which is of the neuter gender. In regard to
which we refer to what shall be said hereafter upon the Syllepsis.
And if it should be again objected, that in Hebrew the ad-
jective feminine is oftentimes taken absolutely, as Unam petii &
Domino, that is, unam rem, though we cannot understand a sub-
stantive feminine, because those words which signify rem, or nego-
tium^ are all masculine in that language :
I answer that there is never a passage in Scripture, where the
adjective feminine occurs alone, but a substantive feminine is to
be understood, though it is neither res nor negotium, which are mas-
culine in this language ; and therefore in the above-mentioned
example we are to understand nbtfUf scheela, petitionem, as appears
from what it expressed in another place, Petitionem unam ego peto
als te, 3. Reg. 2. 16.
NEGOTIUM is likewise understood in the following elegant
phrases. Quoad ejus facere poteris. Quoad ejus Jieri potent, and
the like ; of which we have made mention above, Sect. 5. ch. 1.
n. 5. upon -the word Quoad. For the infinitive facere, or Jieri,
ought there to be considered as a noun, which governs ejus in the
genitive, sup. negotii. Thus, Quoad ejus facere poteris, signifies,
quantum poteris ad facere (for ad effictumj ejus negotii. And quoad
ejus Jieri potent, signifies, quantum ad (jus rei, or negotii potestas
erit. As much as possible, as far as there will be a possibility of
doing it. And the rest in the same manner. This is what very
few seem to have rightly comprehended.
VI. Antecedent with the Relative understood.
VI. GENERAL MAXIM. Every relative has a relation to
the antecedent which it represents. Therefore it is an ellipsis,
when the antecedent, which ought ever to be understood both be-
fore and after the relative, is mentioned only before ; as Est pater
quern amo, for quern patrem amo : And the ellipsis is double, when
the antecedent happens to be neither before nor after, as Sunt quos
arma delectant, and the like. But we have said enough of both ia
the rule of the relative, p. 4-. and following.
VII. What is to be understood when the Genitive comes
after an Adjective, or after a Verb.
VII. GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever there comes a geni-
tive after a noun adjective, or after a verb, either it is a Greek
phrase, depending on the preposition, or we must understand a
general noun by which it is governed: And it is an unquestion-
able
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 173
able truth, that neither in Greek or Latin, is there any such
thing as verb or adjective, which of itself is capable of governing
the genitive. This we have shewn in each particular rule, and
what hath been said upon the subject, may be reduced to five prin-
cipal points.
1. When the adjective is said to be taken substarttively, we must
ever understand the substantive negtiium, tempus, or some other
particular noun, Ultimum dimicationis, Liv. sup. tempus. Amara
cvrarum, Hor. sup. negoiia. Which Lucretius, Tacitus, and Ap-
puleius seem to have particularly affected.
2. When one of the nouns, called correlatives, is understood,
Sophia Septimi, Cic. sup. Jitia. Hectoris Andromache. Virg. sup.
uxor. Palinurus Phcedromi, Plaut. sup. servus.
3. When causa, or ratione, is understood, just as the Greeks un-
derstand mx* or yot^v. Cum ille se custodies diceret in castris reman-
sisse, sup. causa.
4. When mentioning the names of places, we put the genitive
after the preposition, Ad Castoris, Cic. In Veneris, Plaut. sup. <z-
dem. In like manner, Per Varronis t swp.fundum. Ex Apollodori %
Cic. sup. chronicis. Exjeminini sexus descendentes, sup. stirpe, &c.
5. When the genitive is put after the verb, Est Regis, sup.
officium. JEstimare litis, Caesar ad Cicer. sup. causa. Abesse hi-
dui, Cic. sup. itinere. Accusarefurti, sup. crimine. Est Romce, sup.
in oppido. And others of the same sort, which we have observed in
the rules.
But when the genitive plural does not happen to be in the same
gender, nor in the same case with its adjective, we ought to un-
derstand the noun repeated. Corruptus vanis rerum, Hor. that is,
Corruptus vanis rebus rerum ; so that this is the genitive of parti-
tion. Just as we read in Livy, Neque earum rerum esse uUam rem.
Which shews the little reason there has been to call this an Anti-
phrasis.
VIII. What tve are to understand, when the Accusative
is by itself.
VIII. GENERAL MAXIM. Whenever there is an accu-
sative in a sentence, it is governed either by a verb active, or by a
preposition (except it agrees with the infinitive, as me amare.)
Wherefore when we find neither of these, we must supply the de-
ficiency, as Me miserum t sup. sentio.
But the preposition is much oftener understood, as Eo spectatum
ludos, for ad spectatum. See the chapter on the Supines, p. 129.
Pridie Calendas, for ante Calendas, and such like, of which we
hall give a list hereafter.
IX. What we are to understand, when the Ablative is
by itself.
IX. GENERAL MAXIM. The ablative is never in a sen-
tence, but when it is governed by a preposition, though frequently
this
174 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
this proposition is only understood. We have given instancei
hereof in all the. particular rules, and we shall presently give a list
of them for the greater convenience of the learner.
X. Two other very remarkable Ellipses ; one where we
are to understand the Nominative of the Verb, and the
other where we must supply the Verb by the. Context.
1. It often falls out that the nominative of the verb is not ex-
pressed, and then we must take it by the context ; as Cujus belli
cum ei summa esset data, e6que cum exercitu prqfectus esset, &c. Corn.
Nepos, for eoque is cum exercitu profectus esset. Id cum factum multi
indignarentur magnceque esset invidia tyranno, Idem, for magnczque
id factum esset invidue t &c. Ain 9 tu, te illius invenissejiliam? In-
vent, fy domi est, Plaut. for ilia domi est. Dum equites prceliantur,
Bocchuscumpeditibus,quosjilius ejus adduxerat, neque in p?iore pugnft
adfuerant, postremam Romanorum aciem invadunt, Sallust. for neque
ii adfuerant, or else quique non adfuerant. Caesar and Livy abound
in such expressions.
2. We are oftentimes obliged to supply a verb in one of the
members of a period, not as it is in the other, but quite different,
just as the context directs us, as in Virgil :
Disce puer virtutem ex me verumque laborem,
Fortunam ex a! Us. 12. JEn.
Where, as Servius observeth, with Jbrtunam we must understand
opta, pete, or accipe, and not disce, which goes before, because^/or-
tuna non discitur. Again,
Sacra manu victosque Deos, parvumque nepotem
Ipse trakit.
Where trahit refers only to nepotem ; and with sacra and Deos we
must understand portat. In like manner, 1. Georg.
Ne tenues pluvice, rapidive potentia soils
Acrior, fy Borecc penetrabilejrigus adurat.
For the word adurat refers extremely well to the sun, and to cold,
as Servius takes notice ; but as to tenues pluvice, we must under-
stand noceant, or some such thing, as Linacer and Ramus have ob-
served. In like manner in Tully, Fortuna, qua illiflorentissima,
nos duriore conflict ati videmur. Where conftictati- agrees only with
the second member, whereas in the first we must understand usi 9
says Scioppius. And in Phaedrus, lib. 4. fab. 16. Non veto dimitti,
verum cruciarijame, where it is plain, that with the second member
we must understand jubeo, volo, or the like, and ndt veto. Which
is still the more worthy of notice, as it is more contrary to the de-
licacy of our (the French) language, which does not admit of
our making use of a verb that refers to two words or members of
a period, unless it can be said separately of either.
It is by this sort of Ellipsis that we must explain a great many
passages in the Vulgate edition of the Scripture, as in St. James,
Glonetur autemfrater humilis in exaltatione sua, dives autem in humi-
litate sud, where, according to the most probable opinion, followed
by
OF THE ELLIPSIS. 175
by Estius, we are to understand confundatur in the second member,
and not glorietur, which is in the first. By this same figure Estius
explaineth this passage of St. Paul, Prohibentium nubere, abstmere
a cibis, where we must understand pracipientium. And this other,
Perjidem ambulamus, non per speciem, where stamus must be under-
stood, because the word ambulare is indeed applicable to those
whom the divines call viatores, but not to the blessed, unless it be
simply to express the happiness they will have in being every
where with Christ. Ambulabunt mecum in albis, Apocal. 3. The
same may be said of this other passage of the Psalmi&t, Per diem
sol non uret te, neque luna per noctem ; and of this other of Genesis,
Die noctuque cestu urebar. For neither the moon nor the night
have any heat or burning, to occasion a sensible inconveniency.
Therefore we must understand some other word. In like manner
Lac vobis potum dedi, non escam,yoixot l^Sis lirona-oc, xa/ ov gZ>f*.a, as
in Homer, oJVov xa< crrcy EOJ>TE, Vinum 8$ Jirumentum edentes, where
it is evident that something must be understood, since St. Paul did
not mean that we should drink what we eat, nor Homer that we
should eat the wine we drink.
But we must likewise take notice, says Linacer, that it is some-
times almost impossible to determine which verb ought to be un-
derstood in order to complete the sense, as in Quintilian, Si fur em
nocturnum occidere licet, quid lativnem?
XI. Of other more remarkable Particles that are un-
derstood.
We are oftentimes obliged to understand magis or potius; as
Tacita semper est bona mulier, quam loquens, that is, magis bona.
Oratiofuit precibus quam jurgio similis, Liv. that is, magis simttis
Thus the Greeks frequently understand /*x*ov. And thence it is
that we find in the Psalmist, Bonum est confidere in Domino, quam
confidere in homine. And in Terence, Si quisquam est qui placere
cupiat bonis, quam plurimis, that is, bonis potius quam plurimis.
With simul we are often to understand ac or atque t as in Virgil,
Eel. 4.
At simul heroiim laudes, $ facia parentis
Jam tegere, ^ qu<z sit poteris cognoscere virtus.
And in Cic. Itaque simul experrecti sumus, visa ilia contemnimus.
Si is understood when we say
Tu quoque magnam
Partem opere in tanto, sincret dolor, Icare haberes, Virg,
Decies centena dedisscs
Huic parco paucis contento, quinque diebus
Nil erat in loculis, Hor.
Ut is not taken for quamvis, as some people imagine, but then
we understand esto orfac, as in Ovid, Protinus tit redeas, facta vi-
debor anus, that is, esto ut statim redeas, tamcn, &c.
Neither is ut taken for utinam, as when Terence says, Ut Syrc
te magnusperdat Jupiter ; for we are to understand ora, or precor ut,
&c.
Whea
176 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
When we say, cave cadas, faxis, &c. we are to understand ne 9
as it is in Cicero, Nonne caveam ne scelusfaciam ; likewise with the
ne we are to understand ut, according to Vossius and Scioppius,
for otherwise this ne would not govern the subjunctive. See what
hath been said above, in explaining vereor ne, p. 162.
What they call the potential or concessive mood may be like-
wise resolved by this figure, as Frangas potius quam corrigas, that
is,Jiet potius utfrangas, &c. Vicerit^ that is, estout wcerit. Obsit,
prosit, mhil curant, for an obsii, &c. In like manner when we say,
Bono animnsis, it means^jc ut sis,&c. Ames, legas, that is, moneo
te ut, orjdc ut ames, legas, &c.
After non modb, non solum, non tantum, (provided it does not hurt
the sense) we are to understand NON; as, Alexander non modb par-
cus, sed etiam liber alis, that is, non modb nonparcus. Ita ut non modb
civitas, sed ne vicini quidem pruximi sentiant, Cic. Non modb illi
inmdetur cetati, verum etiam Javetur, Id. Offic. 2. Hence it comes
that the non is sometimes expressed. Quia non modb vituperatio
nulia, sed etiam summa laus senectutis est, &c. Concerning which
the reader may consult Muretus in his varies Icctiones.
The particle NEMPE is oftentimes necessary for resolving se-
veral absolute modes of speaking : as, Sic video philosophis placu-
isse ; Nil esse sapientis pr<zstare nisi culpam, Cic. that is, nempe nihil
esse, &c. Ccetera verb, quid quisque me dixisse dicat, aut quomodo ille
accipiaty aut quajide mecum vivant ii qui me assidue colunt fy obser-
vant, prcest are non possum, Id. that is, nempe, quid quisque, &c. Hoc
verb ex quo suspicio nata est, me quceswisse atiquidin quo te offendetem,
translatitium est, Id. that is, nempe me qucesivisse, &c.
These are the most considerable things we had to observe in
regard to the figure of Ellipsis, whereby every body is capable of
judging of all the rest. For the most general rule that can be
given upon this subject, is to take notice of the natural and most
simple way of speaking, according to the idea we receive from
vulgar languages, which oftentimes point out to us what we ought
reasonably to understand.
Yet because on those occasions we may be at a loss for words,
unless we happen to be very conversant in the language, I shall
therefore subjoin three lists. The first shall be of nouns : and the
second of verbs, where I do not intend to include all those that
may be understood (for this would be too tedious a piece of work)
but only the principal ones. The third is to be of prepositions,
which generally form most of the governments and connexions of
speech in all languages.
XII. FIRST LIST.
Of several Nouns understood in Latin authors.
DES ifl understood, when we say, as we have shewn that it is also tin-
Est domi to the question Ubi. See derstood, when we say, Parvi \>r.ndOi 9
the Syntax, rule 25, p. 50. and fol- Non sum $ Ivndo, &c.
lowing. AMBO, when we say, Mars # Venus
s is understood, when we say, Ra- capti duin t Ovid. Castor K Pollux
tio, or tabula atcepii # cxpensi, just utiernis orientet # uccidcntcs. And
the
of THE ELLIPSIS,
177
the like. For this is a kind of El-
lipsis according to Scioppios; unless
we choose simply to say that then the
two singulars are equivalent to a plu-
ral, and refer it to the figure of syl-
lepsis, of which hereafter.
AMNIS, when we say, conftuens,profluens,
torrens, fluvius. See the Genders;
vol. I. p. G.
ANIMUS, when we say, Rogo te ut
boni consulas, that is, ut statuas hanc
rem esse boni antmi, ^proceeds from a
good will ; though we generally
translate it by the person that re-
ceives, / beg you will lake this in good
part.
ARS,- or SCIENTIA, when we say, Me-
dirina, Musica, Dialectics, Rhetorica,
Fabrica, &c.
ARVUM,< when we say, novale. Culla
novalia, Virg. But when he says,
Tonsas novales, we are to understand
terras, so called a novando, says Varro,
because they are renewed, or the seed
is changed.
BON;E, when we say, Homo frugi : for
the antients used to say, bon&frugis ;
. afterwards they said, buncpfrugi ; and
at length frugi, by itself, as Sanctius
observes.
CAMPUM, when we say, per npertum ire.
CARCER, as it was heretofore neuter,
ought to be understood, in saying,
Pistrinum, Tullianum, &c.
CAUSA, in saying, Exercitum opprimen-
d<z liber tutis habet, Sallust. Successo-
rum MinervfE indoluit, Ovid. Integer
vitce, sceleris purus, Hor. See the Syn-
tax, p. 22.
CARO, when we say, bubula, vervecina,
suilla, ferina, &c.
CASTRA, when we say staliva, hyberna.
See Heteroc. vol. 1. p. 161.
CENTENA, when we say, Debet decies,
or decies sestertidm. See the chapter
on Sesterces, in the particular obser-
vations, book 8.
CLITELLAS, when we say, Importers
alicuif to impose upon him, to deceive
him. For this is properly treating
him as are ass.
CCELUM, when we say, serenum, purum,
fpe.
CONSILIUM, when we say, Arcanum,
secretum, proposition. Perstat in pro-
posito, &c.
COPIA, when we say, Eges medicine?,
abundas pecuniarum.
CORONA, when we say, CivicA dona-
tus ; Muralem, Obsidionalem adeptus y
&c. As likewise when we say.
Vot. II.
serta ; just as sertum refers to corona*
mentum, which we find in Cato and
in Pliny.
CRIMINE, or ACTIONE, when we say,
Furli damnatus. Repetundarum pos-
t Hiatus. See rule 28.
DATUM, when we say, Non est tt fuller e
cuiquam.
DIES, when we say, Illuxit, or meus est
nalalis, &c.
Dn, when we say, Superi, Inferi, Manes,
&c.
DOMUS, when we say, Regia, Basilica.
DOMUM, when we say, Uxorem duxit.
EXTA, when we say, ceesa el porrecta,
as in Cicero, Ne quid inter cepsa &?
porrecta, ut aiunt, oneris nobis ad-
dalur, aut temporis. That when I
shall approach towards the expiration
of my time, I may not be troubled
with any new protraction of my of-
fice.
The metaphor is taken from
hence, that when the entrails are
cut and drawn out of the belly of
the victim, which is what they called
CESA, the priest, who offered the
sacrifice, held and considered them
some time before he presented them
upon the Altar ; which is what they
called Porricere.
FACUI/TAS, or POTESTAS, when we say,
Cernere erat. Non est te fallerc cui-
quam, &c.
FESTA, when we say, Bacchanalia, Sa-
turnalia, slgonalia.
FINIS, when we say, haclenus, quatenus.
For it means hacjine tenus.
FRUMENTA, when we say, sata ; as
fruges, when we say, satfp.
FUNERA, when we say, Justa persol-
vere.
HOMO, in adolescens,juvenis, amicus,fa-
miliaris ; and whenever the adjective
which agreeth with man, is taken
absolutely, as miser sum, salvus sum ;
also in oplimales, magnates, mortales t
Gerrnani, Galli, &c.
IDEM, as Equo fere qui homini morbi,
Plin. for fere iidem qui.
INGENIUM, or INSTITUTUM, or MOREM,
when we say, Antiquurn obtines,
Plaut. Nttnc cogncsci) vcstrum tarn
superbum, Ter.
Is, for talis, or tantus, is very often
understood, as Homo improbus, sed
cuipaucos ingenio 'pares ifivenias, for
is cui.
ITER, when we say, Sud pergis, qu&
tendis ? Virgil has even expressed it,
Tendit iter velis portumaue rflinquit*
N JUDICSS,
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
JUDICES, when we say, Mitlere in con-
silium. Whence, according to Asco-
nius, it is taken fur perorare, when
the orator having finished, the judges
met in order to gather the votes.
\ Testibus editis ila mitt am in consilium
ut, &c. Cic.
JUDICIO, or JURE, when we say, faho,
merito, immerito, which are all of them
real nouns adjective.
LAPIS, when we say, Molaris.
LAUD EM, when we say, Cur mihi de-
trahis f
LIBER, when we say, annalis, diurnus.
In like manner in the plural,
LIBRI, when we say, pugillares.
As also when we say pandecta, a
Greek word, which Tiro, Cicero's
freedman, gave for title to books
that he wrote on miscellaneous
questions. 2uos Grceco titulo, says
Gellius, 7mvsxT?, libros inscripsit,
lanquam omne rerum atque doctrinarum
genus continentes. And afterwards
this very title was conferred on the
body of the civil law collected by
Justinian, which is otherwise called
Digesta, orum. Several have doubted
of what gender this word Pandectce
was, because, as Varro and Priscian
have very well observed, the nouns in
i?of the first declension of the Greeks,
which in that language are mascu-
line, being changed-into u in Latin,
become feminine, as o %0-prvs, hcec
charta. Hence Budeus has said
Pandectas Pisanas in the feminine.
But Vossius believes that this rule of
Priscian will hold good only as to
nouns that have no relation to an-
other more general word understood,
as in this case libn ; for which rea-
son he says, come/a and planeta are
masculine, because apig is understood.
Ant. Aug. H. Stephen, Mekerchus,
Andr. Schot, and several others, are
of this opinion. And Cujas himself
has acknowledged .his error, since in
his latter works he always put it in
the masculine.
LIBRAE, or LIBRARUM, (genitive sin-
gular or plural of libra, a pound)
when we say, Corona aurea fuit pondo
viginti quinque, Lin. and the like,
that is, pondo or pondere librarian 25.
For pondo is only an ablative like
mundo. See the Genders, rule 8, and
the Heretoclites, list 6.
LINEAS, when we say, Ad incitas re-
ductus, reduced to extremity; for
indite conies from deo for maveo.
because those who play at draughts,
being driven to the last row, can stir
no further. Hence it is that the
men at draughts are called inciii, that
is, immobile*. But where Lucilius
said, Ad indta, we are to understand
loca. Hence it is, says St. Isidorus,
that they gave the name of inciti
to those who had lost all hopes of ever
extricating themselves from their mi-
sery.
LITER AS, where Cicero says, Tnduo
abs ie nullas acceperam. And in this
passage of Plautus, Hodie in ludum
occcepi ire litterarum ; ternasjam scio,
A. M. O. Where there is no sort of
foundation, say Scioppius and Vos-
sius, for taking this word ternas for
the three conjugations of verbs, as
Alvarez has done, just as if a child
could learn three conjugations, the
first day he went to school.
Locus, when we say, Hie senex de pro-
ximo : ab huntili (sup. loco) ad sum-
mum (sup. locum.) In medium ; con-
venerunt in unum, &c. Primo t secun-
do, tertiOy &c. sup. loco.
LOCA, in the plural, when we say,
JEsliva, hyberna, station, pomaria f
rosaria, supera, infeta, &c.
LUDI, when we say, v Circenscs, Mega*
lesii, S&culares, Funebres, &c.
MALUM, when we say, Caveo tib'i, 7z-
meo tihi ; Metuo a te, de te t pro ie,
&c. But when we say cavere malo t
we are to understand se a malo,
MARE, when we say, profundum^ultum,
iranquillum t
MENSIS, when we say, Januarius, Apri-
lis, October, &c.
MILLE, or rather MILIIA, which sup-
poseth also negotia, when we say
decem or centum sestertia, or denaria.
See the chapter on Sesterces in the
next book.
MODIA, when we say, Millw frumtnii.
MODO, in perpeiuo, certo, &c.
MORTEM, when we say obiit. And
it is still usual to say occumbere mor-
tem, &c.
NAVIM, when we say, sofait, conscendit,
appulit.
NEGOTIUM. We have already takeu
notice of this, as one of the most
general rules. It may also be ob-
served on this occasion, that this-
same noun is understood, when we
say ianto, quanta, ttliqttanto, hoc, eo^
quo, multo, paulo, nimio. For mullo
doctior signifies multo negotio doctior ;
or else mult& rc t multis partibus doc-
tior. In like manner, when we say,
Suifari potest ? qui is -in ablative
fov
OF THE ELLIPSIS.
179
for quo, that is, quo modo, or quo
ncgutio.
VVhen id, quid, or aliquid, are put,
ncgotium is understood, those nouns
being of their nature adjectives. As
we see in Terence, jilndria: id erut
illi namen. And in Plautus, Quid est
till nomen ? Xisi occupo aliquid miki
cunsilnini.
Even when quid governs the ge-
nitive tie go tit, still it snpposeth ncgo-
tium repeated for its substantive, as
Videri eges/as, quid negotii dat homini
misero malt, Plaut. This is as if it
were, 2uid negolium mali negotii dat
egestas homini misero. Where quid ne-
gotium negotii is the same thing as quts
res >ei, or rerum, as in the same au-
thor, Summum Jovem detesior, said
Menechmus : 2ua de re out cui rei
rerum omnium? answers the old man.
And thus Soioppius explains it.
This noun is also understood, when
we say mille or millia, sup. negolia ;
for mille being an adjective like the
other numeral nouns, it must needs
have its substantive, concerning which
see the chapter on Sesterces in the
next book.
NUMUS, or NUMERUS, when we say, de-
narius, qumarius, Sac.
Also when we say, quadrant, quin-
cunx, sestertius, &c.
NUNTIUM, when we say, Obvidm illi mi-
simus.
Kux, when we say, avellana, juglaris,
pi/ica, persica, castanea, &c.
OFFICIUM, when we say, Nun est meum,
or Regium est bene facer e. Also when
we say, Est regis, &c.
OPERA, when we say, Bucolica, Geor-
gica, Rkctqrica, prurn, &c.
OPUS, when \ve say, Hoc non solum la-
boris, verum etiam ingeniifuit.
ORATIO, when we say, prosa, which
cometh from prorsa for recta, the
contrary of which is Versa. For
prorsus heretofore signified rectut,
from whence comes prorsi limites, in
Festus; Prorsa Dea, that presided
over women in labour.
OsTruM, when we say, poslicum, a back
door.
OVES, when we say, liidentes ; hence it
is generally feminine in this sense.
But if we join it with verres, it will be
masculine, as in Non. bidentiverre.
PARS, when we say, Antica, pontica,
decima, quadragesima, primas, secun-
das, &c. Non prsteriores feram, Ter,
FAsecundns defert, Quint, sup. paries.
In Jik manner, pro raid, pro virili,
sup. parte.
PASSES, when we say, Ire duo millia,
Mart. Laliiudu septingentorum mil-
Hum, Cses.
PR^DIUM, when we say, tuburbanum,
Tuscutanum, &c.
PUEE orPuELLA, when we say infans ;
for this word is an adjective : hence
it is, that in Valerius Maximus we
find puerunt infantctn, that could not
speak.
RASTER, when we say, bidens, trident,
&c.
RATIO, when we say, expensa, imp$nsa t
summa ; just as we understand ra-
tiones, when we say conlurbaie, to
confound one's accounts, and to us
some fraud, either towards the master
or towards the creditors, to make
them lose their turn, and to pay the
last before the first.
REM FAMIMAREM, when we say, deco-
qufre, to squander away his estate,
to turn bankrupt; whence also we
have decoctor, a bankrupt.
SERMO, in these familiar phrases, of
Cicero's, Brevi dicam. Complecti
brevi. Brevi respondere. Circum-
scribi Sf definiri brevi, sup. sertnone,
And when he says, Brembus agere,
brevibus aliquid dicere, sup. sermo-
nibus or verlis, in short, in a few
words.
SERVUS or MINISTER, when we say,
Est ilii a pedtbun, or circum pede^G
manu, or ad manum, a secrelis, a
libellis, &C.
SESTERTIUM, (for sesterliontm). when we
say centum millia. And both are
understood when we reckon by the
adverb, as debet mihi defies, and the
like. See the chapter on Sesterces in
the next book.
SIGNUM, when we say, bellicum or das-
sicum canere.
SINGULI, when we say, in naves, in
annoSf in horns, &c.
SOLUM, when we say, Terree. defgitur
arbor t Virg. sup. in solo. Hence iu
Sallust, Arbores qttee hunti arido a/u
que arenoso nascuntur t that is, in solo
humi arido, &c.
TABELIJE, when we say, in eboreis f
laureatis, &c. For heretofore the
tablets or table-books took their
name either from the matter they
were made of, or from the number
of- leaves. As eboreez, citreoi, dupli-
ces, tripiices, &e. Laureate, were
those which the emperors used to
send to the senate after obtaining a
victory.
N 2 TA.
180
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
TABERNA, when we say, medicina, ,vu-
/fi/itt, textiina, tonstrina, fabiica, sa-
lina, laniann, &c. which are all ad-
jectives. Seepistiinum in the Heter.
?ol. 1. p. 137.
TABUUS, when we say in duodecim.
For the twelve tables were the fun-
damental laws of the Roman re-
public.
TEMPUS, when we say ex eo, ex quo,
ex itto : Ex illo fluere res Danaum,
Virg. Tertio, quarto, extremo, &c.
Optalo, brevi, sero, &c. Tertium
Consul, postremum ad me venit, Sec.
Hoc noclis, id s.tatis t &c. Antehac,
posthac, (hoc is here taken for hac. )
Antea, poslea, pr&terea, post ilia, sup.
lempora. Cicero hath even expressed
it, Post ilia tempora quicunque remp.
agitavere, &c. Non licebal nisi pree-
Jinito loqui, sup. tempore. Prope adest
cum alieno more vioendum est mihi, Ter.
sup. tempus. Erit cumfcc'tsse nolles,
sup. tempus. And an infinite number
of the like sort.
TERRA, when we say, patria, continens.
Likewise when we say, jacet humi, in-
stead of in terra humi. For the earth
is divided in aquam et humum, ac-
cording to Varro. In like manner,
when we say, Natus est JEgypti, sup.
in ierrti. See r. 25. p. 50.
VADA, when we say, brevia, shallows,
flats.
VASA, when we say, Jictilia, vitrea,
chrystallina. Just as
VAS, when we say, atramentarium, sa-
linum.
VERBA. Docere paucis, Virg. sup.
verbis* Responsum paucis reddere t Id.
Pro re pauca loquar, Id. pavcts te
v:>lo, Ter. sup. verbis alloqui. As
also, Paucis est quod te volo, for Est
negotium propter quod paucis (e verbis
alfoqui volo. Dicere pauca, sup. verba.
Responderc pauca, Hor. &c.
VIA, when we say, hoc, iliac, istac, qua,
ed, recta, &c. slppia, Aurelia^ &c.
As also viam, when we say, ire, in-
gredi. Virgil has even expressed it,
Itque reditque viam, &c.
VINUM, when we say, mustum, merum,
Falernum, Mnssicum, &e. which are
nouns adjective.
VIR, UXOR, or FEMINA, when we say,
conjux, mariluSj or marita. And
in the plural, oplimates, magnates,
primates, majores t &c. sup. viri or
feminte.
VrRGA, when we say, rudem accipere,
that is, to be discharged from further
business. For one of the ways of
discharging was by the prater's put-
ting a rod or wand on the head of the
person whom he discharged or re-
leased, and this rod was called rudis,
from its being rough and unwrought.
It had also the name of festuca, as
likewise of vindicta, because by this
method, servi vindicabantur in liber-
tatem. Hence cometh rude donatus,
discharged from all exercise or busi-
ness, because when a gladiator came
to be excused fro fighting any more,
they used to give him one of those
rods.
URBS, when we say, natus Romts for
in urbe Romee. See rule 25. p. 50.
UTILE or COMMODUM, when we say con-
sulo tibi t prospicio mihi, &c.
It may likewise be observed on this occasion, that it is a kind
of Ellipsis, at least according to Sanctius and Scioppius, when we do
not follow the gender of the termination in particular nouns, but
only the gender of the signification in regard to the common and
general term. As,
In names of trees, Delphica laurus, patula jagus, tarda morus,
&c. sup. arbor.
In the names of herbs, Dictamnum pota sagittas pellit, Plin. Cen-
tunculus trita aceto, sup. kerba, Idem.
In the names of provinces, islands, towns, and others, con-
cerning which see what has been . said when treating of genders,
rule 3, 4, 5, and 6.
But then with the Ellipsis, there is also a Syllepsis, as we shall
shew hereafter, p. 189.
XIII.
.
OF THE E L L I P S I S.
XIII. SECOND LIST.
Of several Verbs understood.
181
AOSPICIO or VIDEO) when we say,
En quatuor ades, Ecce komincm, En
Pri.imum. But if we put the nomina-
tive, Ecce homo, en Priamut, we are to
understand adest or venit, or the like.
A MET or ADJUVET, when we say,
Mehercule, Mecastor, Medius fidius,
(heathen forms of swearing, which
Christians ought not to make use of)
that is, Me Hercules, Me Deus Fidius
amet or adjuvel. And Cicero him-
self informs us, that me/terculc was
said for Me Hercules.
Thus Edepol is composed of three
words, that is of e for me, de for Deus,
and pol for Pollux, sup. adjuvct. But
we likewise say epol, that is, me Pol-
lux, sup. adjuvet. So that it is a mis-
take to write ecdepol with an , as
practised by those who pretend that
it means, quasi per cedem Pollucis,
which is not true.
CANERE, when we say, scit fidibus.
CaPiT, when we say, Ire prior Pallas,
and the like. See the Syntax, p. 34,
and the Figurative Syntax, p. 170.
Die r, when we say, Male audit, he has
a bad character. For it signifies male
audit de se, or in st, or sibi did ; so
that male does not refer to audit,
but to did, which is understood. In
like manner, when we say, Audit
bonus, audit doctus, it implies, audit
diet esse bonus, according to the Greek
construction which we explained in
the 5th rule, p. 14.
Dico, when we say, JBona verla qu&so,
sop. die. Nugas, sup. dicis. Sed h&c
hactenus, de kis hactenus, sup. dixeri-
mus, or dictum sit. 2uid multa ?
sup. dico verba.
ESSE, or FUISSE, or FORE, when we
say, Factum i/li volo. Ne dicas non
fradictum. Promisi ultorem, sup. me
OfP
XIV. T H I
repositions that
A, AB, AD, IK, ought to be understood
with the names of large places or
provinces, where they are not ex-
pressed, as JEgypto remeans, Tac.
sup. ab. Dcgit Cartkagine, sup. in.
See the Syntax, rule '25. p. 48.
A, AB, are also understood with nouns
signifying cause, instrument, trou-
ble, &c. as, Culpd pallescere, Ense
perforates, Pleciere capite, &c. See
the Syntax, rule 32, p. 70.. With
fore, &c.
ESTO, Or FAC, DA, Of PONE, when WC
say, Heec negotia, ut ego absim, con-
Jici possu'it, that is, porilo ul ego ab-
sim, or esto, orfac ut, &c. Bono sij
animo, or in animo.
FACIO, when we say, Dii meliora, sup.
faciant. Studes, an piscaris, an ve-
naris, an omnia simul? sup. facts.
IllA nocte nihil pr&terquam vigilatum
est in urbe, that is, nihil factum ett
preeterquam, &c. H .
IRE, when we say, In Pompeianum co-
gito, Rhodum volo, inde Athenas, &c.
LOQUI, when we say, Scit Latine, Greece,
&c. See p. 34.
MONEO, or FAC UT, when we say
amef, legas ; ametis, legatis ; Istud
ne dicas; lllud cogites tecum ; Nihit
rescribas.
OBSECRO, IMPLORO, or NONCUPO, when
we say, Proh Deum atque homi-
numjidem* See the Syntax, rule 35.
p. 74.
ORO UT, or PRECOR UT, when we say,
Dii meliora ferant. tft te per dot Ju-
piter. Sut illi Dei irati sint, where
qui signifies ut, or rather quo, sup.
modo. See the remarks on the pro-
nouns, ch. I. n. 5. p, 93. and re-
marks on the Adverbs, n. 2. p. 145.
PARO, INVENIO, or the like, when we
say, Unde mihi lapidem f Mortis sig-
num, quo mihi pads autori ? &c.
SUM, ES, EST, is frequently under-
stood : Quid mihi tecum ? sup. est.
Haud mora (sup. est) feslinant jussi.
Hei mihi, vatibi, sup. est. See r. 35.
p. 74. 2u<znam (mnlum) isla seivi-
tus volunlaria, sup. est.
TIMEO, cave, vide, or the like #hen we
say, Ak (e nefrigora l&dant. At ut
satis conic miilata sis. Verum ne yuid
ilia titubet, &C.
RD LIST.
are to be understood.
nouns of time, when they signify
after, as Rediil hoste superato, after
having overcome the enemy, which
is what we call the ABLATIVE
ABSOLUTE. See the 34th rule, p.
72.
With nouns signifying difference,
or distance, as Stulto intelligent quid
interest ; Abtst rirtule illius. See
the 30th rule, p. fi6.
When we would signify only a
part ;
182
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
part ; aninio otiosus, for ab animo, in
regard to tlie~ mind. Multis rebus me-
lior, for a multis rebus. See the 32d
rule, p. 69.
AD, is understood in expressing measure
or space. Lotus qumqutpedes. See
the 26th rule, p. 53.
In expressing the end one aims at.
Siiid frustra laboramus ; for ad quid.
Eamusvisum or visere, for advisum, or
ad visere. See the remarks on the
Supines, n. 3. p. T32.
Also when we say Cat era 1<zlus y
for quoad ccrtera, and the like. See
the annotation to the 24th rule, p. 45.
ANTE, with nouns signifying time,
Pridie Kalfndas, sup. ante. Multos
abhlnc annos, sup. ante. See the 26th
rule, p. 53, and following.
CIRCA, when speaking of time, as
Tu homo id ce tali's, that is, circa id
eztattis.
CUM, -when speaking of instruments,
Sagit/d sauciits. See the 32(1 rule,
'p. 70.
When we say, officio, honore, odio
persequi, and the" like, &c. For it is
the same signification as when Cicero
saith, Cum equis persecuii sunt.
To express time, cras f prima luce.
Instead of which Terence hath, Cras
cum primo lucu. But with time we
may likewise understand in. See the
26th rule, p. 53.
DE, E, EX, with nouns that express
plenty, or want, or the subject, as
Nugis refcrti libri. Plenus vino. E-
quus ligno fabrefaclus. Sacrificare
tauro vel ngno, &c. See the 28th
rule, p. 62.
With the names of place that ex-
press departure, Exire Romd, Itaiid
cedere. See the 25th rule, p. 48.
With nouns signifying time, as
noclu or node. Hord primd, Tertid
vigilid. See the 26th rule, p. 53.
With nouns that denote the cause
or manner, Flere alicujus obitu ; vic-
titare lolio ; quare for qua de re, &c.
See the 32d rule, p. 70.
In like manner, labor o dolor e, for
e dolor e. . Amor is abundantid hoc fed.
Virlute darns, &c.
Also, Lege agere cum aliquo. Vo-
care aliquem nomine, &c.
IN, with nouns signifying place, whe-
ther in the ablative or the accusa-
tive, as Domo me contineo, Cic. Sardi-
nian venit, Cic. See the 25th rule,
p. 48.
With nouns signifying time, whe-
ther in the ablative or the accusa-
tive. See the 26th rule, p. 53. and
following.
With nouns that denote the sub-
ject or object, as Opus est mihi libris,
for in lihns. See the annotation to.
the 28th rule, p. 63.
With nouns that denote the cause,
Accusal me eo quod, &c. for in eu quod.
With nouns that express thf state
or condition, Sum mugno llni'.re, for
in magno timore. Mugud est apud
bmnes gloria. De pcce fc nulta, nee
inagna spe sumus, &C.
With nouns that denote the means
to attain the end, as Likis me obleclo.
Ludh delectari, &c.
With nouns that denote order and
arrangement, as Ordine aliquid faccre
or mllocare.
With nouns that denote a particu-
lar thing. Non armis prcestanlior quam
toga.
OB or PROPTER is oftentimes under-
stood, when an infinitive supplieth
the place of an accusative, that de-
notes the cause or end. as slccipio do-
lorem mihiillum iraid, that is, ob irasci,
See the remarks on the Verbs, chap.
2. n. 10. p. 113, 114.
Quod is frequently governed by the
same prepositions, when we say, 2ucd
ego te per hanc dexteram oro, Cic. that
is, propter quod. 2uod utinam minus
vihp cupidusfuisscm, for quam-ob-rem.
See the remarks on the Adverbs, n. 3.
p. 146.
PER is frequently understood with nouns
signifying time or distance, Vixit cen-
tum annos. Distal quinque miUiaria.
See the 26th rule, p. 53.
Also with nouns signifying a part,
hii'sulus brachia y for per brachia, and
the like, of which we have taken no-
tice, in the annotation to the 24th
rule, p. 45. and shall take further
notice hereafter when we come to^
treat of the figure of Hellenism.
PR;E in comparisons, Dodior cateris,
for pr& CfPleris, &c. See the 27th
rule, p, 55. and following.
To express the cause, Homini la-
cryma. cadunt gaudio, Ter. that is,
pra gaudio.
PRO, with nouns signifying price, Etni
magno, that is, pro magno pretio. Au-
reus, units valet decem argenteis, that
is, pro decem. See the 29th rule, p. 66.
SUB, with the ablative called absolute,
especially when it denotes some post,,
condition, dignity, or pre-eminence,
as Te consule, Ipso teste, Arisiotele au-
tore, sole ardente, &c. See the 34th
rule, p. 72,
CfHAP.
OF THE ZEUGMA. 183
CHAPTER II.
Of the second sort of Ellipsis, called ZEUGMA.
HITHERTO we have treated of the first sort of ellipsis,
where we are obliged to understand some word which is not
at all mentioned in the sentence. The second sort is, when the
word has been already mentioned, and yet is again understood once
or oftener. This is called
ZEUGMA, a Greek word that signifieth connection or assemblage,
because under a single word are comprized several other nouns
that depend thereon : and of this there are three sorts.
I. A word understood as it was expressed before.
The first is, when we repeat the noun or verb, in the same man-
ner it has been already expressed. Donatus gives the following
example hereof from the 3d book of the JEneid:
Trojugena interpret Divum, qui numina Phcebi,
Qui iripodas, Ctarii lauros, qui sydera sentis,
Et volucrum linguas, fy prcepetis omina penncs.
For sentis is expressed but once, ana ought to be understood five
times.
It is however to be observed, that when we do not repeat the
word that has been expressed, but understand a new one, it is
not merely a Zeugma, but an Ellipsis, as already hath been ob-
served, p. 168.
II. A word understood otherwise than it was expressed
before.
The second sort of Zeugma, is when the word expressed cannot
be repeated without receiving some alteration.
1. Either in gender, El genus, fy virtus nisi cum re vilior alga
esty Hor. Utinam aut hie surdus, aut luzc muta facia sit, Ter.
2. Or in case, Quid ille Jecerit quern neque pudet quicquam, nee
metuit quemquam, nee legem se putat tenere ullam ? Ter. for qui
nee metuit, &c.
3. Or in number, Sociis fy rege recepto, Virg. Hie illius arma,
hie currus fuitj Id. Tuiatur favor Euryalum lacrymceque decor ce, Id.
4. Or in person, Ille timore, ego risu corrui, Cic. Quamvis ille
mger, quamvis tu candidus esses, Virg.
III. A word understood in the enumeration of parts.
The third is, when after a word which includes the whole, a dis-
tribution of the parts is made without repeating the verb, as Aqui-
Ice volamnt, hcec ab oriente, ilia ab occidente, Cic. Consules pro/ecti,
Valerius in Campaniam, Cornelius in Samnium, Liv. BesticB alia;
mares, aliccftmnna>> Cic. Where we may observe how wrong it is
to say, that on such occasions we are always obliged to use the
genitive of partition, as bestiarum alia,
184 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
IV. Elegance to be observed in regard to the Zeugma.
It is sometimes extremely elegant to understand the same word
under a different meaning ; as Tu colis barbam, ille patrem. Nero
sustidit matrem, JEneas patrem, &&.
CHAPTER III.
Of the second figure, called PLEONASM.
A PLEONASM is when there happens to be a word more than
is necessary, as magis majores nugas agere. PJaut. where
magis is superfluous. Sc ab omnibus desertos potius, quhm abs te
defenses esse malunt, Cic. Where potius is superfluous, because of
the force of the word malo.
In the same manner in Cicero, Omnia qucecunque. In Terence,
Nihil quicquam, where omnia and quicquam are superfluous.
Likewise when a noun is joined to a pronoun, in the same pe-
riod, Sed urbana plebs, ea verb prcsceps erat multis de cau.sis, Sail.
Posthumius autem, de quo nomination senatus decrevit ut statim in
Ciliciam iret, Fusanoque succederet, is negat se iturum sine Catone,
Cic. ad Att. for is is altogether redundant in this passage, unless it
be to render the sentence more elegant and perspicuous. For
which reason those pronouns are often repeated in French.
Also when there are two particles in a period, that have the
same force, as Oportuit prezscisse me ante, Ter. Nosmetipsos, Cic.
Nul/am esse alteram, Plant. Quis alter, quis quisquam, &c. or two
negatives that make but one, as neque nescio, and others, of which
we have taken notice already, p. 155.
In a word, whatever is inserted in a sentence without any depen-
dence on the sense or government, is called a Pleonasm.
But it is to be observed that sometimes what we look upon as
abundant, was inserted by the antients for the sake of elegance,
strength, or perspicuity ; and therefore is not really abundant.
We must likewise take notice that some grammarians happening
not to understand sufficiently the real causes of government, give
us as a Pleonasm what is indeed a most simple and natural expres-.
sion ; as when Linacer says that Venit ad Messenam, in Cicero,
Ab Roma abire, in Sallust and the like, are pleonasms ; whereas the
construction depends entirely on the preposition, as we have shewn
in the 25th rule and following, and when it is not expressed, it is
an Ellipsis.
Thus vivere vitam, gaudere gauditim, fur ere fur or em, servire ser-
vitutem, and the like, may indeed be called Pleonasms, in regard
to the use of authors and to the sense, because the verb by itself
signifies as much as when joined with those other words : though
with respect to the construction, it is rather an Ellipsis, when they
are not expressed, as we have already observed, chap. 2. n. 3.
But when an adjective is added, as longam vivere vitam, duram ser-
vire servitutem, it is then no longer a Pleonasm even according to
the sense, because the verbs vivere and servire do not by themselves
imply this meaning. , In
ON THE SYLLEPSIS. 185
In like manner the pronouns, mihi, tibi, sibi, are oftentimes
taken for a Pleonasm, when they are only the real dative of rela-
tion ; as me, se, te, the real accusative, necessary in construction,
Qui mild) tumjiunt series, Ter. Mihi, that is, in respect to me. Me
id facere studeo, Plaut. mefacere is only the real construction of the
infinitive ; and if it were simply studeo Jacere, it would be an El-
lipsis, where we should be obliged to understand me ; and in like
manner the rest.
CHAPTER IV.
Of the third Jigure, called SYLLEPSIS.
SYLLEPSIS or conception, is when we conceive the sense
different from the import of the words, and thus the con-
struction is formed according to the meaning, and not to the words.
This figure is of very great use for the right understanding of au-
thors, and may be divided into two sorts according to Scioppius,
one simple or absolute, and the other relative.
I. The simple Syllepsis.
The simple Syllepsis is when the words in a sentence differ either
in gender, or number, or both.
1. In gender, as when Livy saith, Samnitium duo millia <WM, and
not ccesa, because he refers it to homines. There were two thou-
sand Samnites slain. Duo millia crucibus affixi, Curt. Duo millia
electi qui mori juberentur, Flor. and such like ; where we may see
that L. Valla had no foundation to find fault with these Scriptural
phrases, Duo millia signati, &c.
And when Horace saith, Daret ut catenis fatale monstrum, qua
generosiiis perire qutzrens, &c. he put qit<z, because by monstrum he
rneaneth Cleopatra. Thus it is we find Duco importuna prodigia,
quos egestas., &c. Cic. Potius quam isiam a me operam impetres>
quodpostulas, Plaut. Ubi est scclus qui meperdidit ? Ter. And in
one of the hymns of advent,
VERBUM supernum prodiens,
A patre olim exiens,
Qui natus orbi subvenis ;
Cursu declivi temporis.
Verlum qui, because Verbum is the same as Filius Dei ; especially,
after having mentioned the Father. Hence it is when Urban VIII.
set about revising the hymns, he did not choose to alter this expres-
sion, but only corrected the second verse, where the measure was
not observed, and put E patris ceterni sinu. And I remember this
gave occasion to a person to find fault with that Pope for leaving a
solecism in this hymn ; so dangerous is it to be only a smatterer in
learning, and have but a slender knowledge of the real principles of
the Latin tongue.
2. In number. There is also a disagreement in number^ as
iurba ruunt, Virg. because the word turba, though a singular, in-
cludes a multitude. And in like manner, Altcrum in alterius
mactatos
186 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
mactatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Ut alter alterum nee opinato vi'de-
rimus, Cic. Missi magnis de rebus uterque legati, Hor.
Propterea quod, for propter id quod. In the same manner as
Plautus said, amor amara dat tibi satis quod cegre sit. And Cic. Si
tempus est ullumjure hominis necandi quce mutta sunt. QUID enim
Juit in illis liter is, prater querelam temporum, CLUJE non animum meum
magis solticitum haberent quam tuutn ? Cic. Quce for quod, referring
to quid. Servitia repudiabat cujus initio ad eum magnce capice con-
currebant, Sail, in Catil. that is cujus servitii, for sermtium is taken
there for slaves, as Cicero hath put it, cceptum esse in Sicilia moveri
sermtium.
In like manner Terence says, Aperite aliquis ostium, which agrees
very well with the French language, ouvrez la porte quelquun, that
is, ouvrez la porte (speaking to them all) Sf que quelquun de vous
I'ouvre. It is likewise by this figure that the same poet saith, ac-
cording to Ramus and Scioppius, absente nobis, and Plautus, pra-
senle nobis.
3. In gender and number, as Pars in carcerem acti, pars bestiis
objecti, Sail. Pars mersi tenuere ratem, Virg. Alterum in alterius
mactatos sanguine cernam, Virg. Mars fy Venus capti, Ovid.
But that which is formed with the Preposition cum, seemeth
somewhat bolder, and is tolerated rather in the writings of poets
than of orators : Ilia cum Niso de Numitore sati, Ovid. Syrus cum
illo vestro susurrant. Ter. Divellimur inde Iphitus 4* Pelias mecum,
Virg. Remo cum fratre Quirinusjura dabunt, Id. Yet Cicero
Has also made use of it, Diccearchum vero cum Aristoxeno aquali fy
condiscipulo suo, doctos sane homines relinquamus. And Q. Curtius,
Pharnabasus cum Appollonide fy Athenagora vincti traduntur, lib. 4 1 .
In like manner an excellent author has wrote thus in French,
laissant sa mere avec safomme fy ses enfans prisonniers.
II. The relative Syllepsis.
The relative Syllepsis, is when we refer the relative to an ante-
cedent that has not been expressed, but of which we form an idea
by the meaning of the whole sentence. Inter alia prodigia etiam
carne pluit, quern imbrem avesjeruntur rapuisse, Liv. The reference
is here made to imber* which has not been expressed, but is in-
cluded in the word pluit, as if it were carnis imber pluit. In like
manner, Perliteras me consolatus sum, quern librum ad te mittam,
Cic. Where per literas is taken for the composition or work
which he promises to send. Mithridaticum verb bellum, magnum
atque difficile, 4" ^ n multa varietate terra marique versatum, totum
ab hoc expressum est, qui libri non modo //. Lucullum fortissimum 4'
darissimum virum, verum populi Ilomani women Ulustrant, Cic.
where qui libri refers to his work, which is included in these terms,
ftellum 'expressum est.
De Prcetiana hereditate, quce quidem mihi magno dolori est (valde
enim ilium amavi,} hoc velim cures, Cic. here ilium refers to Pretius
his friend, whom he has not mentioned, but who is included in
these words, Prcctmna hcereditate. Sed antea conjuravere pauci
contra rempnUic. in quibus Catilina fuit, de qua quambrevissime
potero dicam. SalL
That
OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 187-
1
That is, de qua conjuratione, says Sanctius.
Et laudarejbrtunas meas,
Qui gnatum haberem tali tngenio praditum, Ter.
That is, meas hominis qui, &c.
Nam Sextianus dum volo esseconviva,
Orationem in Attium petitorem
Plenam veneni fy pesttlentice legit, Catul. Carm. 45.
Where we must understand ilte, that is Sextius, for the nominative
of legit. For this nominative is included in the adjective Sextianus ;
and it is just as if it were, Nam Sextiiipse dum vnlo esse conviva, &c.
Delude Philenorum arce, quern locum habuere Carthuginenses, Sail.
where we must understand locus by apposition, as if it were Arcc
locus, quern locum, &c. Likewise in Virgil,
Interea sucios, inhumataque corpora terrce
Mandemus, qui solus honos Acheronte sub imoest.
Where honos is the apposition of mandare corpora terras. Again,
Hortamur fari quo sanguine cretus,
Quidveferat memoret, qucs sitjiducia capto, Mn. 2.
That is, quce hortatio sit Jiducia capto, in order to encourage him
to speak. And in Cicero, Atque in hoc^genere ilia quoque est
infiniia silva, quod oratori plerique duo genera addicendum dederunt,
2. de Orat. where quod supposeth negotium. For the meaning is,
Quodnegotiicm,rKmne silvam illam infinitam, plerique dederunt ora-
tori, tanquam duo genera ad dicendum.
To this relative Syllepsis we must likewise refer these modes of
speaking by short parentheses, which are so graceful in the Latin
language, and include a relative that has no other antecedent
but the very thing expressed before ; as quare quoniam hcec a me sic
petis, ut (qu<z tua potestas est) id neges me invito usurum, Cic. ad
Attic. Tamen (quct tua suavitas est ; quique in me amor) nolles a
me hoc tempore cestimationem accipere, Id. ad Rufum : that is, TO nolle
accipere qu& tua suavitas est, &c. Where we see that the relative,
being between two nouns of different genders, agrees here with
the latter, according to what was observed in the rule of the relative,
p. 6.
To this figure also we must refer a great many obscure passages
of the Vulgate, where the pronoun relatives do not refer to the
nearest noun, but to some other more distant, or which is under-
stood ; as PrcBcipiens JESUS duodecim apostolis suis, transiit inde ut
doceret fy pra^dicaret in ciwtatibus eorum, Matt. 11. where eorum
refers to Judceorum, and not to the apostles who are mentioned
immediately before. Cum loquitur mendacium (Diabolus) ex pro-
priis loquitur, quia mendaxest, fypaterejus, (sup. mendacii) Joan. 8.
Et erant Phariseei 8$ legis doctor es, &c. 8$ virtus Domini erat ad
sanandum eos, Luc. 5. that is, the great multitudes mentioned be-
fore, and not the Pharisees. You may likewise see S. Matt. c. 12.
v. 9. S. Luke c. 4. v. 15. and the 98th psalm v. 8.
The relative adverb is sometimes resolved by the same figure, as
in this passage of Job in the Vulgate, Nudus egressus sum de utero
matris mece, 8? nudus revertar iliuc. Where illuc does not refer to
the preceding word, which is uterus, but to another understood,
which is the earth, or the dust. * CHAP.
188.. NEW METHOD. Book VII.
CHAPTER V.
That the Syllepsis is frequently joined with another
jigure, and of some difficult passages which ought to
be referred thereto.
WE are also to observe that the Syllepsis is frequently joined
with other figures, as with the Zeugma, the Ellipsis, and
the Hyperbaton ; and this is what renders it more strange and dif-
ficult. Hereto we might refer some of the passages cited in the
precedent chapter : but we must illustrate the matter further by
more particular examples.
I. Syllepsis with a Zeugma.
It is joined with a Zeugma, when the adjective or relative does
not refer to the gender of the nearest 1 substantive, but to some
other that precedeth ; as Amor tuus ac judicium de me, utrum mihi
plus dignitatis in perpetuum, an voluptatis quotidie sit allaturus, non
jkcife dixerim, Plancus Ciceroni, where allaturus refers only to
amor tuus, so that we must understand allaturum once more, along
with judicium. In like manner, Gens cui natura corpora animosque
tnagis magna quant Jlrma dedit> Liv. Pedes ejus pr&cisos &$ caput fy
vnanus in cistam chlamyde opertos pro munere nalalitio matri misit,
Valer. Max. Nejando quidem auditum est crocodilian aut ibim aut,
Jelem violatum ab JEgyptio, Cic. 1. de natur. where he makes the
construction in the masculine, though Jeles, which is the latter
word, be of the feminine, as we have already shewn when treat-
ing of the Heteroclites, vol. 1. p. 142. col. 2. Quin etiam vites &
caulibus brassicisque si prope sati sint t ut a pestiferis 8$ nocentibus re-
Jugere dicuntur, nee eos ulla ex parte contingere, 2. de natur. where
he likewise makes the construction in the masculine, because of
caulis, masc. though brassica, the latter, be feminine. Ccelum ac
terra ardere visum, Jul. Obsequens. Philippi vim atque arma toti
Grades cavendam metuendamque esse, Gell. as H. Stephen reads it,
and as it is quoted by Saturnius and Sanctius. And in Virgil,
M e puer Ascanius, cnpitisque injuria cari,
Quern regno Hespen&frauda.
Where he puts quern, though caput, the latter word, be of the neu-
ter gender.
Thus in the 2. de Natur. Deor. by the same figure Cicero saith,
Ex cethere igitur innumerabiles FLAMMJE siderum existunt, quorum
est princeps sol, &c. Deinde reliqua SIDERA magnitudinibus immen-
sist, Atque hi tanti IGNES tdmque multi, non modo nihil nocent ter-
ris, rebusque terrestribus ; sed ita prosunt, ut si MOTA loco sint, con-
Jlagrare terras necesse sit a tantis ardoribus. Where mota, which we
find in the best copies, refers to sidera, and not to ignes, which is
the latter word. But if we read motes in the feminine, according
to Lambinus, we must needs refer it to Jlammtz, which is only in
the beginning of the precedent period, and then this figure will
be still more extraordinary.
And
OF THE SYLLEPSIS. 189
And it may further be observed that this same figure is also
practised in regard to the verb, when after two different nouns, it
is not put in the plural so as to follow the noblest person, nor made
to agree with the latter person, though it be put in the singular,
as Ego fy populus Rom. helium indicojacioque, Liv. not indicit nor
indicimus, &c.
II. With an entire Ellipsis.
And though these constructions seem very extraordinary, yet
there are others still more surprizing, when this figure is joined
with an entire Ellipsis, that is, when we must understand a word
that has not been at all expressed, which happens particularly on
two occasions.
1. When we make the construction and the reference in the
worthiest gender, pursuant to what hath been explained, in the
4th rule, p. 9. though departing entirely from the gender of the
noun expressed, as when Virgil saith, Timidi Damce, Talpce oculis
capti, which he could not say without understanding masculi, with
those epicenes of the feminine.
Thus Cicero saith, Quod si hcec apparent in bestiis volucribus,
agrestibus, natantibus, suibus, cicuribus, Jeris, primum ut se ipsi di-
ligant, &c. Where it is remarkable that he has put ipsi in the mas-
culine, though there is nothing before it to which it can be referred
but to bestite, since all the other nouns refer to it, either as ad-
jectives, or as substantives of the common gender, put by apposi-
tion. And Virgil :
Ulnc pecudes, armcnta, viros, genus omneferarum^
QUEMQUE sibi tenues nascentem arcessere vitas.
We might mention a great many other examples of the same sort :
and it may likewise be observed, that when we take the common
and general noun to refer to, rather than to the particular noun,
which has been expressed, this is also a Syllepsis joined with an
Ellipsis : as in suam Eunuchum, sup. fabulam. Centauro invehitur
magna, sup. navi, &c. Which is sufficient to shew tkat the Latin
tongue hath its irregularities, or rather its figures in gender and
construction, as well as the Greek ; and that no expression is used
in either without some grounds, or reason.
2. The second case where the Syllepsis is joined with an Ellipsis,
is, says Scioppius, when understanding the attribute or subject of
a preposition, we take the gender of the word expressed, for that
of the other understood, to which it refers notwithstanding ; as if
holding a diamond in my hand, I were to say, Hczc est gemma,
where IMEC without doubt would refer to adamas, though masculine.
And this construction occurs quite at length in Virgil, where he
says :
' Facilis descensus Averni,
Sed revocare gradum, superasque evadere ad auras.
Hoc opus, hie labor est.
Where hie labor, as well as hoc opus, refers to TO revocare and TO
evadere. And Cicero has used it in the same manner, where he
says, Solum igitur quod se movet. ...... hicjbns, hoc principium .est
movendi)
190 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
movendi, in Soran. Where quod se movet, (which is self-moved) is
the subject to which hie Jbns t and hoc principium refers. Thus it
is elegant to say, Hie error est, non scelus, that is, hoc negotium est
error, # non est scelus. We say, Hie est panis qui de caelo descendit,
that is, IICBC res est panis qui, &c. And in like manner addeth
Scioppius, Hie est sanguis rneus ; hoc est corpus meum, for hcsc res est
sanguis meus; hczc res est corpus meum, &c.
But this relative Syllepsis occurreth also in regard to the attribute,
when it is evidently understood, and yet without being referred
to, as when we say, Leo est animaliumjbrtis&imus ; homo animalium
divinissimus, it seems that we ought necessarily to understand ani-
mal : leo, or homo erf animal, &c. So that we conceive the neuter
gender, which would require us to putfortissimum, divinissimum,
&c. though we oftener use the masculine, that is, the gender of the
substantive expressed, according to what has been observed in the
rule of the Partitive, p. 59.
III. With an Hyperbaton.
The Syllepsis is joined with an Hyperbaton (of which we shall
treat presently) when in a sense bordering on that above explain-
ed, there is likewise an inversion of the order of words. As in the
passage of Tertullian, of which the Protestants have attempted to
avail themselves, where he says, Acceptum panem ? distributum dis-
cipulis corpus suum ilium Jecit, hoc est corpus meum, dicendo, id est
Jigura corporis mei : Jigura autem, &c. where it is plain that Jigura
corporis mei, is only the explication of the subject of the preposi-
tion, as Cardrnal du Perron proveth admirably well in his book
on the Eucharist For it means, hoc or hcsc res, id est Jigura corporis
mei, this thing which is the legal figure of my body, est corpus
?neum, is my body. For it is certain that otherwise there would be
jio sense or meaning in what follows.
CHAPTER VI.
Of the fourth Jigure, called HYPERBATON.
AN Hyperbaton is the mixture or inversion of the order of
words, which order ought to be common to all languages,
according to the natural idea we have of construction. But the Ro-
mans were so fond of figurative discourse, that they hardly ever
used any other, and Horace is the most obscure of all in this way of
writing.
The figure hajth five species.
1. ANASTROPHE, which is the inversion of words, as mecum for
cum me. Quamobrem, for ob quam rem. Qua de re, for de qua r$.
His accensa super, Virg. Ore pedes tetigitque crura, Hor. and in like
manner Quam potius for potius quam ; quamprius for priusquam.
Ilium stepe suis decedensfovit in ulnis,
Quam prius abjunctos sedula lavif equos, Prop.
Which is borrowed from the Attics, according to Scaliger, who
say tj Tr^iv, instead of rc-f iv 75.
2. TMESIS, when a word is cut in two, as Septem subjects trioni.
'OF THE H Y P E R B A T CTN. 191
Virg. for septentrioni. Garrulus hunc quando consumet cunque, Hor.
for quandocunque, &c. Quo me cunque rapit tempestas : and the like.
3. PARENTHESIS, when the sense is interrupted by parenthesis;
as Tityre dum redeo (brevis est via) pasce capellas, Virg.
4. SYNCHISIS, when the whole order of natural construction is
confounded, as
Saxa vocant Itali mediis quce injluctibus, aras, Virg.
That is, Itali vocant aras saxa ilia, quce sunt in mediis Jluctibus.
Donee regina sacerdos
Marte gravis geminam pariu dabit Ilia prolern, Id.
That is, Donee Ilia sacerdos regina, gravis Marte, dabit partu proi
Iwn geminam.
Si mala condiderit, in quern quis carmina, jus est
Judiciumque. Esto, si quis mala : sed bona si quis
Judice condiderit laudatur Ctesare, Hor.
That is, Si quis bona carmina condiderit, laudatur judice Casare.
^Estates peragct qui nigris prandia moris
Ille salubresjiniet, &c.
That is, Ille quijiniet prandia nigris moris, peraget testates salubres.
He who will finish the meal called prandium, with mulberries,
shall enjoy good health all the summer.
Et male laxus Inpede calceus hceret. Id. for male hteret.
Contra Lcevinum Valeri genus, unde Superbus
Tarquinius regno pulsusjuit, unius assis
Non unquam pretio pluris licuisse, notante
Judice, quern nosti, populo, &c. Id.
That is, Lcevinum qui est genus Valeri, 8? ti quo Tarquinius Superbus
pulsusjuit regno suo, aliquando licuisse non pluris pretio unius assis,
judice populo notante, quern tu nosii.
Habet gladium ; sed duos quibus altcro te occisurum, a'it, altero
villicum, Plaut. in Cassin. tnat is, quibus ait se occisurum, altero
ffuidem te, altero verb villicum.
To this same figure Linacer would have us refer these modes of
speaking, where a construction is used in a sense that seems quite
inverted, as in Virgil, Ibant obscuri sola sub node, ^En. 6. for
soli sub obscura node. Sceleratam intorserit hastam, Ibid, for ipsc
sceleratus. Dare classibus austros, ^En. 2. for dare austris, or com-
mittere austris classes. To expose them to the winds, which is ge-
nerally called an HYPALLAGE. Nevertheless, to be ingenuous,
these modes of speaking are not a figure of grammar. For either
they subsist in a plain and natural construction, as the latter ex-
ample, dare classibus austros ; it being indifferent in regard to con-
struction to say, dare classibus austros, or austris classes, to expose
them to the wind, or to make them receive the wind : or else it is,
a trope, or a figure of rhetoric, as sola sub node, where the night is
called sola, just as death is called pallida, because it makes us
pale.
But to this figure of Hyperbaton we may very well refer the
following elegant and useful phrases of Cicero's, where the rela-
tive is always before the demonstrative, which serves for its ante-
cedent, sun, Sed hoc non concedo 9 ut quibus rebus gloriemini in vobis,
easikm
192 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
easdem in aliis reprenendatis, Cic. Quarum enim tu rerum cogitations
nos levare cegritudine voluisti, earum etiam commemoratione lenimur^
Id. for earum rcrum quarum, &c.
Hereto we must also refer these other phrases, where the rela*
tive being placed first, it is followed by an entire period which
serves for its antecedent : as in Livy, Quod bonum,Jausium,felixque
sit, Quirites, regem create. And the like.
5. ANACOLUTHON, when there is hardly any connexion or
construction in the sentence, as in Terence, Nam omnes nos quibus
est alicunde aliquis objectus labor, omne quod est interea tempus prius-
quam id rescitum est, lucro est. And in Varro, Me in Arcadia scio
spectatum suem fpr spectasse. Likewise in Cicero, Pr&tor interea,
ne pulchrum se ac beatum putaret, atque aliquid sua sponte loqueretur,
ei quoque carmen compositum est. Cic. pro Muraena. Et enim si ora-
tiones, quas nos multitudinis judicio probari volebamus (popularis est
enim illajacultas, $* effectus eloquentia? est audientium approbatio) sed
si reperiantur nonnulii, qui nihil laudarent, nisi quod se imitari posse
confiderent, Cic. 2. Tusc. Quce qui in utramque partem excelso am-
mo magnoque despiciunt, cumque aliqua his ampla fy honesta res ovjecta
est, totos ad se convertit fy rapit : turn quis non admiretur splendorem
pulchritudinemque virtutis? Off. 1. Where we see there is no sort
of connexion in those periods. But this figure is oftentimes only a
specious term to make us overlook several things in antient authors,
which seem rather to have dropped from them inadvertently, than
to be rationally accounted for.
CHAPTER VII.
Of HELL EN ISM, or Greek Phrase.
BESIDES the figures above mentioned, it is proper also to
observe, that there are several phrases whose construction is
borrowed from the Greeks, which way of speaking is included under
the general term of Hellenism.
Linacer extends this figure to an infinite variety of expressions,
merely because they are more common among the Greeks than
among the Latins. But we shall be satisfied with referring to this
figure whatever particularly belongs to the Greek tongue, having
treated of the other things by principles which are applicable to
both languages.
I. Hellenism by ATTRACTION.
Now in order rightly to understand the expressions borrowed
from the Greek, and even to comprehend the Greek authors, we
must always distinguish in the Greek phrase between attraction
and government ; that is to say, when one case is rather attracted
by another preceding case, than governed by the verb to which
it refers. This is what Budeus transiently has observed in several
parts of his Commentaries, and what Sanctius has made a very
considerable point of; Greed, says he, e duobus casibus (sise mutuo
respiciant) alterum tantum regunt, alterum illi adjungunt, ita ut alter
ab
OF THE H E L L E N I S M. 193
eto dltero trakatur, ui vigt Adyoy wy eAe|*, de verbis quibus dixi, for
quce dixi.
Thus We find in St. Paul, TO o-u^x, vpuv vans T ex u/x~y xyitt ttitOm
pxros 5f/, % w <=> i- Cor. 6. 19. Corpus vestrum temptum
est Spiritus sancti, in vobis existentis, cujus (for quern) habetis <J
Deo. And in Demosthenes, ex ruv eV/roAwy ruv exu'io tAxQweTds ut
tl? nsAosjo'wflo-oy E7r//,4/. Ex epistotis ejus cognoscetis, quibus (for quas)
in Peloponnesum misit. And this the Latins have often imitated, as
when we find, Quum scribas 8$ aliquid agas quorum consuevisti, Luc-
ceius Ciceroni, for qua consuevisti. Sed istum, quern qutzris, ego sum,
Plaut. for ego sum quern quaris. Occurrunt animcs^ quales nee can-
didiores terra tulit, for qualibus, which Lambinus seems not to have
rightly understood.
It is by this same figure they say, Non licet mihi esse securo ; cu~
pio esse clemens. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis, Hor. Sensit medios
delapsus in hostes, Virg. and the like. Which very few have com-"
prehended ; see what has been said already in regard to this mat-
ter in the 5th rule, p. 14.
By this also it is, that a case being betwixt two verbs, shall be
sometimes attracted by the verb that it does not refer to, Itlum y ut
vivat, optant, Ter. HCBC me, ut conjidam,jaciunt, Cic. Where the
accusative seems to be put for the nominative, Optant ut ille vivat.
In like manner, Metuo lenonem ne quid suo suat capiti, for metuo ne
lenoy &c. in Phorm. Atque istud quidquid est fac me ut sciam, in
Heaut. for fac ut ego sciam.
Hence it is that one gender is sometimes attracted by another, as
Saxum antiquum, ingens, campo qui forte jacebat
Limes agro positus, Virg.
Whereto we must refer what hath been said concerning the rela-
tive betwixt two nouns of different gender, p. 6.
II. Hellenism of the Preposition KATA.
But the Latins have imitated the Greeks in no one article so
much as in those phrases, where understanding their preposition
xxrx or tn%t they put what Budeus calls an accusative absolute,
as in Theognis.
'OvSttf avQpuwuv lf<v otTFxvrx trotyls*
Mortalis sapiens omnia nemo datur.
that is Katra, VO.VTK, secundum omnia. And in Isocr. vtigu TO p.\v
tfu^tx. livxi ^iXo-Trovo?, T^V SE 4/y^v (p/Aoao^o?. Stude corpus quidem
esse amans laboris, animum autem amans sapientifE, that is, secundum
corpus, secundum animum, XXTX cru^oc, as it is in the ancient
epigram.
Os xxrx ffu^ot xa7o?, xara VBV 5' av Ifiv
, .
Qui quod ad corpus pulcher est, he says, quod ad mentem deformis,
deformis magis mihi videtur quhm pulcher.
Thus Aristophanes says yvupw Ipw, where Plato often useth
x.xra. T^V l^v, juxta meam, sup. sententiam. Thus they say T^*
j% urw y primb ; rw agxw, principio ; TO TeAos-, tandem. And thus
in imitation of them the Latins say, Expleri mentem nequit. Fractus
VOL. II. O membra.
194 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
membra. Os humerosqiie dco similis. Pacem teposcimus. Doceo te
tirles, and other such phrases, which may be seen in the annotation
to the 24th rule, p. 45. Thus it is that' they say indifferently pri-
mum for primo, tertium for tertio ; that they say tantum, quantum,
nimium, principium . in regard to which see the chapter on the Ad-
verbs, p. 145.
III. Hellenism of the Preposition EK.
It is so usual likewise with the Greeks to understand this pre-
position, which with them governs the genitive, or some other
word of the same government, that for this very reason gram-
marians imagined there were a great many verbs which governed
a genitive. Whereas, according to what hath been above observed,
the whole government is included in the preposition understood.
And hence the Latins have taken, Abstine irarum, desine lachry-
marum, regnamt populorum, and others ; concerning which see the
9th and 10th rules.
They said likewise, Imperil me divifiarum, arripuit ilium pedis,
gustamt mellis, audivit~music<z, and an infinite number of others.
Hence it is that Vitruvius hath even joined the Latin preposition
ex in this government, Descriptio ex duodecim signorum ccelestium t
&c. which deserves more to be remarked than imitated.
IV. Other more Particular Expressions, which depend
on thefgure of Hellenism.
It is likewise to the figure of Hellenism that we are to refer
these phrases, where the nominative is put for the vocative, as
hath been observed already, p. 83. Da meus ocellus, da anime mi,
Plant, which is an imitation of the Attics, or even of the ^Eolians,
whom the Latins have always endeavoured to follow.
Thus it is in imitation of the Greeks that Ovid says,
Seu genus Adrasti, seujiirtis aptus Ulysses,
Sen plus JEneas eripuissejerunt.
Because they may indifferently put either the nominative or the
accusative before the infinitive, as we have made appear in the
New Method of learning the Greek tongue ; whereas the Latin
construction admits only of the accusative on this occasion.
It is likewise by this figure that an infinitive is put after a noun,
understanding some particle by which it is governed, and whicli
answers to their $-, as in Persius,
Et pectore Icevo
Excutias guttasy Icetari prcctrepldum cor :
for usque ad Icetari. And in Virgil,
Pestis acerba bourn pecorique aspergere virus,
that is, acerba usque ad aspergere.
Hence it is that the Latins on this occasion have sometimes put
an ut, as Horace, lib. 1. od. 11.
-Neu Babylonios
Tentaris numeros, ut melius quicquid erit pail.
That is, wj-8 (pc^/y, ut melius patians, according, as Sursin and
Vossius explain it. And the same expression occurreth likewise
in
OF THE ANTIPT. AND E N A L. 195
>
X
ia Ulpian, 1. 62. as Sci'pio Gentilis observeth, In lege faciendd,
Julianas ait : UiY si duo rei prumittendi fuerintj vel si duo stipulandi,
siquidem socii sint, in ea re DIVIDI inter cos DEBERE obligationem,
where according to this author, whom Vossius hath followed, ut
ought to refer to dividi debere, as if it were ut dirndl debeat, &c.
CHAPTER VII.
Of Antiptosis and Enallage.
I. Whether we ought to join Antiptosis and Enallage to
the foregoing figures, and what the grammarians un-
derstand by these two zvords.
BESIDE the above given figures of construction, there are
wlio pretend that we ought at least to admit of Antiptosis
and Enallage.
They give the name of Enallage to every change which they
fancy in speech, and for which, as they think, there is no founda-
tion or reason, as of one mood for another, one tense for another,
one gender for. another, &c. And in- particular they distinguish
by the name of Antiptosis the change of one case for another,
which may happen, says Despauter, as many ways as there are
particular cases, because according to him, there are none but
what may be interchanged for another, by virtue of this beautiful
figure.
But who does not see that if those changes were so arbitrary and
unaccountable, the rules of grammar would be of no sort of use,
or at least we should have no right to censure a person for any
transgression whatsoever against them ? Hence this figure is indeed
the most idle thing that can be imagined, says Sanctius, Antiptosi
grammaticorum mhil imperitius, quodfigmentum si esset verum,frustr&
queer eretur, quern casum verba regerent, lib. 4.
And only to touch lightly on the principal examples which
Despauter hath given of this figure, it is an easy matter to shew
they have other foundations than he imagined, and that the rules
of grammar present nothing to us but what is supported -by reason;
though in such a multitude, we are ever to make a judicious
choice, and to pick out only what is most pure and elegant, that
is, what is most received and established by the use of good au-
thors. For though we may sometimes make use of particular
turns of expression without being guilty of error, yet it is true
what Quintilian says, that ALIUD EST GRAMMATICS, ALIUD
LATINE LOQUI.
II. Examples of the Antiptosis taken particularly from
Despauter.
Thus when Despauter saith that in this example from Livy
Quando duo consules ejus anni, alter morbo, alter Jerro periisset, &c-
the nominative is there for the genitive, duo consules for duorum
consulum ; it is evident that this is only an Ellipsis or rather a
O 2 . Zeugma,
196 NEW METHOD. Book Vlt.
Zeugma, where the verb which is expressed but once, ought to be
understood three times, duo consules periissent, alter morbo periisset t
fy alter Jerro periisset.
When he says that fortiora horum is a genitive for an ablative,
horum for his y this is only a partition, by virtue of which the ge-
nitive may be put after the comparative or even after the positive,
as we have observed, p. 59.
When he says that Saltui fy velocitati certare, in Sisen. accord-
ing to Nonius, is a dative instead of an ablative ; I say, either it
is an ablative, because formerly the dative was every where like
the ablative, pursuant to what hath been already demonstrated:
or even that the construction by the dative may be defended, this
being only the case of relation, which may be put every where, as
hath been observed, p. 25. The same may be said of the other
examples which he produces, Vino modo cupidce estis, Plaut. Mode-
rari orationi, Cic. Alienis rebus curas, Plaut. where it is only a
simple government of the dative. See the 12th rule, p. 25.
When he says thatjerax oleo in Virgil is for olei> this may be an
ablative of the manner, abounding in olive trees. Just as Ovid
says,
Terraferax Cerere, inultoquejeracior uvis.
But we may farther observe that most editions, as those of Holland,
Hobert Stephen, Ascensius, Erithreus, Farnaby, and others, hav
jerax olecz ; though Pierius owns he found oleo in some manuscripts.
When he says that in the example from Pomponius, quoted by
Nonius, ch. 9, Quot Icetitias insperatas modo mihi irrepsere in sinum,
it is an accusative for a nominative i I say, either that the passage
is corrupted, having shewn elsewhere, that this author hath fre-
quently made use of bad editions, in the examples he produces j,
or that in the above passage Pomponius hath taken irrepsere for a
verb active, which hath its nominative understood, and which
really governeth latifias; for it is very common, as we have seen
already in the list of the verbs absolute and active, p. 99. and
we shall further demonstrate in the following list by various exam-
ples of verbs of different governments; that those which are called
neuters, do govern the accusative as real verbs active. Were it
not for this, I should have no scruple to say that Icetitias irrepsere
for t&titice, is a downright solecism, and that neither an Antiptosis,
nor Nonius, nor Despauter, can justify this mode of expression.
And it is evident that Nonius did not understand this example
when he quoted it, since he refers to the same figure, Urbem quam
statuo vestra est t which is quite a different expression, and a con-
struction authorized by the use of poets, as we have already shewn
in the annotation to the second rule, p. 5.
When he says that in Nevius, Quot res hunc vis privari pulchras,
guas uti solet, this quas is an accusative for an ablative : it is only
the natural government, and the accusative to which the action of
the verb passeth. For utor governeth also sometimes the accusative,
though it be more usual with the ablative. But privari res pulchras,
is an Hellenism, which supposeth xara, just as Icetor hanc rem, and
the like, of which we have made mention already, p. 203. and in
the 24?tk rule, p. 44w, When
OF THE ANTIPT. AND ENAL. 197
When he says that in Virgil Htzret petfe pes, densu&que viro
wr, ^En. 10. it is an ablative for a dative : it is only a real da.-
tive ; but this is because the dative heretofore was always like the
ablative; as we have made appear in the 2d chapter of the re-
marks on the Nouns, n. 2. p. 83. and elsewhere.
And in regard to what Despauter addeth further, that in the
same poet,
Forte ratis celsi conjuncta crepidine saxi
Expositis stabat scads, fy ponte potato :
crepidine is likewise an ablative for the dative crepidini ; I say,
that the construction of the ablative in this passage with the ver|j
conjungo, is as natural as that of the dative, let Servius say what he
will; who insists on the same Antiptosis. This we might dempn,-
strate by an infinite number of passages even out of Cicero, De-
clarat enim summam benevolentiam conjunctam pari prude.ntia, lib. 5.
ep. 13. Ea summa miseria est summo dolors conjuncta, contra Verr.
Fannii estate conjunctus Antipater, 1. de Leg. And the reason hereof
is, this word being compounded of the preposition cum, it pre-
serveth its government also ; so that it is just as if we were to say
cum summo dolore conjuncta ; cum estate conjunctus, &c. This is so
true, that sometimes they repeated the preposition, Varro cum Si-
cinio estate conjunctus, lib. de claris Orat. This much may be also
sufficient to prove that the ancients as well as modern grammarians,
have oftentimes committed blunders, for want of having rightly
comprehended the real causes of construction and government.
III. Other examples taken from those who wrote upon
Despauter.
Behourt and others who wrote upon Despauter, have even given
a further extent to the use of this figure. For they say that
Uxor invicti Jvvis esse nescis, Hor.
is a nominative for an accusative, uxor for uxorem. Whereas it is
only an Hellenism, as hath been shewn in the preceding chapter.
They say that in Virgil,
Projice tela manu, sanguis meus,
is a nominative for a vocative. Whereas it is only an Hellenism,
as we have above demonstrated.
They say that in Pliny, Canum degeneres, is a genitive for the
nominative canes. Whereas it is only a partition ; for every noun
in the quality of a partitive may govern the genitive, as we have
shewn in the 27th rule, p. 55.
They say that abstineo irarum is a genitive for an ablative ;
whereas it is only a Greek phrase, as may be seen in the preceding
.chapter.
They say Quod mihi lateat, in Cic. is for me lateat, a dative in-
stead of an accusative ; which is without any manner of reason,
since the verb latet can govern only a dative in the Latin construc-
tion, and is never used otherwise in Cicero, as hath been shewn in
the 15th rule, p. 31.
They say that in Plautus, Curatio hanc raw, is an accusative for
a genitive, hujus rei. But we have demonstrated that this phrase
f was
198 NEW METHOD. Book VII.
was very common in Plautus's time, and that it is only a natural
construction, because as the noun verbal generally denotes the
action of the verb, it may likewise preserve the government
thereof, since it is only by virtue of this action that the verb
governeth an accusative.
IV. Examples of the Enallage.
But these authors go further. For whereas Despauter speaks
only of the Antiptosis, or interchanging of cases, as appears in the
edition of Robert Stephen, which I have made use of; they have
added four verses to this rule, to mark the same change in gender,
person, tense, mood, and number.
1. In gender, they say that this happeneth both to nouns and
verbs. To nouns, as
Tamen vel virtus tua me, vel vicinitas,
Quod ego in propinqua parte amicititz puto,
Facit Ter.
Where quod, say they, is for quce. Whereas quod supposeth nego-
tium for its substantive, ivJiich thing. And is a mode of speaking,
that ought to be referred to the figure of Syllepsis, which hath
been explained already, p. 185.
To verbs, as bellantur for bellant.
< Et pictis bellantur Amazones armis, Virg.
But you may see other examples above quoted, in the list of verbs
deponent, p. 101. Which is owing entirely to this, that hereto-
fore there were more verbs common than at present.
1. In person, as in Terence in Phorm. act. 1. sc. 2.
GET. Si quis me queer et rufus. DAY. Prcesto est, desine.
Where prtesto est, say they, is for prtzsto sum, because Davus speaks
of himself. But if there be any figure in this, it is rather of rhe-
toric than of grammar, because he answers to what the other had
said of him in the third person, Si quis me quccret nifus. And it is
the same figure, as when in the 4th scene Geta says of himself in
the second person,
Nullus es Geta, nisi jam aliquod tibi consilium celere repperis, &c.
Which is only a turn of expression where one person is introduced
for another ; a thing common to all languages.
3. In tense, vicimus for mncemus;- as Huic si esse in orbe tuib liceat,
vicimus, Cic. Attic. But again if this be a figure, it belongs to
rhetoric, and not to grammar; as it is very common in narratives
to make use of the present in recounting past transactions. For
the anticipating or combining of tenses is very common in rhetoric;
but this does not relate to grammar, which one way or other finds
its government.
4. In mood, as valebis for vale, Cic. But we have made ap-
pear above, p. 109, that the imperative was only a real future ;
and therefore we ought not to be surprised if they were frequently
put one for the other.
Romanif est mare, parare, &c. forfestinabant, parabant, say the)''.
But this is only an ellipsis of a verb understood, as cceperunt, or
some other which governs this infinitive, according to what we
have shewn, p. 170.
5. In
OF THE ANTIPT. AND E N A L.
5. In number. But here it can only be a figure of rhetoric, as
when they give for instance, dedimus operam, Cic. for dedi-, which
is very common ; or they must be things referrible to the prece-
dent figures ; as Nominandi istorum tibi erit magis qu&medendi copia,
Cic. Where they will have it that edendi is the singular for the
plural edendorum ; whereas it is but an Ellipsis of TO edere understood,
as we have shewn in the chapter of Gerunds, p. 125. Sitempus est
uUumjure hominis necandi, quce multa sunt, Cic. This is only a Syl-
lepsis, of which we have made mention above, p. 186; and the
like may be said of the rest. Whence we conclude that all that
can be said of the figures of grammar, may be reduced to the four
above laid down, or to Hellenism.
Therefore I am of opjnion that upon a careful perusal of what
hath been said in the Syntax, and in these remarks, very few
difficulties will arise in regard to government that may not easily
be solved, and that hardly any pasage will occur in ancient
authors, but what may be accounted for. But as the chief found-
ation of all languages depends on practice, I have endeavoured
to collect here a multitude of verbs of different governments, which
perhaps will be the more useful, as some of them are not to be
found even in the most copious dictionaries. They are comprised
in the following list, which is only an abridgment of a more ex-
tensive work, wherein we intended to include every remark that
could be made on the elegance of this language, for the service
of those who endeavour to write pure Latin ; and perhaps some
day or other we may publish a separate work on this subject for
the use of learners, if ever we find that they have derived any
benefit from this abridgment,
$00
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
LIST OF VERBS
OF
DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS.
A.
ABALIENARE aliquid, or aliquid
alicujus, Cic. to alienate, Aliquem
ab altero, se ab alio, alium a se, volun-
tatem alicujus ab aliquo, id.
ABDERE se litteris 3f in litteras : se
in tenebris, id. to hide or bury one'* self.
ABDICARE, simply, or magistratum,
or se magistratu, id. to abdicate, or to
resign.
ABDICARE aliquem, Tac. to renounce
him.
ABDUCERE a consuetudine, Cic. to
Ireak ojf, or wean from a custom. Ab
omni reip. cura, id. to retire, to re-
sign. Vi & per vim, id. to carry off
by main f.rce. In aliquem locum, id.
Ex acie, id. A fide, id. Ad nequi-
tiam, Ter.
Me convivam abducebat sibi, Cic.
Equitatum ad seabducere, id. to draw
the cavalry to himself.
ABERRARE proposito, # a proposito,
id. to wander from his subject.
Nihil equidem levor, sed tamen
aberro, id. but at least I divert myself.
Aberratio a dolore, id. any diversion
that gives an allay to grief.
Aberrat ad alia oratio, id. digresses.
Aberrant inter se orationes, Liu. do
not agree.
Artificem ne in melius quidem sinas
aberrare, Plin. do not suffer him to depart
from his model, even though he were to
mend it.
ABESSE urbe, domo, ft ab urbe, ab
dpmo, f ic. to be absent. Alicui abesse,
id. to be wanting towards him, to forsake
him. In alteicationibus abesse, id. not
to be there.
ABHORRET facinus ab illo, id. he
is far from committing such a Kicked
action.
Parum abhorrens famam, Liv. not at
all afraid of defamation.
Illud abhorret a fide, Cic. that is alto-
gether incredible.
Ab ducenda uxnre abhorret, id. he
has an aversion to matrimony.
ABJICEKE se alicui ad pedes, #
ad pedes alicujus, Cic. to throw himself
at his feet.
Abjiceie se & prosternere, id. Consi-
lium sediScandi abjicere, id. to lay aside
all thoughts of building.
Abjicere ad terram, id. in herbam, id.
humi, Plin. to throve upon the ground.
Cogitationes in rem .burn Hem abji-
cere, Cic. to apply his thoughts to it.
Abj cere animum, id. to desp<md.
ABIRE magistratu, id. to finish his
office.
Ab emptione, id. to depart from his
bargain. Ad vulgi opinionem, id. to be
ltd away by vulgar opinion.
Abire, a, ab, de, e, ex, loco, id. to be
gone, to go out, to retire.
Non hoc sic tibi abibit, Ter. you shall
not escape thus.
Abi in malam crucem, Ter. go and
hang yourself.
ABJUDICARE sibi libertatem, Cic. to
shew himself unworthy of liberty. Se vita,
Plaut. to part with fife.
ABNUERE aliquid alicui, Cic. Alicui
de re aliqua, Sal. to refuse him some-
thing.
ABROGARE legem or legi, Liv. the
former more usual, to demand the repeal
of a law.
ABSTINERE sese dedecore, animum
a scelere, Cic. to abstain. Igmm ab
sede, Liv. not to tetjire to it. JEgrum
a cibo, Cels.
Abstinere jus belli ab aliquo, Liv.
not to treat him with the full severity of
the rights of war.
Abstinere maledictis f a maledictis,
Cic.
Abstinere irarunl, Hor. Flacidis bo-
nis, Ovid.
Abstine isti hanc tu manum, Plaut.
ABSTRUDERE in fundo, in silvan), Cie.
to hide.
ABUTI studiis, id. to make a wrong
use of his studies. Operam abutitur,
Ter. he I'seih his labour.
ACCEDERE alicui proxime, Cic. Virg
Deo ad similitudiuem, Cic. to re-
semble. Ad aliquem, Cic. to draw
near
/3tc- xt..
.*./ ^**
^C
**
^-* f^~4.l/t.
V^ttr*- *{^^ , ^t-
*^^-~ xL^r^^" /^
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 201
near him. Alicui ad aurem, id.
Quos accedam ? Sail. sup. ad. to
whom shall I apply ? Quas vento ac-
cesserit oras, Virg. sup. in. to what coast
the winds will d>ivr him
Accedit quod, Cic. there is this be-
sides y or simply, besides, mnieoorr.
ACCIDERE. Omnia enim secundis-
siiiia uobis, adversissima illis accidisse,
id. to have happened. Where we see
that this verb is taken either for good
or bad fortune.
ACCIFEKE ab aliquo, Ter. De ali-
quo, Cic. Ex aliquo, Plant, to receive
or tn learn from a person.
Accipeie in contumeliam, Ter f to
take in bad par I.
Acci ptum plebi, C&s. Apud plebem,
Plant. In plebem, Tac. agreeable to
lite people.
Acceptum, or in acceptum referre,
Cic. to be obliged; properly, it is to place
io your account.
ACQUIESCERE lecto, Catul. to rest upon
the bed. Alicui rei, Sen. to set one's
heart upon a thing, to fix upon it.
In tuo.vultu acquiesco, Cic. your pre-
sence gives me comfort*
AD^EQUARE cum virtute fortunam,
id tit be no less successful than brave.
Aliquem s bi, id. to render him equal to
one's self.
Judices adaequarunt, id- the judges
mere divided.
ADDICEUE moiti, id. In servitutem,
Liv. to condemn to.
Addicere liberum, Cic. to declare one
free.
Ni aves addixissent, id. Jf the augu-
ral birds had not approved it by their
signs. The contrary is ABDICERE.
ADKSSE omnibus pugnis, id. to be
present at every battle. Ad exercftum,
Plant. Ad portam, Cic. In causa, in
aliquo loco, ad tempus, id.
Adesse alicui, id. to favour him, to as-
sist him with one's credit, or presence.
ADH/BRERE castris, ^ppul. In re
aliqua, Ovid. Ad rem aliquam, Plant.
In rem aliquam, Cic. to slick to, io ad-
here, or keep close to.
ADHIBERE severitatem in aliquQ, or
in, aliquem, id. tQ use severity. Jleveren-
tiain adversus, or erga aliquem, \d.
Adhibere vinum tegrotis, id. to give
them tiine.
ADICERJ jusjurapdum, or aliquem
jurejurando, or aliquem ad jusjuran-
<Jptn, Liv. Per jqsjurandqm, C. to
oblige by oath.
ADIRE aliquem, ad aliquem, in jus,
Cic. toga to see, to go, &c. Ilia pericula
adeuntur praliis, id. they run those
risks in battle.
ADJOXGERE aliquem alteri 6f ad ami-
citiaui alteri us, id. to make him his
friend. In sucietatem adjungere, Liv.
ADMISCERE aliquid in aliud, Plin.
Alicui, or cum aliquo, Cic. to mingle
v.ith.
Admisceri ad aliquod concilium, id.
to be admitted to it.
ADMONERE, See Monere.
ADULI SCIT aetas, ratio, cupiditas, id.
Vi'g. ftrows, waxis strong.
Adolescere ad a'lquam aetatem, Plin*
Annostersenos, Ovid. In partum, Colum.
Adojescunt ignibus arae, Virg. are
covered with the fire of the sacrifices.
Flammis adolere penates, id.
ADOPTARE sibi filium, Cic. Aliquem
pro filio, Plant. Io adopt him. Aliquem
in divitias, Plfn. io make him his heir.
Aliquem ab aliquo, Cic. Se alicui or-
dini, Pirn.
ADSCRIBE.RE civitati, in civitatem, or
in civitate, Cic. to make him free of the
city.
ADVERSARI alicui, id. Aliquem, Liv.
Contra & adversus aliquem, Plant, to
resist, to contradict.
Ambitioneui scriptorisadversari, Tac.
Adversari quominus aliquid fiat, Cic.
to hinder.
ADVERTERE, simply, Ter. Animujn*
Liv. Animo, Plin. to give attention.
Advertere urbi agmen, Virg. to make
it draw near, to make tt lake the read
towards the city.
Scythias adverteret oras, Ovid, -was
arrived.
Advertere inaliquero, Tacit, to punish
him.
ADJILARE. Pinnata cauda nostrum,
adulat ganguinem, Cic. Ex. veteri poet&.
Si Dionysium non adulares, Vol.
Max. from thence comelh ADUI-OR, / os-
sive. Cavendum est ne asstntatoribus
patefaciamus aures ne adulari nos sina-
mus, Cic. Tiibuuus militum adulatus
erat, Val. May.
bwi.wi deponent. Adulari aliquem,
Cic. Alicui, Siu. to ftatler a person.
The former is preferable ey en according
to Quintilian.
A-WUI.ARI alicui, Cic. to tear tnxy to a
person. Aliquem, id. to endeavour tQ
surpass him.
instituta alicujus, id. tQ
to surpass.
i cum aliquo, Liv. to rival a
person.
Invicem aemulari, Quint, io rival one
another.
JLsTiMARE aliquem, Plant. De all-
quo, Cic. to esteem him.
^stimare magni, or magno, id.
JEstimare litetn capitis, id, to judge
202
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
person deserving of death, or qf banish-
ment.
AGGREDI aliquem dictis, Virg. ali-
quem de re aliqua, Plant, to speak to him
about something. Aliquicl, Cic. to begin.
Ad injuriam faciendum, id.
AGERE rem, or de re, id. aliquem,
orpartes alicujus, id. Cum populo, id.
Lege or ex lege, id. to treat, to act, to do.
Agere se pro equite, Suet, to act as a
knight. Agere gratias de re, in re, pro
re, in res singulas, Cic. to thank.
AGITARE animo, Liv. Cum animo,
Sail. Mente, Sail. In mente, Cic.
Secum, Ter. to revolve a thing in one's
mind.
ALLATRARE magnitudinem alicujus,
Liv. to exclaim against.
Allatrant maria oram maritimam,
Plin. to beat against. .
Allalrare alicui has not the authority
of pure writers. It is true that the
following passage is quoted from the
book de Viris illust. attributed to Pli-
ny: In Capitolium intempestd nocteeunti,
canes allatraverant. But besides that
one might perhaps read node eunte,
Vossius also observeth that the author
of this book was not Pliny, but Sextus
Aurelius Victor, who lived about two
hundred years later, when the language
was greatly corrupted.
ALLEGARE alicui, or ad aliquem, Cic.
to send towards a person. Hominem
alicui rei, Plaut. to send him to treat
about something.
Allegare senem, Ter. to depute an old
man.
AMBUI.ARE pedibus, Cic. to walk.
Foro transverso, id. to walk across the
market. In jus, id. In littore, id.
Ambulat hoc caput per omnes leges,
Plin. to occur every where.
Ambulare maria, Cic.
Ambulantur stadia bina, Plin.
From the last two examples it ap-
peareth that this verb may be active,
and that Quintilian, lib. 1. c. 5. had no
reason to say that ambulare viam was a
solecism, since at the most it is only a
pleonasm, and ey^ery verb, as we have
demonstrated in the Syntax, rule 14. p.
29. and in the Remarks,p.98. may govern
the accusative of a noun derived from
itself, or of nearly the same signification.
ANGERE sese animi, Plaut. aliquem
kicommodis, id. Angit animum quoti-
diana cura, 7>r.
ANGI animo, Cic. Re aliqua, or de
re, id. to be vexed.
ANHELARE scelus, id. to think of no-
thing but villainy.
Amnis anhelat vapore, Plin. throws
out vapours.
Verba inflata et anhelata^ Cic. pro-
nounced with great exertion of voice, and
that put us out of breath.
ANIMADVERTO aliquid, Ter. I look at
it and- consider it. In aliquem, Cic. I
punish.
ANNUERE coeptis, Virg. to favour.
Victoriam, Virg. to promise. Aliquos,
Cic. to shew.
ANQUIRERE aliquid, id. to inform.
Capitis, or de capite, Liv*
ANTECEDERE alteri, or alterum aetate,
Cic. to surpass him in years.
ANTECELLO tibi hac re, id. Ilium
hac re, id. aliis in re aliqua, id. Qui
caBteris omnibus rebus his antecellun-
tur, Ad Her en.
ANTEIRE alicui, Plaut. Aliquem,
Sail.
ANTESTARE alicui, or aliquem, Gell.
to excel or surpass a person in something.
ANTEVENIRE alicui, Plaut. to go to
meet him. Aliquem, id. to prevent him.
Omnibus rebus, id. to surpass him in
every thing. Nobilitatem, Sail, to sur-
pass the nobility.
ANTEVERTERE alicui, Ter. to outstrip,
to be beforehand with, to prevent.
Fanning id ipsum antevertit, Cic. Fan-
nius was beforehand with me in that.
APPELI.ARE aliquem sapientem, id. to
call him wise, Suo nomine, id. to call
him by his name.
Appellare tribunes, id. Ad tribunes,
id. to appeal to the tribunes.
Appellari pecunia, Quint, de pecu-
nia, Cic. to be dunned.
Caesar appellatus ab ^Eduis, Cess.
that is, the JEdui being come to beg hit
assistance. And this verb is very re-
markable in this signification.
APPELLERE ad aliquem, Cic. to bring
to land. Aliquem alicui loco, id.
Animum ad philosopbiam, id. Ter.
to apply.
APPELLERE classe in Italian), Virg.
appcllere classem, Cic. ad villam no-
stram navis appellitur, id. is brought to
land.
We say therefore navis, or classis ap-
pellitur, just as we say navem, or classem
appellere, but not navis or classis apputit,
says Schotus. Yet navis appulit occurs
in Suetonius' Life of Galba; which
should not be imitated without great
cautkm.
APPROPINQUARE portas, or ad
portas, Hirt, JJritanniae, Goes, to ap-
proach.
ATVDERE,
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 203
ARDERE, or FLAGRARE ODIO, are said
actively for the hatred we bear to
others, and passively for the hatred
others bear to us. Examples hereof
are very common.
Ardebat Sirius Indos, Virg. for Ad-
urebat. Ardebat Alexim, Virg. was
passionately fond of him.
Ardeo te videre, Plin. Jan. I am im-
patient to see you.
Ardere in anna, Virg. Avaritia,
Cic. A more, id. ,
ARRIPERE alicui, Cic. to smile at him,
and to please him.
Arrident cedes, Plaut. do please mf,
do suit me. Flavius id arrisit, Cell,
teemed (o approve of Hint.
Arrideri, Passive, the contrary of
Derideri, Cic.
ASPERGERE labem ajicui, or dignitati
alicujus, id. to blacken him, to speak ill
of him.
Maculis vitam aspergere, id.
ASPIRARE in curiam, id. ad ali-
quem, id. to endeavour to reach to, or to
obtain.
Aspirat primo fortuna labori, Virg.
favoureth.
Vento aspirat eunti, Virg. JEn. 5.
Et modicis fenestellis Aquilonibus as-
pirentur, Colum. for inspirentur.
ASSENTIRE or IRI alicui, simply, or
else alicui aliquid, or de re aliqua,
or in re aliqua, to grant something to a
person. Instances hereof occur fre-
quently.
But this verb ought not to be con-
founded with CONSENTIO, which signi-
fieth rather the agreement of the will,
whereas ASSENTIO is to submit or to agree
to another's judgment.
ASSERVARE in carcerem, Liv. Domi
6U8B, Cic. to keep.
ASSUEFACERE and ASSUESCERE, ad
aliquid, or in aliquo, are not Latin,
sais Scholvs. I own they occur but
seldom ; yet the latter is in Quinti-
iian.
But Schotus was still more mistaken,
when he fancied that this verb could
be joined with the ablative only, As-
svescere aliqua re. Whereas its proper
construction is to put a dative, as
Robert Stephen observeth. For which
reason Murftus and the best writers of
variee lectiones, have restored the dative
Trherever the ablative was put before,
as in the 2. Cutil. Assuefactus frigori
& fami & siti & vigiliis perferendis,
inured to.
There are even some passages where
this government cannot be at all doubt-
ed of, Carilas soli, cut tongo iempore
assuescito, L,v. So that if there be
sometimes an ablative used on this oc-
casion, it cannot be any other than the
ablative of the manner.
ASSERERE aliquid, Cic. to affirm it.
Aliquem manu, Liv. to set him at liber-
ty. In libertatem, Id. Asserere se,
Ovid, (o assert or recover his liberty. Ali-
quem coelo, Ovid, to canonize. A mor-
talitate, Plin. Jun. Sibi aliquid, Plin.
Se sturliis, Plin.
ASTARE in conspectu, Cic. to present
himself. In ttimulum, z'r/. to be near.
Astitit mini contra, Plant, he opposed
me strongly.
ASSURGERE ex morbo, Liv. to re-
cover from sickness. Alicui, Cic. to rise,
up to one, to do him reverence. In arbo-
rem, Plin. to grow vp to a tree.
Assurgi, Passive, Cic. to be done re-
verence to.
ATTENDERE aliquem, id. to listen to
him. Primum verso in legis, id. to
consider it. Animum, or animum ad
aliquid, id. to apply one's self. Alicui
rei, id. to take notice of it.
ATTINERE aliquem, Tac. to retain
one. Ad aliquid, or ad aliquem, Cic.
to concern him, to belong to him. Nunc
jam cultros attinet, Plaut. he has them
already.
Attineri stud i is, Tac. to be fond of
study.
AUSCULTARE alicui, Plaut. Cic. to
obey him. Aliquem, Plaut. to listen to
him.
B.
BETLARE alicui, Stat. Cum. aliquo,
Cic. to fight against him.
Take notice that all verbs of fight-
ing, quarrelling, resisting, contesting,
and the like, are more elegantly joined
with the preposition cum and its ablative,
than with the dative.
C.
CADERE alte, or ab alto, Cic. In
piano, Ovid. In terram, Lucr. In
unius potestatem, Cic. to fall.
Cadere formula, Quint, to be cast in
law, to lose the suit.
Non cadit in virum bonum mentiri,
Cic. an honest man is incapable of telling
a lie.
Nihi! est quod in ejusmodi mulierem
non cadere videalur, id. there is nothing
but what suits her very well.
Honesta et jucunda ceciderunt mihi
a te, id. happened to me on your part.
C^ELARE argentum argento, &f in ar-
gento, Cic. to chase or emboss.
Caelare flumiua et bestias in vasis,
Ovid.
204
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Ovid. Opus caelatum novem musis,
Hor. where the whole f nice of human art
and industry hath been exerted.
CALERE. Thure caleut aras, Virg.
Aures nostrac calent iliius crimiaibus,
Cic. our earn ring with.
Cum caletur maxime. Plant, sup.
Color. For then it is passive, whence
we may infer that it has also its active.
For which reason Sanctius maintaineth
that we may say, Calere rem aliquarn,
or re aliqua, to have a passion for a
thine,. And it is in this sense, accord-
ing to him, that we say, Iliius sensum
pulchr& calleo, Ter. 1 know htm well.
Calere jura, Cic. to know.
I am not ignorant that all the dic-
tionaries make a distinction between
these two verbs, calro and calleo, and
that Cicero seems to derive the latter
from callum. But one would think that
callum rather comes from caleo, since a
callosity proceeds from action often re-
peated, which first engenders heat, and
afterwards the hardness of skin. And
indeed, callere ad suum qucestum, in
JMautus, seems rather to imply a par-
ticular attention and warmth of the
mind, than an inveterate habit or
custom.
CANERE aliquem, Cic. Super ali-
quo, id. to sing the praises of a person.
Sibi intus canere, id. to care for no body
tut himself, to praise himself.
CARERE commodis, id. not to have the
e-onvtniencies.
Praeterquam tui carendum quod erat,
Ter.
In quod amo, careo, Pla.ul.
Caruit te ft bris, Pla,ut. the fever did
not seize you.
CAVERE aliquid, Cic. Hor. to avoid,
to take cure of. Alicui, Cic-. to watch
over his preservation. Ab aliquo, id. to
guard against him. Malo, for a malo,
Pelron. De verbis qlicujus, Plant. Ca-
Tere obsidibus de pecunia, Cees. to give
security by hostages. Sibi obsidibus ab
aliquo, id. to t<ike security Uy hostages.
Quod nihil de iis Augustus testa-
mento cavisset, Suet.
We say Cavere aliquo, or per ali-
quem, Cic. to take bail or security of a
person.
Camera quae quidem provider! pote-
runt, cavebuntur, id.
CEDERE locum, Slat. LOQO, Cic.
Cies. to quit. Ad locum, Liv. to go
thither. vita, Cic. to die. Exitio,
Ovid, to turn out to one's destiuclian.
In proverbium, to become a proverb.
Intra finem juris, Liv. to abide within,
the limits of his right.
Cedere alicui, Virg. to comply with a
person.
Cessit mihi, irf. it has happened tome.
Honori non cedere, Virg. to deserve
no less honour than is done us.
Haereditas alicui cedit, Virg. remain*
to him.
Pro pulmentario cedit, Colum. is takeg.
for nourishment.
Cedit dies, Ulp. when the day of pay-
ment begins to draw near.
CELARE. See the Syntax, rule 24,
p. 43.
CERTARE laudibus .alicujus, Virg. to
oppose his greatness. Cum aliquo, Cic.
to fight. JBello de re aliqua, Liv.
Secum, Cic. to endeavour to surpass
him.
Certat vincere, Virg. he strives t
overcome.
Certare aliquid, Hor. to strive to tfo a
thing.
Si res certabitur, Hor. if the thing
comes to be ai -puled.
The latter examples shew that this is
really an active verb, and therefore Re-
gius had no reason to find fault with
Ovid for saying
Certatam lite Dforum Amnradam.
CIRCUNDARE oppidum castris, C<E&.
Oppido moenia, to surround or invest.
COGITARE ammo, id. In animo,
Ter. Cum animo, Plavt. Secum, Ter.
to think.
Aliquid, or de re aliqua, Cic.
COIBE iu unum, V>rg. to assemble
together. Societatem cum aliquo, Cic.
to make an alliance.
Societas coitur, id.
Immitia placidis coeunt, Hot. are
mixed with.
Milites coeunt inter se, C$s. to join
battle y to rally.
COLI.OQUI alicui K aliquem, Plant.
Cum aliquo, Cic. to speak.
Inter se colloqui. Cic. COM. to con-
vers* wiih one another.
CQMMITTERE se alicui, Czc. Se ia
fidem alicujus, Ter. to put one's self UQ-
der his protection. Aliquem cum alio,
Mart. Inter se omnes, Suet, to set the
all together by the. ears.. Lacum nfiari,
Plm. to join i(.
COMMODARP aurum, Cic. to lend goffl.
Alicui, simply, or se alicui, id. to assist
him. In rebus alicui, id. De IOCQ
alipui, id.
COMPLERE armato milite, Virg.
pletos mercatorum oarcer, Cic,
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 205
aliquid alicui, or cum
aliquo, Virg. to compare, to confront, to
join together.
Componere se ad exemplum, Quint,
to conform to example.
CONCEDE, Plant, to die. Peti-
tioni alicujiis, Cic. to condescend, to
grant. De jure suo, id. Injurias reipub.
id.
Conoedere in aliquem locum, &c.
See Cedere.
CONCICIARE aliquem, Cic. Ad al-
terum, Plaut. Homines inter se, Cic.
Animos aliquorum ad benevoleritiam
erga alios, id. Conjunctionem cum ali-
quo, id. Pacem ab aliquo, Plaut. for
cum aliquo.
CO^CLUDERE se in cellam, Ter. In
cavea, Plaut. to shut one's self up.
Kes multas in unum, Ter. to put them
together.
CONCURRERE cum aliquo, Sil. Ali-
cui, Virg. to fight. See Bellare here
above.
CONDEMNARE crimine, criminis, or de
crimine, Cic. to conde/nnfjr. Omnes de
consilii sententia, id. with the opinion of
the whole council.
Condemnare alicui, Ulp.
CONDEKE in sepulchre, Cic. Humo
et in humo, Ovid, to bury. In furnum,
Plaut. to put into the oven. Moenia,
Virg. to build.
CONDICERE ccenam alicui. Suet.
Ad coenam aliquem, Plaut. to invite to
supper.
Condicere alicui, simply, Cic. to pro-
mise to sub with him.
CONDUCERE virgines in unum lo-
cum, id. to bring them together. Ali-
quem, Plant, to hire him to do something.
De ceusoribus, Cic, to take a tease of the
censors.
Conducit hoc tuae laudi, id. is cnndu-
iVt: to. In rem, Plaut. Ad rem ali-
quam, Ctc.
CONFERRE tributa, id. to pay. No-
vissima primis, id. to compare. Se in
or ad urbem, id. to go to twn. Omne
studium ad rem aliquam, id. to apply
one's self entirely to it. Crimen in ali-
quem, id. to throw the blame upon him.
Seria cum aliquo, Ovid, to confr. Ca-
pita, Cic. to have a private meeting, to
speak tete-a-tlte.
Pestem hominibus conferunt, Colum.
do giv thm the i)lugue.
Neminem cum illo conferendum
piefcite puto. Cic. Conferunt a<l tetn-
p~erand<.>s calores, C<lum. contribute to.
Ifec oratori futuro conferunt, 2uint.
fire of service.
CONFIDRRE virtuti, Cfft. to confid*
in his strength. Anirrio et spe, id. In
aliquo, Ilirt. Aliqu& re. Multum na
tura loci confidebant, Ccts.
Confiteri crimen, Cat. to confess. Dft
maleiicio id. to acknowledge it. Ut da
me confitear, id. to tpeak ingenuously of
what regards me.
CONFLICTARE K Ri. Conflictati tem-
pestatibus k sentinae vitiis, CcPi.incom*
moded to the highest degree, fee.
Qui cum ingeuiis conflictatur ejus-
modi, Ter. who haunts, who converses.
Rempublicam conflictare, Tac. to af-
flict.
CONGERERE tilulos alicui, Sen. to load,
him with titles. Crimen in aliquem,
Cic.
CONGREDI alicui, Goes. Aliquem,
Plaut. to draw near him. Cum hoste 3T
contra hostem, Cic. to attack him.
COKGRUERE. Congruunt liters li-
teris aliorum, id. do agree.
Congruunt inter se, Ter. agree toge-
ther. Congruit sermo tibi cum ilia,
Plaut.
CONJUNGERE. Conjuncta virtuti for-
tuna, Cic. joined.
Conjuncta & sociata cum altera, id.
Conjuncta mihi cura de rep. cunt
illo, id.
Conjungi hospitio & amicitia, id. tt
be joined by the ties of hospitality and
frienfakip.
CONQUER! rem aliquam, or de re
aliqua, id. Ob rem aliquam, Suet. t
complain. Cum aliquo, Cic. Pro ali-
quo, id.
CONQUIESCERE 2l re aliqua, id. it
leave off, to be respited. In re aHqua,
id. to take a delight in it.
Hieme bella conquiescunt, id. d*
cease. Nisi perfect^ re, de me non
conquiesti, id.
CONSCENDERE navem, id. in navem,
Lent. Cic. to embark.
CONS ENTIRE sibi or secum, id. to
be consistent with one's self. Alicui, ot
cum aliquo, id. to agree with him. Ali-
quid or de aliquo, or ad aliquid, id. to
agree about somrth/ng. In aliquem, Ulp.
to a free to take him for an arbitrator.
In etim omnes illud consentiunl elo-
pium, Cic. thry agree re-fh one voice to
bestow this enconiium on him.
A-trum nostrum consentit incrcdibili
modn, Hor.
CONSFQUI aliquem itlnere, vel in iti-
nere, C,r. to overtake him.
Aliqnid consequi, id. to obtain it t tcf
a'n his end.
manum or manu cum
hoste.
206
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
hoste, id. the former more usual, tojighi
hand to hand, io come to handy strokes.
Diem nocti, Ovid, to join night with day
upon an affair. Artes belli inter se,
Liv. Baccho aliquem locum, Virg. to
plant vines.
CONSIDERS aliquo loco, vcl in aliquo
loco, Cic. to stop there.
CONSTARE 'per ipsum, id. to depend
only upon himself. Sibi, C'ic. Hor. to be
consistent with himself. Ex multis, C/c.
io be compounded of .
Agri constant campis & vineis, Plin.
consist of ji elds and vineyards.
Constat gratis tibi navis, Cic. costs
you nothing. Auri ratio, id. the sum is.
entire.
v Non constat ei color neque vultus,
Liv. his colour and countenance changes.
Mente vix constat, Cic. he is hardly in
his senses.
Hoc constat, or constat inter omnes,
id. it is beyond all doubt.
Constat hac de re, Quint. Plin.
Constat hoc mihi tecum, Ad Her en.
CONSUESCERE alicui, Ter. Cum ali-
quo, Plant, io frequent his company.
Consuescere pronuntiare, Cic. to ac-
custom one's self to. Adeo in teneris
consuescere multum est, Virg. Plaustro
& aratro juvencmn consuescere, Colum.
Omnia pericula a pueritia consueta ha-
beo, Sail.
CONSULERE boni, Quint. Plaut. to
take in good part. Alicui, Cic. to do him,
set vice. Aliquem, id. to ask counsel*
Consul! quidem te a Csesare scribis, sed
ego tibi ab illo consuli mallem, id. but
to signify, I give you counsel or advice, we
say rather, Autor tibi sum.
Consulo te hauc rem, or de hac re,
id.
Consulo in te, Ter. I am contriving
something for you, or against you.
Consulere in commune, Ter. to con-
stilt the public good.
CONTENDERS alicui, Hor. Cum ali-
quo, Cic. Contra aliquem, id. to dis-
pute, to maintain a thing against an-
other.
Contendere aliqukl ab aliquo, id.
Contendere animum, Ovid. Animo,
Cic. to bend one's mind. Cursum, Virg.
Plaut. to run swiftly. In aliquem lo-
cum, Cic. to make all expedition to a
place.
Contendere rem cum ali re, id.
Alicui rei, Hor. to compare it.
CONTINOERE se inter se, or inter
sese, Plaut. Colum. to touch one another,
to be allied.
Atque in magnis ingeniis id plerum-
que contigit, Cic. hath often happened.
Contigit mihi, id. it has happened to
me.
Contingit mihi, id. it relates to me, it
belongs to me.
Contingere funem, Virg. to touch.
CONVENIRE cum aliquo, Cic. to agree
very well with a person. S.bi, id. to
preserve always an evenness of temper.
Ad aliquem, id. to go to meet one. Ali-
quem, P/aut. to talk with him t In jus,
Plaut. to sue him.
Convenit inter utrumque, Cic. they
are both agreed. Mihi cum illo, id. t
am of his opinion. Ad eum haec contu-
meli:i, id. concerns him.
Aliam aetatetn aliud factum, Plaut.
becomes belter.
Haec fratri mecum non conveniunt,
Ter. docs not agree with me in this.
De hoc parum convenit, Quint, they
are not well agreed about this.
Hoc maledictum in illam aHatem non
convenit, Cic. does not suit or become.
CUPERE alicui, Cic. C<ES. Alicujus
causa, Cic. to favour him.
Aliquem, Ter. Cic. to seek and desire,
his company.
Cupit te videre, Plaut. Te conven-
tum, id.
D.
DAMNARE sceleris, or nomine sceleris
aliquem, Cic. De vi, de majestate, id.
to condemn. Ad poenatn in opus, in
metallum, Plin. Jun.
DARE literas alicui, Cic. to give or to
put them into his hands.
Litteras ad aliquem, id. to send or direct
letters to him. Se fugae cX" in fugam, id.
to run away. Se ad lenitatem, id. to be
extremely mild. Gemitum^C se gemitui,
Cic. Virg. to moan. Operam, el ope-
ram alicui rei, in rem aliquam, ad rem,
aliquam faciendam, Cic. to be employed
about a thing. Mandata alicui, id.
Aliquid in mandatis, Plaut. io give in
charge. Se in viam, Cic. In manutn
# in manu, Ter. Cic.
Dederat comas diffundere ventis,
Virg. loose was her hair, and wantoned
in the wind. Dare manum alicui.lVau/.
to shake hands.
Dare mantis, Cic. to give up, to yield.
Cibo dare, Plin. to give to eat. Dare
vit'to, Cic. to blame.
Da Tityre nobis, Virg. tell us.
Dare oblivioni, Liv. to forget. The
contrary is MANTIARE MEMORY, Cic. to
transmit to posterity, to commit to me-
mory, to retain, to learn by heart. But
OBLIVIONI MANDARE, which several mo-
derns make use of, is not Latin, fur it
cannot be found iu any good writer.
DEBERB
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 207
DEBERE amorem et omnia in aliquetn, Defendere civem k periculo, id. Myr-
trf. tibi debemus, id. we are indebted to tos a frigore, Virg. to pretense them.
^tatem capellis, Hor. Solstitium pe-
cori, Virg. to shelter them from the heat*
DEFICERE ab aliquo, Cic. Liv. to de-
sert his party. Animo vel anitnis^ Cic.
Animum, Varr. to lose co irage.
Dies & latera & vox me deGciunt,
Cic. begin to fail me.
DeGciunt mihi tela, Or. do fail me.
Animus si te non deficit ocquus, Hor.
has not left you.
Si memoria deficitur, Col. if it comes
to fail you.
Deficio a. te ad hunc, Suet. I leave
you t-j so to him.
Mulier abundat audac'a ; consilio et
ratione deficitur, Cic.
Deficiorque prudens artis, ab arte
mea, Ovid.
DEFICERE oculos in rem aliquam,
Cic. Mentem in aliquo, id. to fix one's
mind on a thing.
Defigere furta alicnjus in oculis po-
puli, id. to expose them.
DEFINIRE aliquid alicui, id. to shevt
him, or to lay down to him. Imperium
terminis, id. to limit. Magriitudinem
alicujus rei, id. to define, or mention
precisely.
Certus & definitns locus, id. a parti-
cular and determined place.
DEFLECT'ERE iter, Lu'can. Ex itinere,
Piin. Cic. to turn out of one's road.
Decliuare propoVito & deflectere sen-
tentiam, id.
Amnes in alium cursum deflectere,
id. to turn or divert their bed.
DEGENEKAEE a gravitate paterna, id.
to degenerate.
A familia superbissimet, Liv. to dege-
nerate, to be unlike.
In feritatem, Plin.
Hoc animos degenerat/ Colum. ener-
vates, weakens.
DELINQUERE aliquid 5C in aliqu re,
Cic. In aliquam, Ovid, to fail, to do
wrong.
DEPELLERE loco. CTS. De lo,co, Cic.
to drite a'cay.
Suspicionem a se, id. to remove.
DEPERIRE aliquem, or aliquem a more,
Plant. A more alicujus, Liv. to be pas-
sionately in love with.
Naves deperierunt, Cas. are lost.
DEPLORAUE vitam, Cic. to deplore t or
bewail.
De suis miseriis, id. to lament.
DEPONERE in gremio, Plin. Cic.
Stratis, Ovid. S:ib ramis Virg. In
terram, Colum. In silvas, Cees. to put
in, uponf or under something.
Deponere
Tibi video hoc non posse deberi, id.
DECEDERE alicui, to give way to him t
Plaut. to shun one's company, Cas.
Decedere, Cic. (sup. e vita) to die.
DC suo jure, or jure suo, id. to relin-
quish his right.
De summa riihil decedet, Ter. the- sum
thall be untouched.
DECERNERE aliquid, or de re aliqua,
Cic. to ordain, to decree. Armis, id. to
fghf. Pusrnam, Liv. ' Pugna, Val.
Max. Suo capite, Cic. to expose one's
f elf to danger.
DECERE, see the Syntax, rule 15,
DGCIUERE (from cadj) ii spe, or de
spe, Liv. Spe, Te>. to fall from. In
laqueos, Oi-id, to fall into.
DECIDERE (from ca?do) caput, VeUe.i.
to behead. Quaestionem, Papin. to de-
cide. Damnum, Ulp. to determine.
Cum aliquo, Cic. to transact. De ali-
quo negotio, id. Pr&elio cum aliquo, id.
to decide a dispute by the sword.
Pro se, id. Pro libertate, Sen. to
compound for its liberty.
Decidere jugera singula ternis me-
dimnis, Cic. to tax them at three mince.
Decisa negotia, Hor. finished, put an
end to.
DECLINAIIE loco, a loco, or de loco,
Ctc. to turn from. Se extra viam, Plaut.
Ictum, Liv. to avoid the blow. Agmen
aliquo, Liv. to remove Jiis camp. No-
mina & verba, Quint, to decline and con-
jugate.
DEDERE se hostibus, Cats* In di-
tionem & arbitrium hostium, Plaut. to
surrender himself. Aliquem in pistri-
num, Ter+io condemn him to hard labour.
Ad scribendum se dedere, Cic. to ap-
ply himself entirely. Deditk opera, id.
on purpose.
DEFERRE stadium suum et laborem
ad aliquem, id. to offer one's service to
him. Opes ad aliquod negotium de-
ferre alicui, id. Deferre aliquid in be-
nefieii loco, id. tn present a thing to a
person in order to oblige him. In benefi-
ciis delatus, id. one that has a pension
from the stale.
Deferre aliquem, id. to infa-m against
him.
DEFENDERE aliquem contra iniquos,
id. Aliquem ab injuria, id. Injuriam
alicujus, id. to avenge the wrong done to
him. Injuriam alicui, Plaut. to take
care that no harm is done him.
Defendere & obsistese injuria!, Cic.
Defendere ac propulsa.rejujuriam ; id.
208
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Dcponere aeJificationem, Cic. to lay
*si;te the design of building.
Jgrum, id. to despair of a sick per-
son.
Aliquid, Virg. to pledge or pawn, to
stake.
Deponere aliquid in alicujus fide, Cic.
In fidem, Liv. Apud fidem, Trajan.
Plin. to entrust him with.
DEPRECARI aliquid ab altero, Cic.
to a^k him for a thing. Aliquem pro re
aliqua. id. Alicui ne vapulet, Plaut. to
intercede for him.
Calamitatem abs se, Cic. to avert and
keep off by prayer.
DEROGARE fidem alicui, or de fide
alicujus, id.
Sibi derogare, id. to derogate from
himself.
DESINERE artem, id. to quit a pro-
fession.
DESISTERE a sententia, or de senten-
tia, id. to cease, to desist.
DESPERARE salutem, saluti, or de sa-
lute, id. to despair of. Ab aliquo, id.
to have no further expectation from him.
Sibi, C<KS. De se, Plaut. Cic. to aban~
don one's self to despair.
Non despero ista esse vera, Cic. Sive
restituimur, sive desperamur, in the pas-
sive, id.
DESPONDERE filiam alicui, id. to pro -
vnise in marriage, Sibi domum alicu-
jus, id. to promise it to one's self t to be
sure of it,
Despondere animis, Liv. to think one's
self secure of. Animum, id. to fall into
despair.
DETRAHERE alicui, Ovid. De aliquo,
Cic. to backbite,. Aliquid alteri, id. to
lessen or abate. Laudem, or de laucli-
bus, id. to diminish his reputation. In
judicium, id. to sue one at law.
DETURBARI spe, de spe, vel ex spe,
Cic. to fall from his hopes.
DIFFERRE famam aliquam alicui,
Plaut* to spread a report. Rumorem,
Ter. Aliquid rumoribus, Tac.
Differre aliquem, to put him off, and
make him wait, Mart, to teuze and vex
him, Ter. Rationem sperat invenisse
se qui differat te, Ter.
DifFerri doloribus, Tac. to feel vio-
lent pams. Amore, cupiditate, laetitia,
&c. Plaut. to be transported with.
Differre vestitu ab aliquo, Cic. In
candore, Piin., Differt ab hoc, Cic.
Huic, Hor.
Differunt inter se, Cic.
Ad aliquud tempus aliquid differre,
id. In annum, Hor. to d*fer, to put off.
DIMICARE de re, Cic. Pro re, Plin.
t, to dispute about or for a thing.
Dimicant inter se, Plin.
Dimicandum omni rations, ut, &c.
Cic. we must use all our endeavours tn
obtain it.
DISCEPTARE aliquid juste, Cic. to
judge, to decide, to dispute. Damni,
Callistr. Eodem foro, Plaut. to come
and plead in the same court.
Disceptant inter se de negotiis, Sail.
DISCREPARE rei alicui, Hor. A re
aliqua, Cic. the latter more usual, to
vary, to disagree. Sibi, id. not to be al-
ways one's self. In re aliqua, id. in
something.
Discrepant inter se, id.
DISCRUCIOR animi, Plaut. animo &
animum, from Diomtdes, who gives no
authority for it.
DISPUTARE aliquid # de aliquo,
Plaut. Cic. Circa aliquid, Suint. to treat
about something. Malta disputat quam-
obrem is qui torqueatur, beatus esse
non possit, Cic.
DISSENTIRE de veritate ab aliquo, id.
In re aliqua ab altero, id. Cum aliquo
de re aliqua, id. A iicui opinion!, S.uint,
Colum. to disagree about.
Ne oration! vita dissentiat, Sen*
Dissent! unt inter se, Cic.
DISSIDERE capital! odio ab aliquo, id.
to hate him mortally. Dissidere a seipso,
secumque discordare, id,
Inter se dissident & discordant, id.
Si toga dissidet impar, Hor. if it be of
different length, or uneven.
DIVIDERE nummos viris, Cic. In
viros, Plaut. to distribute, to divide.
Factum cum aliquo, Plant.
Dividere sententiam, Cic. to ask to di-
vide the judge's opinion, in order to follow
one part, without being obliged to follow
the other.
DOCERE de re aliqua, Cic. to give ad-
vice of it. Rem aliquam aliquem, Ter.
to teach it him.
DOLERE ab animo^ ex animo, Plaut.
Successu alicujus, Ovid. Dolbre alicu-
jus, Virg. to be deeply afflicted.
Dolet niihi cor. Plaut. Hoc cordi
meo, id. Caput a sole, id.
Doleo me, Plaut. Vicem alterius,
Cic. Casurn aliorum, Cic. Propter ali-
quem, 2umt. De aliquo, Ovid.
DONARE aliquem re, vel rem alicui,
Cic. to make him a present of a thing.
DUBITARE de fide alicujus, Ad He-
reran, to doubt of hisjid'iity.
Ha3C dum dubitas, Ter. while you are
considering.
DOMINARI alicui, Cic. in aliquem,
O^'/. In re aliqua. Sail. Cic, Inter
aliquos, Goes, to domineer*
Omne
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 209
Omne pecus indomitum curari ac do-
miuari potest, Nigid. may be tamid.
O domus antiqua, heu quam dispari
dominare domino, Cic. 1. Off. ex veleri
poetd.
DUCERE aginen, id. to lead. Sibi
alapam gravem, Pheed. to give one's
self a box on the ear, Ilia, //or. to
be broken winded, to be out of breath.
JEra, Hor. to cast in brass. Aliquem
ex aere, Plin. Rationem salutis, Cic.
to have a regard. Versum, Ovid, to
write verses. Uxoretn, Cic. to marry.
Usuras, id. to continue the payment of
usury.
Ducere laudi, Ter. to esteem it an ho-
nour. In gloria, Plin. In hostium nu-
mero, Cic. Infra se, id. to esteem beneath
ne. Pro nihilo, id.
Duel despicatui, id. to be despised.
E.
EFFERRE pedem domo vel porta, Cic.
to go abroad. Pedem aliquo, id. to go
some where. De nave in terram, id. to
unload.
Efferre laudibus, id. to extol greatly.
Efferre fruges, id. to bear fruit.
Efferri funere # cum funere, id. Pe-
dibus, Plin. to be interred.
Efferri studia in re aliqua, Cic. to
have a strong passion for.
Efferri in amorem, Plin. to be be~
loved.
EGERE consilii et consilio, Cic. to have
need.
Egere multa, active, Censorinus apud
Gellium. Hence Plautus useth egetur
in the passive. And hereby Sanctius
sheweth that one may elegantly say,
Turpem rgere egestatem.
Nihil indigere, Varr. See INDIGEO.
EGREDI ab aliquo, Ter. to go out of a
person's house. Ex proviucia, Cic. Extra
fines & terminos, id. Crbe, id. Oificio,
id. A proposito, id.
Elabi de, , ex manibus, id* to slip
away. Inter tela et gladios, Liv. to
escape. Pugnam aut vincula, Tac.
Paulatim elapsus Bacchidi, Ter. wean-
ing himself of her by degrfet.
ELABORARB in literis, Cic. In ali-
quid, Suint. Aliquid, Piin. Oratio-
nem eamque instruere, Cic. Ad judicium
alterius, id. to endfavour to please him,
and to merit his approbation.
EMERGERE ex malis, Cic. Ter. In-
commoda valetudine, Cic. Extra ter-
ram, Plin. Super terram, Colum. to
rise imt of.
Se vel sese emergere, Colum,
Unde emergi non potest, Ter.
EMINERE inter omnes, Cic. In nova
populo, Liv. to appear on high, to be
conspicuous.
Eminebat ex ore crudelitas, Cic. In
voce sceleris atrocitas, Curt.
Moles aquam eminebat, Curt, ap-
pear"! above the water.
EMUNGERE aliquetn argento, Ter. to
cheat one of his money. Alicui oculos,
Plant, to pluck out his eyes.
ENUNTIARE consilia amicorum adver-
sariis, Cic. Apud homines quod ta
cituin erat, id. to divulge.
ERIPERE a morte aliquem, id. to
save him from dying. Morti aliquem,
Virg. Nfortem alicui, Sen. Ex penculo
aliquem, Cic.
ERIJBBSCERE in re aliqua, id. Ora
alicujus, id. to blush to be in his presence*
Preces, Claud. Loqui, Cic. Fortimas,
2. Curl* to be ashamed of his condition of
life.
Epistola non erubescit, Cic. does not
blush.
Genis erubuit, Ovid.
Malis alterius ernbescere, Ovid, t9
blush at another's rn'sf^rtunes.
ERUMPERE ex tenebris, Cic. In ali-
quam regionem. id. In hoc tempus, id.
In actura, id. In effectual, Quint. Por-
tis, Virg. Per castra, Plin.
Loco aliquo, C&s. Subito clamore,
Virg.
Erumpunt sese radii, Virg. Sese por-
tis foras, C<zs. Stomachum in aliquem,
Cic. Gaudium, Ter.
Vereor ne isthasc fortitudo in ner-
vum erumpat denique, Tei. lest you.
bend the bow so as to endanger the
string.
EVADERE manus alicujus, Virg. E
manibus, Liv. Pugna, Virg. to make his
escape. Omnemviam, Virg. Ante ocu-
los, Virg. to come before one. Ad summi
fastigia tecti, Virg. to climb.
In aliquod magnum malum, Ter, to
become very destructive.
EXARDERB & -ESCERE ira, indigna-
tione, Liv. In iras, Mart, to be in-
flamed.
Dolor exarsit imis ossibus, Virg.
Exarsit in id quod nunquam viderat,
Cic. Exarsere ignes animo, Virg.
EXCELLERE super alios, Liv. Longe
aliis, Cic. Inter alios, id.
Praeter ceteros, id. to excel, to *ur-
past.
EXCUSARE se alicui ft* apud ali-
quem, id. to excuse himself. Valetudi-
nem alicui, to allege his indisposition as
an excuse.
. Ille Philippo
1 Excusare laborem & mercenaria vin-
cla, Hor.
Excusare se de re aliqua, Gets.
EXIGERE aliquem e civitate, Cic. to
drive him out. Honoribus, Plin. to
deprive him of honours. Aliquid acer-
bius, Cic. to demand it with menaces.
Columnas ad perpendiculum, id. to try
with the plummet whether they be straight.
JEvum in sylvis, Virg. vitam cum ali-
quo, id. to pass his life. Ensem per me-
dium juvenem, Virg. to run him through
the body.
Sues pastum, Varr. to drive.
Exigere de re aliqua, Plin. Jun. to
"dispute about a thing t to discuss it.
EXIMERE e vinclis, Cic. Vinclis,
Plaut. Metu, id. to deliver. In li-
bertatem, Liv. to set at liberty. Ali-
quid de dolio, Cic. to draw out.
Eximere diem, id. to waste the time.
Eximi noxae, Liv* to be discharged or
forgiven.
EXORARE, expetere et exposcere ali-
quid Deos et a Diis, Cic. &? alii, to ask.
See the 24th rule, p. 43.
EXPECTARE alicujus adventum in
aliquem locum # in aliquo loco, C<zs
to wait for a person's arrival at a place.
ExpELtERE, expedire, ejicere, ex-
terminare, extrudere, exturbare, urbe,
vel ex urbe, Cic. to drive out f to put
out.
EXPLERE aliquem, Cic. Ter. Ani-
nium alicujus, Liv. Animum alicui,
Ter. to content, to satisfy him.
EXPLICARE rem aliquam, vel de re
aliqua, Cic. to explain something.
EXPOSTULARE cum altero injuriam,
id, De injuria, Ter. to expostulate.
EXPRIMERE vocem alicujus, C<zs. to
make him speak. Risutn alicui, Plin.
Jun. Pecuniam ab aliquo, Cic.
Exprimere effigiem, id. to draw to
the tife. Verbum verbo, de verbo, e
verbo, exprimere, id. to translate word
for word.
Exprimere ad verbum de Graecis, id.
Vim Graecorum poetarum, id.
EXPROBRARE vitia adversariis vel in
adversaries, id. to reproach.
EXT;ERE jugum i% se jugo, Liv.
to shake off the yoke. Vestem alicui,
'Sen. to strip him. Hominem ex bo-
mine, Cic. to divest one's self of all hu~
inanity.
EXULARE Romae, id. to live in exile
at Rome. Domo, Ter. to be banished
from home.
A patria, Plaut.
Per externas profugus pater ex-
nlat 01 as, Ovid.
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Respubl. discessu alicujus exulat, Cic.
Exulatum abiit res patris, Plant.
F.
FACERE ab aliquo, Cic. Cum aliquo,
id. to be on his side. Bona alicui et in
aliquem, Plant, to do good.
Consilio alicujus, or de consilio, Plin.
Cic. -with his acfaice.
Cum pro populo fieret, id. as they
tvere offering sacrifice for the people.
Flocci non facere, id. Floccum fa-
cere, Plant, not to value a rush.
Facis ex tua dignitate, Cic. you act up
to your dignity.
Hoc facit ad difficultatem urinae,
Plin. is a remedy against the strangury.
Non facere ad Corensem pulverera,
Suirilil.
But facere alicui rei, signifying to
serve for that use, or to be profitable,
is not good Latin. Some however
have attempted to defend it by this
passage of Pliny, book 23. chap. 1.
Mustum capitis doloribus facit. Which
is repugnant not only to the rules
of physic, but to the purity of the
Latin tongue. Therefore the manu-
script copies, and all the best editions,
have Capitis dolor es facit t causeth head-
achs, and not, is good against head-
achs.
Facite hoc meum consilium, legiones
novas non improbare, Cic. suppose that.
Non faciatn ut enutnerem miserias om-
nes in quas incidi, id.
Facere is likewise put with the accu-
sative an infinite number of ways, as
Nos magnum fecissemus, id. we
should 'have, struck a great blow.
Facere gratiam alicui, Liv. to shew
him favour. Facere posam, Plant.
Facere stipendium, Liv. to serve a
campaign, or to follow the army.
Facere nomina, Cic. to borrow mo-
ney.
Facere rebellionem, Ctes. to raise
rebellion. And the like.
FASTIDIRE aliquem, Cic. Virg. Hor,
Alicujus, Plant. 1o despise him.
A me fastidit amari, Owl.
FATERI scelus et de scelere, Cic. Nor.
to confess, to acknowledge.
FOENEHARI aliquid alicui, Cic. to lend
out at usury.
FOENERARE (and not foenerari) ab
aliquo, dppul. f% Juriscons. to borrow at
interest.
Haec sapit, ha?c omnes foenerat una
Deos, Mart. .
FIPERH nocti, Virg. terra, id.
Molirf
of VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 211
Moliri jam tecta videt, jam fidere
terra, ^Bn. 8.
FORMIDAIIE ajicui, Plaut. to be
afraid lest some harm befal him. Ab
aliquo, or aliquem, Cicero, to fear and
to dread him.
FRAUDARE aliquem pecunia, Cic. to
cheat him. Militum stipendium, C<es.
to keep back their pay. Genium suum,
Plant, to pinch his belly.
FUCERE conspectum alicujus, Cic.
E conspectu, Ter. Oppido, Cces. De
civitate, Suintil. to run attoy. De illo
fugit me ad te scribere, Cic. I forgot.
FUNGI officio, Cic. Ter. Officium,
Ter. to discharge his office. Vice, Hor.
Vicem alterius, Lie. Suet, to perform the
office of anolhtr. Fungi munere, to ex-
ercise an employment, Cic. Ctes. Hor. and
sometimes to make a present, Cic.
G.
GAUDERE gaudio, Plaut. Gaudium,
Ter. to rejoice. De aliquo, propter ali-
quem, Cic.
Furit homines gavisos suum dolorem,
id. Mihi gaudeo, id.
GIGNI capite vel in caput, Plin.
GLACIARE. Positas ut glaciet nives
Jupiter, Hor. to congeal.
Humor glaciatur in gemmas, Plin.
GLORIARI aliquid, de re aliqua,
in re aliqua, ob rem aliquam, Cic. to
boast.
GRATULARI adventu, or de adventu,
id. to congratulate him upon his ar-
rival.
Gratulari victoriam alicui, id. to con-
gratulate him upon his victory.
Gratulor tibi in hoc, or de hac re, or
pro hac re, id.
GRAVARE & ni, Ovid, to burden, or
weigh down.
Gravari dominos, Lucan. to bear no
subjection.
Caetera tanquam supervacua gravari
solet, 2uint. he is tolh to see them.
Ne grarere exaedificare id opus quod
instituisti, Cic.
Gravatus somno, Ovid.
Pluvia cum fortb gravantur, Virg.
H.
HABERE rem certam, vel pro certo,
Cic. to know for certain. Aliquid certi,
irf.
Habere quaadam dubia, id. In dubiis,
3uint. Pro dubio, Liv. to doubt.
Habere aliquem despicatui, vel des-
, Ter. to dt*pise.
Habere aliquem praccipuo honore,
Ctes. lu honure, Cic. Honores alicui^
id. De aliquo, Ter. to praise, tohonout.
Habere aliquem loco patris, Brutus^
In loco patris, Cic. Pro patre, Liv. t
esteem him as a father.
Pro stercore babere, Plaut. to kok
upon as dirt.
Habere aliquid odio, Plaut. In odi-
um, Cic. to hate it.
Habere in numero # in numerura.
sapientum, id.
Habore orationem apud aliquem,
Quint. Ad aliquem, Cic. Cum aliquo,
Cces. to speak to, or before a person.
Habere in potestate # in potestatem,
C&s. to have in, one's power.
BelI6 habere # bel!6 se habere, Cic.
Habere usum alicujos rei, Cic. Cat:
Ex re aliqoa, Cic. In re aliquu, Cces. to
have experience, to be practised.
Habet se erga aedem, Plaut. she
dwells.
HABITARE in platea, Ter. Vallibu*
imis, Virg. sylvas, id,
H^JRERE. Haeret peccatum ill! K
in illo, Cic. sticks to him, falls upoit
him.
Obtutu haeret defixus in uno, Virgt
continues fixed.
In multis nominibus haerebitis, Cic.
Si hie terminus hasret, Virg. if this
remains fixed and settled.
HoRREREdivinum numen, Cic. to fear
end to respect. Omnium conspectum,
id. to dread.
Frigoribus hyemis intolerabiliter hor-
rent, Colum. to shiver.
Horruerunt comae, Ovid, his hair stood
an end.
Horrebant densis aspera crura pili*,
Ovid.
I.
JACTARE se in re aliqua, # de re ali-
qua, Cic. Ob rem aliquam, to boast.
Jactare rem aliquam, Virg.
ILI.AIH. lllabitur urbi, Virg. to slip
into the town.
Animis illabere nostris, Virg.
Pernicies illapsa civium animos, Cic.
Medios illapsus in hostes, or delapsus,
Virg.
Ad eos cum suavitate illabitur, Cic. ,
ILLUDERE alicui, aliquem, in ali-
quem, in aliquo, Virg. Ter. Cic. to mock,
to deride.
Vestes auro . illusae, Virg. embroi-
dered.
IMMINERE in occasionem opprimendi
ducis, Liv. to seek the occasion.
Imminent duo reges toti Asiae, Cic.
P 2 Home
212
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Homo ad caedem imminens, id.
Imminent! avaritia esse, id. to lie ex-
tremely avaricious.
Gestus imminens, id.
IMPENDERE. Impendebat mous altis-
isimus, CtEs. hung over, commanded.
Contentio impendet inter illos, Cic.
Impendet nobis malum, id. Nos
mala, Ter. threaten us.
IMPERTIRE & HI. Impertire alicui
salutem, Cic. Aliquem salute, Ter. to
salute.
Fortunas aliis impertiri, Cic. to im-
part.
Alter! de re aliqua impertire, id.
Colleges meo laus impertitur, id.
IMPLERE veteris Bacchi, Vug. Me-
ro pateram, id. De re aliqua, Mart: to
Jill.
IMPLTCARK ossibus ignem, Virg. to
throw into.
Implicari morbo et in morbum, Liv,
to be taken ill.
Vim suam cum natnris bominum im-
plicant Dii, Cic. implicat ad speculum
caput, Plaut. to trim or dress.
IMPONERE arces montibus, Virg. to
build. In collum, in manum, in navim,
Plaut. to put upon, or in.
$u mm am man urn alicui operi, Virg.
In aliqua re, Quint.
Imponere alicui, Cic. to impose upon
him, to deceive him. See Cr, HELLAS in
the first list of Ellipse*, p. 177.
Imponere vitn alicui, id. to constrain
him. Vulnera, id. to wound him. No-
men alicui, id. to name him. Regem
regioni, id. to appoint. Partes alicui,
id. to give a charge. Improbatn perso-
nam alicui, id. to make him pass for a
villain. Leges alicui, id. to enjoin him.
Exercitum Brundusii, id, to garrison.
Ita Stephan.
Imponere onus alicui, id. In ali-
quem, Plaut.
Frumentum imponere, Cic. to tax at
a certain quantity of corn*
Imponere servitutem fundo, id. to
subject to certain duties.
Hujus amicitia me in hanc perditam
causam imposuit, id. has thrown me into
this unfortunate party.
IMPRJMERE aliquid animo, Plin. Jun.
In animo &? in animum, Cic.
INCF.SSERF. hostes jaculis et saxis
aut pilis, Liv. to assault 1 or set upon. In-
cessere aliquem dolis, Plant. Incessit
eum cupido, Liv. Curt. Ilii, Sail. Liv.
Curt. Vol. Max. In te religio novaj
Ter. Virg. Morbus in castra, Liv. has
crept into.
IHCISERE (token from cwdere) sanis,
Plin. Jun. to cut t engrave. In aes,
Liv. In sere, Cic. .Plin. in Panegyr.
Ludum incidere, Hor. to break off
play.
INCLTNARE omnem culpam in ali-
quem, Liv. to throw the whole blame upon,
him.
Hos ut sequar inclinat animus, Liv.
my mind inclines to.
Inclinat acies vel inclinatur, Liv. the
army gives way.
Se fort una inclinaverat ut, Cess, for-
tune has taken such a turn that.
INCLUDERE in carcerem et in carcere,
Cic. Orationi suae, id. to shut up, to
include.
Vocem includit dolor, id.
Smaragdi auro inciuduntur, Luc.
INCUBARE ova el ovis, Colum. to brood'
upon.
Quod si una natura omnes incubaret,
Plin.
INCUMBERE gladio, Ad Heren. Lecto,
aratro, toro, Virg. Ovid. In gladium,
Cic. to lean upon. In aliquem, id. to
fall upon him.
In or ad aliquid, Cic. Ces. Alicui
rei, Sit. Plin. lo apply one's self to some"
thing.
Venti incubuere mari, Virg. In mare,
Quint. Incumbit in ejus perniciem*
Cic. to endeavour to ruin him.
Verbo incumbit illam rem, Sail.
Incumbit illi spes successions, Suet.
he is considered as next heir.
INCURSARE aliquem pugnis, calcibus,
&e. Plaut. to assault with blnies, &!c.
Incursare in aliquem, Liv. to run upon
him.
Lana cui nullus color incursaveritj
Plin. that has not been dyed.
INDICARE conjurationem, Cic. de con-
juratioue, Sail, to discover or give infor-
mation of a conspiracy.
Indicare in vulgus, Cic. to divulge.
Se alicui, id. to discover one's self to a
person.-
Postulabat utrsibifundus indicaretur}
id. that they would tell him the price.
INDUCERE animum ad aliquid, or ali*.
quid in animum, Ter. to apply one's<setf
to something.
Inducere aliquid, Cic. to introduce,
and likewise to rase or strike out. Ali-
quem, id. to deceive him, to cajole t or
draw him in.
luducere animum, simply, oraniuaura
ut, or ne, or ut ne, Ter, to persuade him-
*elf.
Inducere scuta pellibus, Czs. to cover
vaith skins. Inducere colorem picturse,
Plin, to varnish*
, INDUER38
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 213
INDUERE se veste, Ter. Sibi vestem,
Plant, to drfis himself.
Cum in nnbem se induerint anhelitns
terrae, Cic. will he converted into clouds.
Induere se in laqueos, id. to entangle
himself, fnduit se in florem, Virg. blos-
soms.
INDULGERE alicui, Cees. In aliquem,
Liv. to treat him gently.
Nimis me indulgeo, Ter. Indulgent
patientiam flagello, Mart.
Qui mails moribus nomen oratoris in-
dulgent, Suint. who grant the name of
orator to a person of a bad life.
Jus trium Hberorum mihi princeps
indulsif, Plin. Jun. has granted me.
Quando animus eorum laxari, indul-
gerique potuisset, Gell.
INFERRE litein capitis in aliquem,
Cic. Periculum capitis alicui, id. to
draw up an indictment against him.
In periculurn capitis se inferre, id.
to bring himself into danger of his life.
Inferre rationibus, id. to charge to ac-
count.
INFUNDERE in naribus <9C per nares,
Colam, In nares, Cic. Cribro, Sen. to
pour.
Infundere venenum alicui, Cic.
Ceris opus infundite, Phced. do your
work in wax.
INGERERE convicia alicui, Hor. In
aliquem, Plaut. to load a person with
abusive language,
Pugnos in ventrem ingerere, Ter.
INCREDI orationem # in orationem,
to begin to speak.
Vestigiis patris ingredi, Cic. to follow
his father's footsteps.
IKCURGITARE se cibis, id. to cram
one's self with victuals. Se in flagitia,
id. toplunge into debauchery.
INHIARE haereditatem, Plaut. to gape
after. Uberibus, Suet, the dative is most
usual.
IHIRE gratiam ab aliquo # cum ali-
<juo, Cic. to curry favour.
INSANIHE amore, Plin. Amoribus,
Hor.
Hilarem insaniam, Plaut. Sen.
INSCENDERE curnun, Plaut. In ar-
borem, id. Supra pilam, Cato, to mount t
to climb up.
INSERVIRB suis commodis, Cic. to
study his own interest, flonoribus, id. to
itudy to obtain.
Matronae est, unnm inservire aman-
tem, Plaut. Nihil est a me inservitum
temp or is causa, Cic.
INSILIRE defessos, Suet, to lea]) in, or
upon. ID equura, LAV. In scapham,
Plaut.
INSISTERE viis, Cie. Viam, Her,
Virg. to proceed and hold on. Hastz,
Plin. Jun. to lean vpon. Ignibus, Cic.
to stop, or stand still. In rem aliquant,
Plaut. fVv. In re aliqua, Quint.
Alicui rei, Plin. Tibull. to apply him~
self.
Insistebat in manu dextr^ Cereris
simulachrum victoria, Cic. there was in
the right hand.
INSTITIO. Stellarum cursus, pro-
gressus, institiones, id. their course, and
their resting.
INSPUTARE aliquem, # alicui, Plaut.
to spit upon.
INSTARB aliquem, Plant, to urge, to
press him. Currum/urincurrwn, Virg.
to run upon. Operi, Virg. to make ha*te
with.
INSTEHNERE. Pelle leonis iusternor,
Virg. to cover one's self.
Tabulasque super instravit, Virg.
Terrse insterni, Stat.
Tori instrati super pelle leonis, Si-
lius.
INSULTARE, simply, Virg. Solo, Virg t
to rebound. Alicui 5f in aliquem, Virff.
Cic. to insult, to deride. Muttos, Sail.
apud Serv.
Insult are fores calceis, Ter. to bounce
at the door with his heels.
INTENDERE arcum, Plin. to bend t or
stretch.
Animum studiis, Hor. to apply one'*
self.
Animum in or ad rem aliquam, Liv.
Intendere alicui rei, or curam ali-
cui rei, Plin. to employ his care about
it.
Intend! anitno in rem aliquam, Liv.
Pergin' sceleste inteudere ? Plaut.
Repudio consilium quod primum in-
tenderam, Ter. I alter my resolution.
INTERCLUDERE aditus ad aliquem,
Cie. to stop up the passage. Comincatum
inimicis, Piaut. Inimicoscommeatibus,
Plaut. % Cff.s.
INTERDICERE histrionibus scenam,
Suet. Feminis usum purpura?, Liv. to
prohibit, to hinder.
Omni Gallia Romanis interdixit,
CCPS . forbade them io set foot in France.
Maid rem gerentibus bonis paternis
interdici solet, Cic.
Interdico tibi domo mea, Liv.
We may therefore say, intrrdico tibi
hanc rem (which is more rare), or tibi
hoc re (which is usual), but we do not
meet with interdico tibi hac re t says
Vossius. Yet we may use it, since
214s
NEW. MET HOD. Book VII.
we find in the passive, interdicor aqu&
& tgui, as well as ignis & aqua mihi in-
terdictmUir, Cic. Suet. I am for bid, lam
deprived.
Gui nemo interdieere possit, Cic. whom
none could withstand.
Interclicere vestigiis, Plin.
Interdico ne hoc facias, Ter. sup. tibi.
Praetor iuterdixit de vi bom in i bus
armatis, Cic. decreed that those who had
forcibly ejected their antagonists out of
their share of the estate, should be obliged
to make a reparation.
INTERESSE conviviis 8? in convivio, id.
Jn caedem, id. to be present.
Inter belluam & hominem hoc ma-
si m* interest, quod, id. the greatest
difference betwixt man and beast is that,
&c.
Nihil interest hoc & ilia, nisi divisim
3egas, Se/iec. Hoc morari victoriam,
qu6d interesset amuis, Liv,
Hoc pater ac dominus interest, Ter.
this is the difference between a father and
A master.
I Stulto intelljgens quid interest ? Ter*
Quoniam yca-v interest TOU Qovtty,
. Seri radices illitas fimo interest, Co-
'lum.
Interest regis, Liv. it behoves.
Interest omnium recte agere, Cic.
Magni mea interesse putavi, id.
Ad nostram laudem non multum in-
teresse video, id.
INTERJACERE. Planicies Capuara
Tipharamque interjacet, Liv. lies be-
tween.
Spatium quod sulcis interjacet, Co-
lum. ,
Interjacet haac inter earn, Plin.
INTUERI aliquem fif in aliquem, Cic.
to look at.
INVADERS aliquem 8? in aliquem,
wbem # in urbem, Cic. Virg. to invade,
to seize.
In pecnnias alienissimorum. hominum
invadere, Cic.
Invasit cupiditas plerisque # pleros-
<]ue, Varro, Sail. Furor invaserat im-
probis, Cic. ad Tiron.
Lassitudine invaserunt huic in genna
fiemina, Plant, he was troubled with the
falling dozen of blood to the ankles, by rea-
son of overmuch walking.
INVEHERE per mare, Plin. to trans-
port.
Invehi ex alto in portunt, Cic.
Portum, urbem, Plin. to be imported,
in aliquem, to inveigh or speak bitterly
against.
INVIDJ.K.L, laudes alicui, Liv, Hor.
Cic. Laudibus alicujus, Cic. to envy a
person's praise.
Inviderealicui, Ter. Aliquem, Ovid,
to bear him envy. Alicujus, Plaut. In
hac re tibi invideo, Cic.
Invideat Hermogenes quod ego can-
to, Hor.
The accusative only, without the
dative of relation, after this verb, Is
more rare. Yet Cicero, in the third
book of his Tusculan questions, ob-
serveth, that as we say videre fiorem,
so invidere jlorem would be better than
fori, if the custom was not against it.
Hence Quin. lib. J). c. 3. enumerates
among the incorrect phrases of his time,
Huic REI INVIDERE, pro quo, adds
he, omnes veteres, & Cicero i/'se HANC
HEM. Whereby we see that the custom
has varied.
But the accusative with the dative is
common enough.
Ut nobis optimam naturam invidiss
vidfantur qui, &c. Cic.
Jampridem nobis cceli te regia, Cae-
sar, invidet, Virg.
INVITARE hospitio 5f in hospitium,
Liv. Cic. Ad legendum, Cic. Domum,
Liv. Tecto ac domo, Cic. to invite, to
desire to come.
INVOCARE subsidium, id. to ash for
succours. In auxilium aliquem, Quint.
IRE viam, Virg. to go. Itineribus
alicujus, Cic. to keep the same road. Sub,-
sidio, CCPS. In subsidium, Cic.
Accersitum, Ter. to go to fetch.
Si porio ire pergant, Liv. if they have
a mind to go further.
Earn us visere, Ter.
JUBERE. See the annotation to the
12th rule.
JUNGERE prudentiam cum eloquentia,
Cic. Dextram dextraa, Virg. Leones
ad currum, Virg. to put to.
Rhedam equis, Cic. Res inter se, id.
JURARE alicui, Plin. Jun. per sidera,
Virg.
In leges, Cic. In verba aliqua, Cces.
Maria aspera, Virg. Pulcherrimum
jusjurandum, Cic.
Qui denegat & juravit morbum, id.
Bellum ingens juratur, Stat.
Jurandasque tuum per nomen poni-
mus aras, Hor.
The latter examples shew plainly
that this verb may govern the accusa-
tive of itself, and that Vossius had
very little ground to affirm that it never
did govern this case but by virtue of
the preposition per. For besides its
being hard to say Hi&tjurere jusjurau-
dum t or morbum, is jurare^ per jusju-
randum,
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 215
rondum, or per morbum ; it is moreover
evident that since we say jurandas aras
in a passive sense, we might likewise say
jurare aras in a real active sense. And
adding per tuum nomen, he plainly in-
timates that the force of the verb and
the preposition are two different things,
which ought therefore to be distin-
guished. So that when we say ]>tr sidera
juio, we are to understand juramenlum
per tidertt, just as jurandas aras per tuum
uomen, &c.
L.
LABORARE invidia uejex invidia, Cic.
to be envied and haleJ. Ex pedibus, id.
De verbo, non de re, id. to trouble
himself about terms. A veritate, Liv. to
te examined for nut telling the truth.
Laborare arma, Slat, to work, or make.
Ad rem aliquam, Cic.
Ambitiose circa aliquid, Suint. to take
great care.
Ad quid laboramus res Romanas, C?V
Laboratur vehementer, id. they are in
great pain, or concern.
LATERE alicui, id. Aliquem, Virg.
See the Syntax, rule 15. p. 31.
LEGARE ad aliquem, Cic. to send an
ambassador to. Alicui, id. to bequeath.
Ab aliquo, id.
Sibi aliquem legare, id. to make him
Jits deputy.
LEVARE metum alicui, vel aliquem
metu, id. to ease him of, or to remove his
fear.
LIBERAHE aliquem metu, Ter. Ali-
quem culpsD, Liv. to acquit. Fidem
suam, Cic. to fulfil hit word, Aliquem
a creditoribus, Sen. to set him free?,
LOQUI alicui, Ter. De aliquo, Cic.
Apud aliquem, id. Cum aliquo, id. to
speak.
LUDERE pila, id. Ludum, Ter. Alea
f aleam, Suet. In numerum, Virg.
LUERE aes alienum, Curt, to pay his
debts. Pcenas, Cic. to be punished. Se,
Ulp. to pay a ransom.
Oblatum stuprum voluntaria morte,
luit Lucretia, Cic. expiated.
M.
MALEDICERE alicui, Cic. $ alii. Ali-
quem, Tartu I. Petron.
MANARE. Mella manant ex ilice,
Hor. flow.
Manat picem haec arbor, Plin.
Manat cruore culter, Liv.
MANERE ad urbem, ad exercitum,
Liv.
In urbe, in exercitq, Cic. to slay or
abide there. Aliquein, Plaut. Hor. Vir^.
to wait for him.
In proposito, Cic. Statu suo, z//.
Sententii manct, vcl in senteutia ma-
neo, Cic. Manere promissis, Vv%. tt>
ke*p his word.
Manent ingenia seuibus, Cic.
Ad te poena manet, Tibul.
Maneat ergo istud, Cic. let this stand
good.
Maneat ea cura nepotes, Virg. let our
posterity take car" for that.
MEDERI alicni rei, Cic. to remedy.
Quas minus mederi possis, Ter.
Contra serpentium ictus medentur,
Plin.
Htec mederi voluerunt, Cic.
MEDICARE capillos, Ovid. Semina,
Virg. to give an artificial preparation or
tincture to a thing. Alicui, Ter. Cuspi-
dis ictum, Virg. to dress a wound.
MEDITARI rem aliquam, out de re ali-
qua, Cic. to meditate or think on a thing,
MEM INI me videre & vidisse, id.
Rem aliquam W rei alicujus, id.
DP alicujus pcriculo, id. to recollect.
Ciceronis A" Ciceronem. See the Anno-
tation to the 11 th rule.
MEMOROR, which Valla denies to
be ever found with the genitive in clas-
sic authors, occurreth in Cicero, Sui
oblitus, alii memoretur, for alius, in 4 Ca-
til. which shews the little foundation
this author had to censure the following
passage of the Vulgate, Memorari testa-
menti sui sancti.
MEHERE & RI bene vel male de ali-
quo, Cic. to deserve well or ill of a person.
Apud aliquem, Liv. to serve or to bear
arms under him. Sub aliquo, id.
Stipendiurii in aliquo bello, Cic. E-.
quo, pedibus, Liv. to serve on foot, or on
horseback. Alicui, Stat. Lucan, to serve
to the profit rf any one.
Mereri laudem, Cces. Offensam,
Scio hanc meritam esse ut mentor
esses sui, Ter. she deserved aplace in your
memory.
Saepe quod vellem meritam scio,
Ter. that she often did whatever I isiQuld
have her.
MERGERE aliquem ^Equore, or sub
./Equore, Virg. Unda vel in undis, Ovid,
to put under water, to sink.
METUERE alicui, Plaut. Pro ali-
quibus, Cels. Propter aliquos, Plant.
Aliquem, Cic. Ab aliquo, id. De vitii,
id. to fear. Metuo ut <3f metuo ne.
See p. 159.
vires ulicui, id, to fur-
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
nish, to afford. Furor arma ministrat,
Virg.
MIRARI aliquetn, Cic. De aliquo,
id. In aliquo, id. Justitiaene prius
mirer, be! line laborum, Virg. to be sur-
prised. Mirari se, Mart, to value or
esteem himself.
MISCERE vinum aqua # aquain vino,
flin. to mix.
Miscere in aciem, Lir. Mistos in
sanguine denies, Virg.
Miscere ad, Colum. Cum, Cic. Co-
lum.
Miscere sacra profanis, Hor.
MISERERE & nr, or MISERESCERE.
Laborum misereri, Virg. to have com-
passion, or pity. Mei miseret nemo,
Plin. nobody pities me. Miseret me tui,
Ter. Atque inopis nunc te miserescat
mei, Ter.
Sanctius pretends that these verbs
govern also the dative. And it must
be allowed that examples hereof are to
be found in authors of the latter ages,
as in Boethius,
Diligejure lonm ft mjseresce mails.
But there is no authority for this from
writers of pure Latinity, if we believe
Vossius. Hence in Seneca, lib. 1.
contr. 4. where some read, Ego mise-
reor tibi puella, the best editions have
tui. And in regard to that passage
which Linacer quotes from the 2<1 Tusc.
it is to be observed that those are verses,
translated from Socrates, and they are
to be pointed thus,
Perge aude note, illacryma patris pes-
tibus :
Miserere, gentes nosfras flelunt mise-
rias.
For we find likewise in another place
that Cicero has joined the dative with
illacrymo. Suid dicam de Socrate ? Cujus
morti illacrymari soleo, Platonem legens,
3 t de Nat. And Livy also, Meo infelici
errori unns illacrymdsti, lib. 10.
MODERARI animo, orationi, Cic.
Cantus numerosque, id. to regulate.
MOERERE mortem filii, id. Incom-
mode suo, to grieve.
MONERE aliquem rem, Cic. Ter.
Alicui rem, Plant. Terentiam de testa-
mento, Cic. Aliquem alicujus rei, Sa.ll.
See the 24th rule, p. 43.
MORARI in re confessa, Plin. Circa
aliquid, Hor. Apud aliquem, C&s.
Cum aliquo, Pompon. In urbe, Ovid.
Sub dio, Hor. to stay, to dwell.
Iter alicujus morari, Cic. to delay
him. Quid moror ? Virg. What do I
stay for ?
Purpuram nihil moror, Plant. I do
not value.
MOVERE se loco vel ex loco, Ctts. De
convivio, Cic. Ab urbe, Liv. to be gone,
to move.
Movere aliquem senatu, vel e senatu,
Cic. to depose him, to degrade him. A
se moram, Plant, to make no delay. Ri-
sum & jocum movere alicui, HOT. to
make him laugh.
Ego isthsec moveo aut euro ? Ter. Is
it I that am the cause of this buttle ?
MUTARE rem alia re, Hor. Beflum
pro pace, Sail. Aliquid cum aliquo,
Ter. to change with him.
Mutare locum, Cic. to change place.
Mutari civitate, id. to be removed from
one town to another.
MUTUARI auxilia ad rem aliquam,
C&s. In sumptum, Cic. to ask, to bor~
rovo.
A viris virtus nomen est mutuata, id.
has borrowed its name.
. N '
NARRARE aliquid, or de re aliqua, Cic.
to tell, or to relate.
NATARE aquas, Virg. Unda natatur
piscibus, Ovid. Pars multa natat, Hor.
the generality uf mankind are inconstant
and wavering. Natabant pavimenta
vino, Cic. swam with wine.
NITI sub pondere, Virg. In ad-
versum, Ovid. Ad sidera, Virg. to tend
towards. Gradibus, Virg. to mount.
Hasta, Virg. to lean upon. Humi, Virg.
to walk upon the ground. Contra hono-
rem alicujus, Cic. to oppose. Pro ali-
quo, Liv. De a;quitate, id. to defend
and maintain.
Cujus in vita nitebatur salus civitatis,
id. was supported, depended.
Alternos iongu nitentem cuspide gres-
sus, Virg.
Tantum quantum quisque potest ni-
tatur, Cic. let him do what he can.
NOCERE alicui, id. Aliquem, Plant.
Sen. to hurt. Qui Deoruin queraquam
nocuerit, Liv.
NUBERE alicui or cum aliquo, Cic.
the former more usual. The second,
occurs in the 3d epistle of the }5th book.
Quocum nupta regis Armeniorum soror.
And against Verres. Virorum quisbus-
cum ilia; nuptac erant.
Now nubere, as we have observed p.
30, signifieth properly velar e, to coyer
or to veil. Mulier nubit, says Caper
in his orthography, qitia pallio obnubit
caput suum & genas. Hence nubere
alicui, is to hide and to reserve herself
for him. And nubere cum aliquo, is te*>
gere Sf operire se uno cubiculo cum illo t
accordii)g to Donatus, on Terence's He-
cyra. So that the accusative is alwayi
understood.
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 217
This verb is never used but of the
woman, for which reason we use only
nupta sum in the participle. It is true
Plautusi said, Novum nuptum, but it was
only through theatrical buffoonery, when
a man appeared upon the stage in wo-
man's apparel.
But it is observable that in Pliny w-
lere is applicable also to trees and vines*
when they are joined together.
O.
OEAMBULARE muris, Liv. to walk round
the walls. Ante portas, Liv.
OBEQUITARE stationibas hostium, Liv.
Agmen, Curt, to ride round about.
OBJICERE feris, Cic. to expose to wild
beasts. Ad omnes casus, id. Se in impe-
tus hominutn, ia. Aliquid criminis,
Piin. Loco criminis, id. &? Cic.
OBLIVISCI aliqnem, Virg. Suae dig-
nitatis, Cic. to forget.
Artificium obliviscatnr licebit, id.
OBREPERE ad magislratum, id. to
steal by degrees, to creep in privately.
AdolescentiaR senectne nhrepit, iff- suc-
ceeds immediately, Nullae imagines ob-
repunt in animos dormientium extrin-
secus, id.
Statim te obrepet fames, id.
OBRUERE telis, id. to oppress with
darts* Terra, Cato. In terra, Ovid,
to bury. Se vino, Cic. to get drunk.
Nox terram obruit umbris, Luc. co-
vers it.
OBSTREPEHE portis, Liv. to make
a noise. Litteris alicui, Cic. to impor-
tune him by letters. Hinc illi geminas
vox avium obstrepit aures, Virg. Cla-
more obstrepi, Cic. to be stunned wit/t
noise.
OBTRECTARE laudibus ft laudcs all-
cujus, Liv. to backbite.
Obtrectare legi, Cic. to oppose it.
OBVERSARI oculis, Liv. Ante oculos,
Cic. In somnis, Liv. to present itself
before us.
OBVERTERE signa in hostem, Liv. to
turn against the enemy. Terga alicui,
Virg. to run away.
OBUMBRARE. Oleaster obumbrat ves-
tibulum, Virg. overshadows.
Sibi ipsa non obumbrat, Plin.
OCCUMBERE morti, Virg. Morte, Cic.
Mortem, Liv. Suet, to die.
Ferro occumbere, Ovid, to be killed.
OCCUPARE aliquem, Cic. Curt, to
be beforehand with him, to surprise
him. Se in aliquo negotio, Cic. Ter.
Ad aliquod negotium, Plaut. to busy or
employ one's self. Occupare pecuniam
tlicui, vel apud aliquem, Cic. to put
money out at use.
Quorum mag nee res agnntur in vestris
vectigalibus occupatse, id.
OFFENDERS aliquem, id. Apud ali-
quem, id. Aliquo, id. to offend a person,
to be upon bad terms with hint.
At credo si Caesarem laudatis, in me
offeoditis, Cic. but very likely if ynu,
commend C&sar, you offend me. OffVn-
dere in arrogantiam, Cicer. to give into
pride or arrogance.
Sm quid offenderit, sibi totum, tibi
nihil offenderit, id. but if he takss any
wrong step, it will be all to himself.
Cec'tdisse ex equo & latus ofl'endisse,
id. that he fell from his horsf and hurt
his side. Si in me aliquid offendistis, id.
if you have fou^d any fault with me ; if
in aught I hav offended you.
Cum offendisset populum Atheniensi-"
um prope jam desipientem senectute,
id. having found.
Offendere in scopulis, Ovid. Ad sti-
pitem, Colum. to run, or hit against.
Naves in redeundo offenderunt, C<w.
were unfortunate, fell into the enemy's
hrtnrJe.
Offendere alicujus existimationem,
Cic. to hurt his repJitation. Alicui ani-
mum, id. to shock, or to vex him.
OLERE. Olet unguenta, Ter. he
smells of perfume- Olet huic aurutn
meutn, Plaut. he hath got some inkling of
my gold.
Olent ilia supercilia tnalitiam, Cicer.
Olentia sulphure, Ovid, that smells of
sulphur.
Redolentque thy mo, Virg.
OPPONERE periculis, C<c. to expose to
danger. Ad omne periculum, id.
Opponere pignori, Plaut. Ter. to
pawn, or to pledge.
Opponere manum fronti, or ante ocu-
los, Ovid, to put before.
OPPUGNARE aliquem clandestinis con-
siliis, Cic. to endeavour to ruin him by
underhand doings. Oppugnare consi-
lia alicujus, Piaut.
P.
PALIERE argenti amore, HOT. to
grow pale. Pindarici fontis haustus
non expalluit, Hor. he was not afraid
of.
PALPARE & RI. Palpare aliquem,
muiitre, Juv. to caress, tc flatter,
Cui male si palpere, recalcitrat, Hon
Pecto-a palpanda manu, Ovid.
PARCERE labori, Ter. to spare, Ali-
quid alicui, Ter.toforg'vehim. Parcite
oves nimium procedere, Viig. do ndt
suffer them to go too far.
218
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Precantes ut a. caedibus, & incendio
parceretur, Liv. thai they would abstain
from.
PARTICIPARK servum consiliis, Pltut.
to impart your secrets to him.
Suns laudes cutn aliquo, Liv.
Rem aliquain, Cic. to par lake t or
kavf his share.
PASCERE pratam # in prato, Ovid, to
feed.
Animum pictura pascit inani, Virg.
Hie pascor bibliotheca Fausti, Cic. id.
Pelector.
PASCI, deponent. Apes pascuntur
arbuta, Virg. Armenia pascuntur per
berbas, Virg. and Ovid.
PELLERE tectis, Ovid. A foribus,
Plin. E foro, Cic. Ex aliqua regione.
Plin. Domo, regno, civitate, agro, se-
dibus, &c. Cic. to drive from.
PENDERE promissis, id. to depend on,
promises. Animi et anirois, id. to be
in doubt. Pendet animus, vel animus
tibi pendet, Ter. you are in suspense.
Cui spes omnis ex fortuna pendet, Cic.
De te pendentis, te respicientis atnici,
Hor. Pendent opera, interrnpta. Virg.
remain imperfect. Casu pendemns ab
no, Lucan. tt-e depend on. Ad sua vota
pendentes, Sen. In sententiis civimn,
fortunam nostram pendere, Cic.
Dumosa pendere de rape, Cic. to be
mt the top of a rock.
Hi summo in fluctu pendent, Virg.
are tossed to the lop of the waves.
Illisaque prora pependit, Virg. stuck
there.
Scopuli pendentes, Virg. hanging as it
were in the middle of the air, and leaning
over vs. Nnbila pendentia, Virg.
PENDERE pcenas temeritatis, Cic.
Pcenas pro scelere, Liter, to fray.
Pater is nihili pendit, Ter. gives
himself no sort of trouble. Magni pendi,
JLucr. to be greatly esteemed.
PENETRARE in coelum, Cic. to enter
into heaven. Atlantem, Plin. to pass
beyond. Sub terras, Cic. Se in fugam,
Plant, to run away. Pedem intra aedes,
Plaut. to enter. Ad Romanes, Plin. to
go towards,
PEHSARE nna laude crimina, Plin. to
recompense.
Laudem cum crimine, Claud.
Pensari eadem trutina, Hor. to be
Weighed in the same balance.
pi-ncuNCTARi aliqaem, Suint. Hor.
Ab aliquo, Cic. Aliquid, aliquem,
Plaut.
Aliquid ex alio, id. # Cic. Aliquem
de re aliqua, id. to inform one's self, to
inquire, to ask.
PERGO praeterita, id. to wave or pass
over in silence.
Perge facere, Ter. to go on.
PERMITTERE se in fidem vel fidei ali-
CUJHS, C&s. to put one's self under his
protection. Equum in hostem, Liv. to
put on, to ride full speed against. Vel$
ventis, Suint. to set sail.
PERSEftui vestigia alicujus, Cic. A-
liquem vestigiis ipsius, id. to follow hit
footsteps. Artem aliquam, id.
PERSONARE asqupra concha, Virg. t6
make the sea resound.
Est rnihi purgatam crebro qui perso-
net aurein, Hor. Personabat dornus
cantu tibiarnm. Cic. echoed. Ululatus
personant tota urbe, Liv. nothing else is
heard.
PERT^DERE thalami, Virg, Igna-
viam suam, C<es. Morum perversita-
tem, Suet.
PERVADERE. Pervasit murmur to-
tam concionem, Liv. was spread every
where. Incendium per agros, Cic. Pars
belli in Italian), id. Consul ad castra,
Liv.
PETERE ab aliquo, Cic. to ask. Ali-
quem, Virg. to supplicate. Auxilium
sibi ab aliquo, per aliquem, Cic. Pcenas
ab aliquo, id. to have him punished. Ve-
niam errati # errato, id. Aliquem gla-
dio, lapide, &c. to strive to hit him.
Locum, id. to go to <i place, and make
to it.
PIGNERARE & Ri. Ex aure matris
detractum unionem pigneravit ad itine-
ris impensas, Suet, to pawn.
Mars ipse ex acie fortissimum quem
que pignerari solet, Cic. if used to take
them as a pledge.
PJLAUDERE aliquem, Slat, to af*
plaitd him. Sibi, Hor. to applaud him-
self. Pedem supplaudere, Cic. to stamp
on the ground, to knock with the
foot.
Propter vicinum malum nee victoria
quidem plauditur, Cic. Atlico.
POLLERE moderatione & constantia,
Cic. to be famed for moderation and con-
stancy. Pol let ejus autoritas, Sail, is
very strong, has a great weight.
PONERE coronam in caput vel in
capite, Gell. Cnram in re aliqua, Cic.,
Dies multos in rem aliquam, id. Fidem
pignori, Plaut. to pawn his word. Cus-
todias portis, Hirt. Insidias alicui vel
contra aliquem, Cir. to lay ambush.
Officium apud aliquem, id. to oblige a.
person. Sibi aliquid in spe optima, id.
Spem in armis, id.
Ponere in beneficii loco, id. to look
upon it as a great favour.
Ponrc
OF VEUBS 'OF DIFFEIIENT GOVERNMENTS. 219
Ponere de manibos, id. to quit.
Ponuntque ferocia Poeni Corda
volente Deo, Virg.
POSCERE munus ab aliquo, Clc. AlU
queni causamdifferendi,ic/. Filiamali-
eujus sibi nxorem, Plaut. to ask.
Poscere majoribus poculis, Cic. to re-
quire that one should pledge him in larger
glasses.
POSTULARE allquem de ambitu, id.
to accuse onf, or to sue at law'. Servos
in qusestionem, id. to insist tftat the plain-
tiff be nblii^ed to expose his slaves to the
torture, in order to come at the truth.
Postulabatur injuriatn, Suet, he was
accused of.
PoxrRi praesentibns, Cic. Gaudia,
Ter. Voluptatum, Cic. t> enjoy.
Potiri hostium, to have the enemy in
his power : and sometimes (as in Plau-
tus) to fall into the hands of the enemy.
The reason hereof is, that the ancients,
to avoid a bad omen, frequently made
use of a favourable expression to denote
a bad thing ; whence cometh sacer for
execrable, and benedicere in the Scripture
for to curse, and the like. Hence it is
that they have an infinite number of
phrases and turns to signify death, with-
out hardly ever naming it.
PRJEBERE strenuum hominem, Ter.
to shew himself brave. Se sequum, Cic.
to shew himself just or impartial.
PR*CAVERE ab insidiis, Liv. Pec-
cata, Cic. to avoid.
PRJECEDKRE, ut vestrae fortmufi meis
praecedunt, Plant. Vinum aliud aliud
amffinitate praecedit, Cnlum.
Praecedere in re aliqua, Plin.
PR/BCURRERE aliquem f alicui,
Cic. to run or make speed before, to out-
run.
PR.EIRE verbis, Plaut. Verba, Liv.
to speak before. De scripto, Plin. to
dictate.
Praeeunt discipulis praeceptores, 2u.
to teach them. But prerire alicui, to sig-
nify excelling, is not used. Seeprccstare.
PR.KSTARE, PR.SCELLERE, PRJECE-
DERE, PR.TEVERTERE, alicui, vel aliquem
(but praeire alicui only, says Vossius),
to surpass, to excel.
Homo ceteris animantibus praestat,
Cj'c. Virtus praestat ceteris rebus, id.
Quantum Galli virtute alios prsesta-
rent, Liv. Praestat tamen ingenio alius
alium, Quint.
Vel magnum praestet Achillem, Virg.
even if he were more valiant than
Achilles, or were he another Achilles.
Praestare alicui scientia, setate, &c, Cic.
Inter suos aequales longe praestare, id.
to excel, to be foremost.
Praestare benevoientiam alicui, id. to
shew him affection.
Sapientis non est praestare nisi cuU
pam, id. a wite man ought to answer for
(or be sure of ) nothing but his own faults.
Sed motos praestat componere fluctus,
Virg. it is better.
Praestare rempublicam, Cic. to support
the republic. Se & mhiistrossociisreipub,
id. to answer for himself and his qffic*rs to
the allies of the republic. Factum alien-
jus, id. to approve of it.
Aliquem ante aedes, Plaut. to bring
him out. Hoc finibus his prasstabis,
Cic.
Se incolumem praestare, id. to preserve
his health.
Principem praestare, Suet, to act the
part of a prince.
Prsesto hasc, Cacti. I give this, I
bring this.
Praestare vitiuna, Cic. to take it upon
himself.
PR^STOLARI aliquem, Ter. alicui,
Cic. to wait for a person.
PRJEVERTERE aliquem prac repnbu
Plaut. to prefer, to set before. Aliquid
alicni rei, Cic, Plaut. to prefer it, or to
say it before.
Huic rei praevertendum existimavit,
Cgs. that it must be prevented.
illuc praevertamur, Hor. let us see
this first.
PROCEDERE in virtute, ad virtutem,
ad virtutis aditum, Cic. to advance in
virtue.
JEtate processit, id. he is advanced in
age.
Omnia ut spero prospere precedent,
id. all will go very well.
PROCOMBERE genibus, Ovid. Ad ge-
nua, Div. Ante pedes alicujus, Ovid,
to prostrate one's self at his feet. Ad ar-
borero, Mart, to lean against.
Procumbit humi bos, Virg. falls
down.
Procambere in armos, Mart. In ca-
put, Ovid, to fall upon.
PRODERE memorias, Cic. Memoria,
Ctes. Munuruentis, Cic. to commit to
posterity.
Prodere memoriam alicujus festi, id.
Prodit metnoria, Culum. we find in
writing.
PROHIBERE vim hostium ab oppi-
dis, COPS, to repel, to keep away, to
stay. Aditum alicui vel aliquem aditn,
Cic. to dekar or hinder him from,
coming.
Doloreui
220
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Dolorem dentium, Plin. to give ease,
to keep under. Aliquem ab injuria, Sail.
to defend him.
Uxorem prohibent mihi, Plant, they
keep her away from me.
PROPERARE in campum, Cic. Ad
cxitutn, Brutus.
Properare proficisci, C<zs. to make
"haste to be gone.
Pecuniam indigno haeredi properare,
Hor. to hoard in a hurry.
Hoc opus hoc studium parvi prope-
retnus & ampli, Hor.
Lanae properabantur, Hor.
PROPUGNARE commoda patriae, Cic.
to defend them against the enemy. Pro
salute alicujus, id. to fight for.
Propugnat nugis armatus, Hor. that
is, Pro nugis.
PROSPICERE sibi, saluti suce, Ice.
Ter. Cic. to take care of. In posterum,
Cic. Futura, id. to foresee. Senectu-
tem, Sen. to be near.
Ni parum prospiciunt oculi, Ter. if
my eyes do not deceive me.
Nee oculis prospicio satis, Plant.
Villa quse prospicit Tuscum mare,
Phied. that has a prospect over the sea.
PROVIDERS in posterum, Cic. Ali-
cui contra aliquem, id. to protect him.
Rei frumentariae, vrl rem frumentariam,
,<cel de re frumentaria, C&s. to make pro-
visinn, to look after.
Haec si non astu providentur, me aut
herum pessumdabunt, Ter. tf they are
not looked afttr, or prevented.
Provisum est rationibus multis ne,
ice. Cic, A diis immortalibus, &c. id.
PUGNAUF. pugnam, Plant. Prselia,
Hor. lojight battles. Cum hoste, Cic.
Contra pedites, Plin.
Adversus latrones, Plin. to fght
mgainst.
I Hud video pugnare te ut, &c. Cic. I
plainly see that yon pretend.
Pugnare de re aliqua, Cic. Ter* Pro
aliquo. C'C.
In aliqua loco, id.
Pugnata pugna cum rege, Liv.
Pugnata bella sub Ilio, Hor.
Quod a vobis hoc pugnari video, Cic.
PVRGARE se apud aliquem vel alicui
de re aliqua, Ter, to clear or to justify
kimself.
Purgare crimen, Cic.
Mores tuos mihi purgatos voluisti,
id
PUTARE nihil, Ter. Pro nihilo, Cic.
Aliquid minimi, id. to make no account
of-
Rem ipsam putemus, Ter. let us con-
sider the affair itself.
Putare rationem cum aliquo, Cic. to
adjust, or cast up accounts.
Putatur prudens, id. he it esteemed
prudent.
Q.
QUADRARE acervum, Hor. to make
square.
Omnia in istam quadrare apte viden-
tur, Cic. speaking of Clodia, do suit her
very well.
Visum est mihi hoc ad multa qua-
drare, id. may serve for many purposes.
Quart: quoniam tibi ita quadrat, id.
since you judge fit.
QU/ERERE aliquid ab aliquo, Cic.
C&t. De aliquo, Liu. Cic. Ex aliquo,
id. to ask or inquire of him. In aliquem,
Cic. to make inquisition t or to inform
against him.
Qurere omnes ad unum exemplum,
id. to want to reduce them alt to one
model.
Quteiere rem tormentis Of per tor-
menta, id. to put to the rack.
Qua3rere rem mercaturis faciendis,
id. to endeavour to make a fortune by
commerce.
QUERI. Multa de mea sen ten ti a
questus est Caesari, id. he complained.
Acceperam Milonem meum queri per
litteras injuriam meam, id.
Is mihi queritur quod, id.
Quereris super hoc quod, Hor.
Apudpopulum questus est, Plin. Jun.
QUIESCERE tola nocte, Cic. Viginti
dies, id. Somnum humanum, slppul.
to sleep* to repose.
Quibus quidem quamfacile poterat
quiesci, si, &c. Ter. how easy it would
have been to have done without them.
Nunquam per M. Antonium quietus
fui, Cic.
Quiescat rem adduci ad integrutu, id.
let him suffer.
R.
RECIPERE alicui, id. to promise. Ali-
quem, id. to receive him. Urbem, id.
to take or to recover it. In se omnia,
id. to take upon him. Se ad or in locum,
id. to betake himself to. Se ex loco, id.
to return. Se ad aliquem, Cox. to retire
to. Se ad frugem, Cic. to grow better.
Se proximo castello, Htrtius, to shut him-
self up, to retire to.
Recipere tectis, Cic. to entertain, or
harbour. In navem, id. on board.
Recipitur in cibuin haec herba, Plin.
is good to fat.
RECORBARI alicujus rci, aliquant
rem, de re aliqua, Cic. Cum animo
suo
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS.
suo vitatn alicujus, id. to call to mind, to
remembfr.
REDDEHE colon aliquid, vel colorem
alicui rei, Plm.
Vitam pro republ. Cic. to die in the
service of the republic. Spiritual alicui,
Ltv. to expose his life for another's ser-
vice.
REFERRE alicui, Ovid, to relate, to
tell. Ad aliquem, Cic. to ask his opinion,
to refer to him. Omnia ad aliquem fi-
nem, id.
Aliquem ore referre, C/c. to resemble
Aim.
In acceptum referre, Cic. to acknow-
ledge the receipt of.
Referre mandata ad aliquem, Cats.
Alicui, Virg.
In vel inter reos referre, Cic.
Referre alicui salutem, irf.
Accept a rn salutetn alicujus benevo-
lentiae referre, irf. in think yon owe your
life to his goodness.
Referre ensem vaginae, Sil* to put it
tip in the scabbard. Aliquid in com-
mentarium, Cic. to write or set down.
Se in gregern siunn, id.
Retulit ad me pedem, Plant, is come
back to me.
Me referunt pedes in Tusculanum,
Cic. I return on foot to Tusculanum.
Referunt base ad rem, Plaut. This
relates to the matter.
Par pari referre, Cic. to return like
for like.
Haec ego illorum defensioni retuli, id.
This I said to obviate what they might
allege in their defence.
Referre cum aliquo> id. to confer with
a per son.
. RENUNTIARE alicui vel ad aliquem,
id. to advertise, or acquaint.
Renuntiare aliquid, id. De re aliqua,
Plaut. to speak of an affair.
Renuntiare consulem, Cic. to pro-
tlaim the consul.
Renuntiare alicui amicitiam, Suet.
Hospitium, Cic. to renounce his friend-
ship and alliance. Repudium, Ter.
- Renuntiare vitse, Suet. Societati,
Paul. Jurisc. Matrimonio, Licin.
Jurisc. Muneri, officio, Suint. to re-
nounce.
Praetor renuntiatus est, Cic. was de-
tlared prtetor-.
REPONERE in numero & in nume-
rum, id. to place among the number.
Omnia suo loco, irf. to put in their proper
place.
REPOSCERE aliquid alterum Of ab al-
, id. to ask <?<, to claim.
Ad pcenas aliquem reposcere, Virg.
to insist on his being brought to justice.
RBPUGNARE alicui rei, Cic. Contra
veritatem, id. Circa aliqua, Quint, to
oppose, to resist.
REQUIESCKRE lecto, Tibull. Ilumo,
Ovul. In selli, Cic. to rest, to repose.
In miseriis. id. A mails, id. to have
some respitf.
Kt mutata suos requiescunt flumina
cursus, Virg. dostnp.
RESCRIBERE litteris, Cic. Ad lit-
teras, Brutus ad Cic. to answer. Ar-
gentum aticui, Ter. to pay money by bill.
Legiouem ad equum, Goes, to make horse
of foot.
RESIDERE humo, Ovid, to sit upon
the ground.
Si quid residet amoris in te mei, Cic,
if you have any love for me still left.
Culpa residet in te, Brutus ad Qc<
Penes te, Alphen.
Pecunia publica apud eum resedit,
Martian.
Residet spes reliquis, Cic. the rest have
hopes still.
Quura tumor animi resedisset, id.
being abated.
Venter gutturque resident esuriales
ferias, Plaut. cap. act. 1 . that is, 6'e-
dendo agunt, says Sanctius.
Residentur mortui, Cic. 2. de
when the corpse is watched or attended.
Rtsi'icEiiE aliquem &> ad aliquem,
Ter. to look, or to respect.
Summa imperii ad nos respicit, Cos.
belongs to us, regards us.
RESPONDERE alicui, Cic. Virg. Ad
aliquem, Pliny, to answer 9 or to corre-
spond.
Contra elata mari respondet Gnosia
tell us, Virg. presents itself, shews itself.
RFSTITUEIIE sanitatem alicui K ali-
quem sanitati, Plin. to heal, to restore t9
health.
In possessionem restituere, Cic.
Retinere memoriam alicujus rei, <SC
memoria retinere aliquid, id. to remem-
ber.
Pudore & liberalitate retinere pueros,
Ter. to restrain or govern.
RIDE RE aliquem, Cic. Ter. to laugh.
at one.
De re aliqua, Cic.
Ridere risum, irf.
Domus ridet argento, Hor. shines
RORARE. Rorat, simply, Colum. t
fall down like dew, to bedew.
Si roraverit quantulumcunque im-
brem, PUny, if it drops never so little
Tain,
Rorare
222
Rorare allquem cruore, SH. to be-
gprinkle aim with blood,
Laerimis oculi rorentur obortis, Ovid.
Roratse rosse, Ovid, bedewed.
RUERE ad interitum voluntarium,
Cic. I n fen um pro libertate, Virg. to
rush vp f >n.
Ruere ilia non puss tint, Cic. cannot
fall to the ground.
Vide ne quid imp r miens ruas, Ter.
Spumas sails aere ruebant, Virg.
Caeteros ruerem, agerem, prosterne-
rein, Ter,
S.
SALTARE laudes alicujus, Plin, Jun.
to dance singing his praises.
Pastorem saltaret uti Cyclopa roga-
bat, Hor. that he would 1 - act the part of
Polyphemus in dancing.
Nemo fere saltat sobrius, Cic,
SAFE RE. Palatus ei sap it, id. he has
A smack of.
Mare sapit, it has the taste of sea-
Water.
Si recta saperet, Cic. if he were
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
supraque revol-
Ego Bieam rem sapio, Plaut. 1 know
tny own affairs.
SATISFACERE alicui de visceribus,
Cic. to pay him with his own money.
Alicui de re aliqua, C<ES. concerning
something. Alicui in pecunia, C&l. ad
Cic.
Donicum pecuniam satisfecerit, Goto
de RR. till he has paid his money.
Satisfactam est protnisso nostro, Cic.
SATURARE. Hae res me vitas satu-
rant, Plaut. give me a surfeit of life.
; Pabulo se saturate, Varro.
SCATERE molestiarum, Gell. Fera-
rum, Lucr. to be full of, to overflow.
Pontus scatens belluis, Hor.
SEDERE in equo, Cic. Equo, Liv.
Mart, to ride. Post equitem, Hor. to
ride behind. Supra leonem, Plin. Ad
latus alicujus, Cic.
Dum apud hostes sedimus, Plaut. so
long as we were near.
Si sedet hoc animo, Virg. if it be your
pleasure.
Memor illius escae, qoae tibi sederit,
Hor. which agreed with you best.
Vestis sedet, Quint, sits well.
Omnes consurrexisse, & senem ilium
sessum recepisse, Cic. rose up, and made
room for the old man.
SECMJI vestigiis aliquem, Liv. to follow
his tract. Sententiam alicujus, Cic, to
be of his opinion.
SERPERE hunai, Hor. Per humum,
Plin. to creep alons, the ground.
Serpit draco subter supraqu
vens sese, Cic.
SERVIRE tempori, valetudini, rei fa-
miliari, &c. id. Servitutem, id. Plaut.
Liv.
Sternum servire, Hor. Apud ali-
quem, Plaut. Servius.
Liber servibo tibi, Plaut. Martis ser-
vibo commodis, Ter, Ut communi uti-
litati serviatur, Cic.
Non bene crede mihi servo servitur
amicp, Mart.
SITIRE sanguinem, Cic, to thirst after
blood.
Sitiunt agri, id. Sitientes loci, Plin,
dry places.
Quo plus sunt pot JE plus sitiuntur
aquae, Ovid.
SOLVERE crimine, Stat. to absolve,
to discharge. Fidem, to break his word f
Ter. to fulfil his vow, Ovid. Argu-
mentum, Quint, to solve. Pecuniam,
Cic. to pay. Vitam alicui vel aliquem
vita, Plaut. to put him to death. Ob-
sidionem urbis, # urbem obsidione,
Liv. to raise a siege. Foedera, Virg. to
break.
Solvere simply, or solvere navem, of
solvere e portu, Cic. C<ES. to weigh an~
chor, to put to sea.
Solvere ab Alexandria, Cic. to set sail
from Alexandria.
Solvere ab aliquo,- id. to take money
from a person in order to pay his debts,
Nee solvitur in somnos, Virg, cannot
sleep.
Solvendo non esse, Cic. to have not
wherewithal to pay.
Soluturus ne sit eos pro bonis, id,
whether he will pay them away as good
money.
SPECTARE orientem, Plin. Ad orien-
tem, Cat. In meridiem, Cato, to look
towards.
Spectare animum alicujus ex suo,
Tertul. to judge of another person from
one's self.
Spectare aliquem ex censu, Cic, lit
respect him according to his income.
In unum exitum spectantibus, id.
tending to the same end.
Stare ad curiam, id, not to slir from
the cowt. In aequo alicui, sup, loco,
Sen. to be upon a level with him. Au-
tore certo, Liv. to abide by a particu-
lar author. Ab aliquo, Cic, Cum ali-
quo, id. and Liv. to be of his side or
party. Contra aliquem, Cic. Virg. to
be against him. Pro judicio erroris sui,
Ph<ed. to maintain obstinately, Animis
Cic. to take courage. Fide, Liv. In
fide,
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 223
flde, Cif. to stand to his nord. Mul-
torum sanguine ac vulneribus, Liv. to
tost the blood of many.
Quorum statuae in rostris steterunt,
Cic. were fastened to.
Cum in senatu pulcherrime staremus,
id. being in a very good posture, when
our affairs went very well.
Stant lumina flainma, Virg. are full
of.fre.
UW jas sparso croco steterit, Hor.
tcill begin to grow thick.
Qui si steterit idem, Cic. if he con-
tinues resolute.
Mod6 stet nobis illud, id. provided we
continue resolute,
Omnis in Ascanio cari stat cura pa-
rentis, Virg. is fixed on him.
Per me stat, Quint. Plin. it depends
on me.
Standum estepistolis Domitiani, Plin.
lee must abide by.
Quid agitur ? Statur. Plaut.
STATOERE exemplum in hominetn
& in homine, Cic. to inflict an exem-
plary punishment. Capite aliquem in
terram, Ter. to fting headlong against
the ground.
Statuere in aliquem, Cces. to give sen-
tence against him. Apud animos vet in
animuin, Liv. to determine within him-
self. Statuam alicui, Cic. to enact a
ttatue to him.
Statutum est, it is decreed.
STRUERE calamitatem alicui, id. to
contrive some mischief against him. O-
diuin in aliquem, id. to endeavour to
render him odious. Mendacium, Liv. to
forge a lye.
STUDERE alicui, Cic. to favour, or to
bear good will and affection to one.
Laudi & dignitati, id. to aspire to.
Aliquid, id. Ter. Hor. to have a strong
desire for a thing. In aliqua re, Gell.
to study or apply the mind to it. In ali-
quid, 2 < tint, to aim only at that.
Non tui studet, Cic. he does not trou-
ble his head about you.
Studet rem ad arm a deduci, Cess, he
endeavovrt to push things to extremity.
STUPEIIE in aliquo, Vol. Max. Re
aliqua, Hor. Ad rem aliquam, Ovid,
to be surprised or amazed at a thing.
Rem aliquam, Virg. to look on mth
amazement.
Haec cum loqueris nos Varrones stu-
pemus, tu videlicet tecum ipse rides,
Cic.
SUADERB legem, id. to persuade the
people to accept of a law.
Pacem # de pace, Cic. Quint.
tectis $* ad tecta,
In coclum, Ptin. Limina, Virg. to
go, to draw near. Onus, Liv. to under-
go, to sustain.
Mihi cunctarum subcunt fastidia,
Ovid, they displease me.
Humeris subire aliquem, Virg. to
carry on the shoulders.
Subire animos, Liv.
SUBJICERE aliquid oculis, Plin. Jan.
Liv. Sub oculos, id. & Quint, to put
before one's eyes. Sensibus, Cic.
Subjicere test amenta, id. to forge.
SUCCEOERE Penatibus, Muro, Virg.
to come within. Murnm, Sallust, to
draw near. Sub primam aciem, COM. to
move towards the van-guard. Alicui,
Cic. to succeed him. Oneri, Virg. to take
it upon his back. In locum, Cic.
SUCCENSERE alicui, id. Injuriam ali-
cui, Gell.
Si id succenseat mine, Ter. if he is
vexed at this.
SUDARE sine causa, Cic. Pro com-
munibus commodis, id. to work.
Sanguine multo sudare, Liv. to sweat
blood.
Et durae quercus sudabunt roscida
mella, Virg.
Et vigilanda; noctes & in sndata vests
durandum, Quint.
Sudataque ligno <'* Thura ferat,
Cic.
SUFFICKRE omnibus, Lucan. Cic. to be
sufficient fur all.
Nee obniti contri nee tendere tantum
sufficimus, Virg. we are not able.
Ad quas nee mens, nee corpus, nee
dies ipsa safficiat, Suint.
Ipse Danais animos viresqne sufficit,
Virg. furnishes them. Aliam sufficere
prolem, id. to substitute. Ardentesque
oculos suffecti sanguine & igni, id.
whose eyes were red and inflamed.
SUPERESSE alicui, Plaut. to survive.
Suet, to defend as a patron his client
in law. Labori, Virg. to overcome
and surmount the trouble. Superest
mihi, Cic. it remains for me. Popali
supersunt auxilio, Virg. there are more
than iKe want for our assistance. Ttt
plane superes nee ades, Gell. you are one
too many, you are not wanted. Mod6
vita supersit, Virg. if I do but five.
SUSPENDERE arbori, in arbore, # de
arbore, Cic. to hang upon a tree. In
f ureas, Ulp.
Suspend it picta vultum mentemque
tabella, Hor.
T.
TACKRE aliquid, Ter. Cic. Plaut. D*
re aliqua, Suint. to keep it secret.
Potest
224
NEW METHOD. Book VII.
Potest taceri hoc, Ter.
Dicenda, tacenda locutus, Hor.
TEMPERARE iras, Virg. to moderate.
Caedibus, Liv. to refrain from.
A lacrymis, Virg. Alicui, Cic.
JEtati juvenum temperate, PUurt. to
govern them.
Sibi temperate, Cic. to command him-
self.
TENDERE ad littora, Liv. In Latium,
Virg. to go towards.
Tendit iter velis ? Virg. begins to make
sail.
Rete tenditur accipitri, Ter.
Manibus tendit divellere nodos, Virg.
endeavours.
Tendere adversus autoritatem sena-
tds, Liv. to resist or withstand.
Tendere alicui metum aut spem, Cic.
to shew or hold out to him,
Hie sffivus tendebat Achilles, sup.
pelles, or tentoria, Virg. pitched his
tent.
TIMERS aliquem, Ovid, to fear
him. Alicui, Ter. to fear lest some mis-
fortune happen to him. Ab aliquo, Cic.
to be afraid of him, to mistrust him. De
repubiica, id. to be afraid for the repub-
lic. De vita, Ceelius Ciceroni, I am afraid
of my life.
Timeo ut, ft timeo ne, See p. 159.
TRADERE in custodiam, Cic. Custo-
dise, Colum. to deliver up, or send to
prison. Se totum alicui, Cic. to give
one's self up entirely to him.
TRANSFIGERE gladio aliquem per pec-
tus, Liv. Cum armis corpus alicujus,
Liv. to run through, to stab.
V.
VACARE morbo vel a morbo, Celt,
to be free from illness. Sibi, Mart, to
work for himself. Philosophise^ Cic.
to study philosophy. In aliquod opus,
Ovid.
- Vacare culpa, Cic. a culpi, Senec.
to be free from fault. Ab omni admi-
nistratione, Cr . to he exempt from. Ani-
mo, id. to be at leisure, to have nothing
to do.
Vacat locus, COPS, the place is empty.
Vacat mihi, 2u<nt. I am at leisure.
Vacat annales audire, Virg.
Tantum huic studii relinquendum,
quantum vacata pnblicis officiis, Cic.
Eorum animus ponendi pecitniatn
nunquam vacavit, Vol. 1. 4. c. 3. sup,
vacationem, ut. vult Sanctius, lib. 3.
never gave their minus to the amassing of
money.
VAGARI passim toto foro, Cic. In
agris, id. to wander about.
Vagatur errore animus, id.
VALERE. Valet oculis, Gell. Va-
lent ejus oculi, Plaut. his eye-sight if
good.
Autoritate valet, Cic. Valet ejus au-
toritas, id.
Valet tanti, valet minis, among the
civilians. Denos aeris valebant, Varro.
Quid igitur ? Valetur, Plaut. nee are
very well.
VAPULARE. See the Preterites,
vol. 1. p. 305. and the Syntax, vol. 2.
p. 68.
VEHERE amne, Ovid. Per maria,
Plin. to convey by water, by sea.
Vehi curru, Cic. In curru, Ovid.
Equo, Ovid. In equo, Cic. to travel, or
ride in a coach, or on horseback.
VELLE aliquem, Plaut. to ,teant to
speak to him. Alicui, Cic. to wish him
well. Alicujus causa, id. Rein volo
defensam, id. I will have it defended.
Quid sibi vult istud ? Cfc. What's the
meaning of this ?
VENIRE alicui auxilio, Liv. Subsi-
dio, Cic. Suppetias, Hirt. to come to
the assistance of.
Venire alicui adversum, Plaut. to go
to meet him. In certamen cum aliquo,
Cic. to fight him. In consilium alicujus,
id. to come to give him counsel. Sub
jactum telorunii Liv. to come within
shot of.
Inimicus alicui venire, Cic. to be his
enemy.
Ad inimicitias res venit, id.
Venire viam, id. to go his oin way,
Ad me ventum est, id.
Mih| venit in dubium fides tua, id. I
begin to doubt of.
De sorte venio in dubium, Ter. I am
in danger of losing the principal.
Venit mihi in mentem Platonis, Cic.
I call Plato to mind.
In mentem venit de speculo, Plant.
Venit in mentem P. Romani digni-
tas, Cic.
VERTERE aliquid in laudem, Tac. to
turn to praise. Stultitiae aliquid alicui,
Plaut. to impute it to his folly. In rena
suam, Ulp. to turn to his profit. In pri-
vatum, Liv. to his private use. Ad se
parttm alicujus rei, Cic. to appropriate
to himself.
Vertere Platonem, Cic. to translate
Platn. Graeca in Latinum, Stuinl. De
Graecis, C?c. Ex Graecis, Ter.
Tribus in rebus ftre vertitur omnis
virtus, Cic, consists in, is included.
Intra
t
OF VERBS OF DIFFERENT GOVERNMENTS. 225
Intra fines hos vertuntur omnia, Ctel.
ad Cic.
In priorem partem sunt versa & mu-
tata oinuia, id. are changed.
Jam verterat fortuna, Liv. was now
changed.
Quae te genitor sententia vertit ?
Virg. has made you change opinion.
VIGIEARE ad multam noctem, fy de
multa nocte, Cic. to sit tip very late.
Noctes vigilare ad ipsum mane, Hor.
Vigilare studiis, Proper. In scelus,
Stat.
Noctes vigilantur amante, Ovid.
VINDICARE se ab aliquo, Sen. De
aliquo, Cic. to be revenged of a person.
Te valde vindicavi,. Cic. Atlito. I
have got my full revenge of you. Ita
Man.
Peccatum in altero vindicare, Cic. to
punish.
In aliquem scelera alterius vindicare,
id.
Vindicare alabore, id. to exempt.
Graiis bis vindicat armis, FSrg.
Vindicare in libertatem, Cic. to tet
at liberty, to restore. Libertatem, Ctfs.
to defend the liberty. Se ad suos, Ctc.
to return safe and sound to them. Se
existimationi hominum, id. to maintain
' his reputation.
* Some write the following exam-
ples with an e, VENDICARE. But
we shall make it appear in the ninth
book, of Letters and Orthography, that
we ought always to write VI-ND*-
CAKE.
Aliquid pro suo vindicare, Cic. to
claim.
Sibi assumere & vindicare, id,
Dicere suurh & 'vindicare, trf.
Utur,ARE, Ululant canes, Virg. to
hotul.
^Edes ululant plangoribus fernineis,
Virg. do ring with.
Tristia ulularunt Galli, Lucan.
Centum ululata per urbes, Lucan,
UTOR. See the Syntax, rule 33.
p. 70.
VOL, 1L
Q
BOOK VIII.
On the Roman Names. On their Figures or Arithmetical
Characters. On their manner of counting the Ses-
terces. And on the division of Time.
Useful for the understanding of Authors.
CHAPTER I.
Of the Names of the Antient Romans. Taken from VA L.
MAXIMUS, SIGONIUS, LIPSIUS, and other authors.
I J H E Greeks had only one name, but, the Romans had
JL sometimes three or four, which they called PRJENGMEN,
NOMEN, COGNOMEN, and sometimes also AGNOMEN.
The prcenowen is that which agreeth to each individual ; the no-
men that which denotes the family from which he is descended ;
and the. cognomen, that which agreeth to a particular branch of this
family.
I. Of the Proper Name, PR^NOMEN.
The prcenomen was therefore, as the very word expresseth, what
was prefixed to the general name, and amounts to the same thing
as our proper name, by which we distinguish brothers of the same
family, as when we call them, Peter, John, James, &c.
The prcenomen was not introduced till a long time after the no-
men. Hence it was customary among the Romans to give the fa-
mily name to children, of the male sex, the ninth day after their
nativity ; and of the female the eighth, according to Festus and
Plutarch. And those days were called dies lustrici, because it was
a ceremony whereby they were acknowledged as legitimate, and
of such or such a family, whose name was given them. Whereas
they did not receive the prcenomen, till they took the toga mrilis,
that is, about the age of seventeen, as appeareth by the epitome of
the 10th book attributed to Valerius Maximus. Pueris, says he,
non priusquam togam virilem sumerent, puellis non antequam nulerent,
prcenomina imponi morisfuisse Q. Sccevola autor est. This is farther
confirmed by Tully's epistles, where the children are called Cicero-
nes pueri> till that age, after which they are stiled Marcus Jilius,
Quintusjilius.
And though Cicero in the last epistle of the 6th book to Atticus
calleth his nephew, Quintum Ciceronem puerum ; yet it ig very pro-
bable
OF THE ROMAN NAMES. 227
bable that Cicero wresteth the sense of the word pucr, to distinguish
him from his father, who was also called Quintus ; or perhaps be-
cause he had but very lately taken the toga virilis. And in regard
to what Sigonius mentions from Plutarch and Festus, who, ac-
cording to him, are of a different opinion from Valerius Maximus,
we are to take notice that those authors do not speak of the prceno-
men, but of the nomen, which, as hath been above mentioned, was
given to children the 8th or 9th day after their nativity. And
there is no manner of doubt but this is what led Sigonius into a
mistake.
In conferring this prcsnomen, they took care generally to give
that of the father to the eldest son, and that of the grandfather and
the ancestors of the family to the second, and to all the rest.
Varro observeth that there were thirty of those prcenomina, in
his time, or thereabouts, whereof the most usual may be reduced
to eighteen, some of which were marked by a single letter, others
by two, and others by three, as we shall here exhibit them, toge-
ther with their etymology.
1. With a single letter we find eleven.
A. stands for AULUS, so called from the verb alo, as being bora
Diis (dentibus.
C. stands for CAIUS, so called ft gaudio parentum.
D. stands for DECIMUS, that is, the tenth born.
K. stands for K^ESO, taken from ccedo, because they were
obliged to open his mother's womb to bring him into the world.
L. stands for Lucius, from lux, lucis, because the first who
bore this name, was born at break of day.
M. stands for MARCUS, as much as to say, born in the month
of March.
But M' with an acute accent on the top, or M' with a comma,
signified! MANIUS, that is, born in the morning, or rather quite
good, because manis heretofore, as we have already observed, p.
150. signified good.
N. stands for NUMERIUS, which cometh from numerus, number.
P. makes PUBLIUS either from the word pubes, or frompopulus,
as much as to say popular and agreeable to the people.
Q. stands for QUINTUS, that is, the fifth child of his family.
T. stands for TITUS from the word tueri, as if the defender or
preserver of his country.
2. With two letters we find four.
AP. stands for APPIUS, which cometh from the Sabine word
Attius. For Attius Clausus was the first, who having been ex-
pelled his country, came to Rome and changed his name into that
of Appiiis Claudius.
CN. stands for CNEUS, as much as to say ncsvus, from some
mark on his body.
SP. stands for SPURIUS, which denotes something ignominious
in birth. For this word in the Latin tongue signifies also spurious
or illegitimate. Spurii, quasi extra puritatem, fy immundi, says St.
Isidore.
TI. stands for TIBERIUS, that is, born near the Tiber.
3. With three letters, we find three.
Q 2 MAM.
228 PARTIC. OBSEHV. CHAP. I. Book VIII.
MAM. that is, MAMERCUS, which in the Tuscan language
signified Mars, according to Festus.
SER. that is, SERVIUS, from the word serous, a slave, because
the person who first took this name, was not free born.
SEX. that is, SEXTUS, as much as to say the sixth born.
These are the eighteen proper names most usual among the
Romans. To which we might likewise add some that are very well
known in antient history, as Ancus, Aruns, Hostilius, Tullus, and
eome others.
II. Of the general Name, NOMEN GENTIS.
The nomen or name was what agreed to the whole race or family
with ^11 its branches, and answered to the Greek patronymics, ac-
cordii\ig to Priscian, lib. 2. For as the descendants of ^Eacus were
called ^Eacides, so the descendants of lulus son of JEneas, had the
name of Julii ; those of the Antonian family, Antonii, and the rest
in the like manner. Hence we may observe that all those general
names which they called Gentilitia, are properly adjectives, and
that they all terminate in ius, except two or three, namely, Pe-
ducceuS) Popp&us, and perhaps Norbanus ; though Lipsius questions
whether the latter be one of those names.
III. Of the particular surname, COGNOMEN and
AGNOMEN.
The particular surname called cognomen, was properly the name
by which the different branches of the same stock or house, in eadem
gente, were distinguished; as when Livy says that the house of the
Potitians was divided into twelve families. For gens fy familiq
were like the whole and its parts. Those of the same stock or house
were called Gentiles ; and those of the same branch or family, Ag-
nati. As we see in France that the royal house hath been frequently
'divided into different branches, as those of Valois, Bourbon, Or-
leans, Montpensier, &c. Thus when we say that the family of the
Caesars were of the race of Julius ; Julius is the general name of the
race, or nomen gentis; arid Ccesar that of the family, cognomen Ja-
milice. But if you add Caius for his proper name, this will give us
the prcenomen. Therefore all three will be C. Julius Ccesar.
There are some who hereto add the agnomen, which signifieth
as it were an increase of the surname, and was conferred on some
particular occasion, as when one of the Scipios was entitled Afri-
canus, and the other Asiaticus, because of their great exploits in
those parts of the world. And no doubt but a man might in this
manner have sometimes a particular surname, and as it were a
fourth name. Hence the author ad Herennium makes mention of
this agnomen, when he says, Nomen autem cum dicimus, cognomen
qnoque fy agnomen intelligatur oportet.
Yet it is certain that the word cognomen comprehendeth likewise
this sort of nouns, witness Sallust, when he says of Scipio himself,
"Masinissa in amkitiam receptus h JP. Scipione, cut postea Africano cog-
nomen Juit ex virtute : and Cicero writing to Pomponius y who was
unnamed Atticus> for having performed his studies at Athens,
says,
OF THE ROMAN NAMES.
says, Teque non cognomen Athenis solum deportasse, sed humanitatem
$ prudentiam intelligo.
And indeed if we examine closely into the thing, we shall find
that there are no surnames, I mean of those which are called cog*
nomina^ and distinguish families, but what are thus derived from
some particular occasions ; since even the proper names (jiranomi*
na) are originally owing to such occasions, as we have above de-
monstrated in pointing out their etymology.
IV. OBSERVATIONS on tlie Names of Slaves,
Freedmen, Women, and Adoptive Children.
And first of Slaves and Freedmen.
Slaves formerly had no other name than that of their master, as
Lucipor, Marcipor, for Lucii puer, Marci puer. Yet in process of
time they had a name given them, which was generally that of
their country, as Syrus, Davus, Geta, &c. Just as in France the
lackeys are sometimes called Champagne, Basque, Picard, &c.
When they were enfranchised, they took the prcenomen and the
nomen of their masters, but not the cognomen, instead of which they
retained their own preznomen. Thus Cicero's learned freedman was
.called M. Tullius Tyro, and others in the same manner. The like
was observed in regard to allies and foreigners, who assumed the
name of the person, by whose interest they had obtained the free-
dom of the city of Rome.
2. Of Women.
Varro takes notice that the women had heretofore their proper
and particular name, as Caia, Ccetilia, Lucia> Volumnia. And
Festus says that Caecilia and Tarratia were both called Caice. We
likewise meet with Titia, Marca, &c. in Sigonius and others. And
those names, as Quintilian observeth, were marked by inverted
letters, thus, 3, ^ j\[, &c. In process of time they were discon-
tinued : if there was only one, it was customary to give her the
name of her race or stock ; or sometimes it was softened by a Di-
minutive, as Tullia or TuUiola. But if there were many, they
were called after the order of their birth, Prima, Secunda, Tertia,
Quarta, Quinta, &c. or these were formed into diminutives, Se-
cundilla, Quartilla, Quintilla, &c.
But as several are mistaken in affirming that the women had no
pr&riomen ; so they are also in an error in pretending that they
had no cognomen. For it is certain that Sylla's daughter, who was
married to Milo, had the surname of Cornelia; and Cselius writing
to Cicero, speaks of Paula, who had the surname of Valeria.
3. Of Adoptive Children.
It was customary for those who were adopted, to take the names
and surnames of those who adopted them. And in order to mark
their birth and descent, they only added at the end the name
of the house or stock from which they were descended, or the sur-
name of their own particular branch ; with this difference however,
thaj
230 PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. I. Book VIII.
that if they made use of this surname, they wrote it simply ;
whereas if they used the name, they formed it into an adjective ;
Si cognomen, integrum servabant ; si nomen, mutatum 8$ inflexum,
fiays Lipsius.
For example, M. Junius Brutus having been adopted by Q. Ser-
vilius Ccepio Agalo ; he took all his names, and preserved only the
name of his own branch, calling himself Q. Serviliu.s Ccepio Agalo
Brutus. On the contrary, Octavius having been adppted by his
grand uncle, Julius Ccssar, he preserved the name of his house,
changing it into an adjective, and was called C. Julius Ccssar Octa-
vianus ; which did not hinder them from preserving also any sur-
name they might have acquired, as Atticus, who having been
adopted by Q. C&mttus, had the surname of Q. Ccecilius Pomponia-
nus Atlicus ; or from acquiring any new one by their merit, as
Octavius, who had afterwards the surname of Augustus given him.
To this rule of adoption we must refer what Suetonius saith,
that Tiberius having been adopted by M. Gallius, a senator, he
took possession of his estate, but would not go by his name, be-
cause he had followed the party that opposed Augustus ; and what
Tacitus says, that Crispus Sallustius adopting his sister's nephew,
made him take his name. And such like expressions.
V. Other observations on changing the order of
those Names.
Though the usual custom of the Romans was that above ob-
served, of putting the prcenomen, nomen, and. cognomen, one after
the other ; yet we must take notice that this order hath not been
always carefully adhered to, as Valerius Maximus testifieth: Anim-
advert o enim, says he, lib. 10. in consulum fastis per plexum usumprce-
nominum 8$ cognominiimjuisse. Concerning which there are several
changes to be observed.
1. The cognomen before the nomen.
Manutius sheweth that they sometimes put the surname of the
particular branch before the general name of the stock, cognomen
ante nomen gentis, as in Cicero we find Gallo Fabio, Balbi Cornelii,
Papum JEmilium ; and in Livy, Paullus JEmilius Cos. and the
like, though Gallus, Balbus, Papus and Paullus, were cognom,ina
non prtznomina.
2. The cognomen become nomen.
Sometiroes the cognomen became a nomen. Quin etiam cognomina
in noraefi, versa sunt, says Valerius Maximus.
3. The pr&nomen become nomen.
Sometimes the prcenomen became a nomen, says Priscian, as
Tullus Servilius, M. Tullius.
4. The pr&nomen put in the second place.
And sometimes the pr&nomen used to be put only in the second
place, as Sigonius observed!. Thus we find in Livy, Attius Tul-
lus, Manlius Cnceus, Octavius Metius. In Cicero, Malaginensis M.
Scipio. In Suetonius, ad Pompeium.
5. The
OF NAMES UNDER THE EMPERORS. 231
5. The prcenomen or proper name put last under the
Emperors.
But those changes were still more considerable under the em-
perors. For whereas during the time of the republic, the pros-
nomen was the proper name which distinguished brothers and in-
dividuals from one another, as M. Tullius Cicero, and Q. Tullius
Cicero, brothers ; on the contrary in the monarchical state of
Rome, the proper name which distinguished individuals, was ge-
nerally the last, whence it came that the brothers, commonly
speaking, had nothing in particular but that; as Flavius Vespa-
sianus, and Flavius Sabinus, brothers, in Suetonius.
This new custom appeareth plainly in the case of the Senecas.
For Seneca the father, the rhetorician, was called M. Anncsus Seneca;
and he had three children, M. Anncsus Novatus, L. Annccus Se-
neca, the philosopher ; and L. Anncsus Mela, father of Lucan the
poet. Yet the latter of each of those names was so far the proper
and particular appellation, by which they were distinguished from,
one another, that the other two are common to them all ; and that
Seneca the rhetorician, father of those celebrated sons, sometimes
gives both to himself and them only the latter of those three
names, as appeareth by the title of his first book of Controversies,
Seneca, Novato, Senecce, Mila Jiliis salutem. And his eldest son
Novatus, having been adopted by Junius Gallio, he is called by
Eusebius in his Chronicle, Julius Galliof rater Seneca ; though his
brother, Seneca the philosopher, generally calls him by the last of
those three, which was his proper name, as in the title of his book
on a Happy Life, and in his epistles ; likewise St. Luke in the Acts
of the Apostles, c. 18. calls him by no other name than Gallio.
Whence it is clear that in those days it was the last name that
distinguished the brothers from each other, as might be demon-
strated by several other examples.
Hence also it comes that only this last name was generally given
to the principal persons of the empire in the first ages of the
Church, as sufficiently distinguishing them from every body else.
This is the reason that though St. Jerome in the preface to his
commentaries on the epistle of St. Paul to the Galatians, speaking
of Victorinus, that famous professor of eloquence at Rome, ob-
serves that he was called C. Marius Victorinus ; yet Victorinus was
in such a manner his proper name, that this very St. Jerome in
his treatise of Ecclesiastic Writers, chap. 101. and St. Austin in his
Confessions, book 8. chap. 2. call him only Victorinns.
It appeareth likewise that St. Paulinus, Bishop of Nola, was ^
called Pontius Meropius Paulinus ; and yet St. Austin and other
authors generally give him the latter of those three names only,
as that by which his person was particularly distinguished. Thus
Rufinus is called only by this name in the writings of S. Jerom,
S. Austin, and S. Paulinus, though his name was Tyrannius llu-
faus ; nor has S. Prosper any other appellation in the antient
writers of the Church, though his name was Tyro Prosper. Nor
is Volusian, governor of Rome, mentioned by any other name in
the 1st and 2d epistle of S. Austin, though we find by an antient
inscription
5232 PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. I. Book VIII.
inscription that he was called Cains Ccsionius Eufius Volusianus ;
nor Boetius by any other than this name, though he was called
Anicius Boetius; this name of Anicius, which is here put first,
being nevertheless the name of the noble family from which he.
was descended.
6. Exception to this rule of taking the last name under
the Emperors.
Contrary to this general rule of the Roman names under the
emperors, it is to be observed however (as Father Sirmond hath
observed in his notes on St. Sidonius) that we call Palladius the
person who wrote on agriculture, though his name being Palla-
dius Rutilius Taurus JEmilianus, we should call him JEnrilianus, as
he is stiled by St. Isidorus. In like manner we give the name of
Macrobius to the person whom Avienusand Boetius call Theodosius,
because his real name was Macrobius Ambrosius Aurelius Theodosius:
and we give the name of Cassiodorus to that great man who was
called Cassiodorus Senator, the word Senator, which was his real
name, having been taken by many rather as the name of his dig-
nity than of his person.
But though a few such particular cases may occur, they must
be considered, notwithstanding,, either as exceptions to the general
rule, or as errors that have crept into the title of the works of those
authors, through the negligence of those who, choosing only to put
one of their names, did not reflect that the custom of the antients
was changed, and that the last name was become the proper name
of individuals.
7. Other names changed as well as the latter.
It is also observable, as Father Sirmondus sheweth extremely
well in the same place, that whereas the antients always retained
the name of their family together with their proper name, this
custom was so far altered in the latter ages, that not only the pro-
per name, but likewise all the others were changed in regard al-
most to every individual, not attending so much to the general
name of the family, as to those which had been particular to the
illustrious men of that same family, or to their -rerfetons and
friends. Thus the son of the orator Symmachus was called Q.
Flavins Memmius Symmachus, having taken the name of Flamus
from his uncle by the father's side, and of Memmius from his uncle
by the mother's side. Thus St. Fulgentius was called Fabius
Claudius Gordianus Fulgentius, having taken the name of Claudius
from his father, and that of Gordianus from his grandfather, which
is oftentimes the cause of our not being able to trace the antiquity
of families.
THE NUMBERS OF THE ROMANS. 233
1
5
10
50
100
500
1000
5000
10000
50000
100000
CHAPTER II.
Of Figures, or Arithmetical Characters, among the
Romans.
I. In what manner the Romans marked their Numbers.
9
TH E Romans marked their numbers by letters, which they
ranged thus :
One.
Five.
Ten.
Fifty.
One hundred.
Five hundred.
One thousand.
Five thousand.
Ten thousand.
Fifty thousand.
One hundred thousand.
These are the figures of the Roman numbers, with their sig-
nification and value : for, as Pliny observeth, the antients had no
number above a hundred thousand; but to reckon higher, they
put this number twice or thrice. Whence comes the manner of
computing by, bis, ter, quater, quinquies, decies centena millia, and
others, of which we shall have occasion to speak in the chapter
on Sesterces.
II. Proper observations in order to understand these
Figures thoroughly.
In order properly to understand these figures, we must consider :
1. That there are only five different figures, which are the first
five, and tUat all the rest are compounded of I and C ; so that the
C is always turned towards the I, whether it comes before or after,
as may be seen above.
2. That as often as there is a figure of less value before a
higher, it signifies that we are to deduct so much from the latter,
as iv. four : XL. forty : xc. ninety, &c. Whereby we see that there
is no number but what may be expressed by the first five figures.
3. That in all those numbers, the figures go on increasing by a
fivefold and afterwards a double proportion, so that the second is
five times the value of the first, and the third twice the value of
the second ; the fourth five times the value of tfee third ; the fifth
twice the value of the fourth, and the rest in the same manner.
4-. That the figures always begin to be multiplied on the right
side, so that all the o which are put on that side are reckoned by
five,
234 PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. II. BooH VIII.
five, as those on the other side are reckoned by ten ; and thus we
may easily find out all sorts of numbers how great soever : as when
an author in the 16th century, giving a list of the number of
citizens in the Roman empire, puts contrary to the custom of the
antients, ccccccclooooaoo. IDOOODDO. ccclooa. cclao. taking the first
c after the I for one thousand, or the first c on the right hand for
five hundred, and proceeding through the whole with a tenfold
progression, in each figure on either side, I see immediately that
the whole comes to one billion, five hundred millions, a hundred
and ten thousand citizens ; which we should express thus by. Ara-
bic cyphers, 1500,110,000. But as we have already observed,
the antients did not pass ccclooo. one hundred thousand in those
figures.
III. What this manner of reckoning has been owing to,
and whence these Figures have been taken.
Now if I may be permitted to reflect a little on this manner of
counting, it is easy to judge that it is owing to this, that mankind
having begun at first to count with their fingers, they told as far
as five with one hand, then adding the other hand, they made ten,
which is double ; and hence it is that their progression in these
numbers is always from one to five, and then from five to ten.
To this same cause the very formation of these figures is owing.
For what is more natural than to say, that I is the same as if an
unit was shewn by raising one finger only ; and that the V is as if
depressing the middle fingers no more was shewn than the little
finger and the thumb, to include the whole hand; and adding
the other to this, they formed as it were two V, one of which
was inverted under the other, that is an X, which is equivalent to
ten.
Manutius shews further that all the other figures are derived
from the first, because as the V is only two I joined at the bottom,
so the L is only two I, one upright and the other couchant ; and
adding thereto a third on the top, they expressed by this figure
a hundred, instead of which the transcribers, for greater currency
in writing, have borrowed the C. And if we join a fourth I to
shut up the square thus Q, this makes five hundred, instead of
which they afterwards took the 10, and at length the D. Doubling
this square )jj they formed their thousand, instead of which the
transcribers, either for the sake of ornament, or for greater con-
veniency, began likewise to round this figure, and with a dash of
the pen to frame it thus oo , afterwards thus u, for which reason
we frequently meet with the couchant cypher oo , or a Greek u to
mark a thousand. But afterwards they marked it thus cio, and
after that CD, and at length because this has a great relation to
the Gothic 1' ^ , they took a simple M to denote a thousand, as
likewise C for a hundred, and D for five hundred. And hence it
comes that there are but just seven letters which serve for this sort
of numbers, namely, C. D. I. L. M. V. X. except we have a
mind to add also the Q. which some ,have taken for five hundred,
according to Vossius.
IV. Whether
OF THE ROMAN SESTERCES. 235
IV. Whether there are other methods to mark the Ro-
man Cypher than the preceding.
We must also take notice of the opinion of some, that when
there is a bar over the cyphers, this gives them the value of
a thousand, as \T, X five thousand, ten thousand. But Priscian's
manner of computing, namely, that to express a thousand, the X
must be put between 1 the C's, thus 0X3, and to express ten thou-
sand we should put the M there, thus CM^, is absolutely false
and contrary to antiquity ; and it is owing to this only, that not
knowing the real foundation of this manner of computing, which
I have here explained, they thought to adjust it to our's, which
proceeds by a tenfold progression. And though we sometimes
find the L between the C's, thus CL<3, or the like, this is only a
mistake of the transcribers, who perceiving that on those occasions
the I is generally bigger than the C's, they took it for an L. So
that even then the L ought to be reckoned only as an I, and to
mark no more than one thousand.
CHAPTER III.
Of the Roman Sesterces.
AS I have some notion of publishing a separate essay on the
antient coins, with their respective value reduced to the
standard of the present currency in France, I shall therefore speak
here of sesterces, only in regard to grammar.
The sesterce was a little silver coin in value the fourth part of
a Roman denarius, or two asses and a half, which as was also called
libra, because at first it was /of copper, and weighed a pound.
Hence the word as (quasi ess, says Varro) came from the matter;
and the word libra, from the weight that was given it. And when
they added the ablative pondo, it was to determine the word pound
or weight, which of itself was also by measure.
Hence it is that heretofore they marked the sesterce thus L. L. S.
the two L's making two pounds, and the S signifying semi, two
pounds and a half. Whereas the transcribers have since given
us an H with the S, thus H. S. And this sesterce, pursuant to the
valuation which we have elsewhere observed, was equivalent to a
sou and two deniers, French money, or something more.
In order to count the sesterces, the Romans proceed three ways.
From one to a thousand they reckon them Dimply by the order
of the numbers, without understanding any thing; Sestertii decem,
viginti, centum, mille, &c.
From a thousand to a million they reckon three ways, ei-
ther by the numeral nouns, which they make agree with ses-
tertii, as mille sestertii ; or by putting the neuter sestertia witli
millia expressed or understood, as decem sestertia, or decem millia
sestertia; or in short by putting sestet tium in the genitive
plural formed by syncope for sestertiurum, as octo millia sester-
tium, centena millia sestertium. Which they likewise mark some-
times by putting a bar over the capital letters, thus c. M. S".
which
PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. TIL Book VIII.
which bar sheweth that the number is taken for a thousand ; so
that the C which makes a hundred, stands here for a hundred
thousand, though they frequently put this bar, where it is impos-
sible to judge of the sum but by the sense.
From a million upwards they reckon by adverbs, as decies, vi-
cieSj centies, sestertium, &c. where we must always understand cen-
tena millia, sestertii or sestertium, or else millia only, when centena
has been already expressed, as when Juvenal saitb :
Et ritu decies centena dabuntur
Antiquo : that is, decies centena millia.
But if the adverb alone is expressed, then we are to understand
all these three words centena millia sestertium. Thus bis millies, for
example, is the same as bis millies centena millia sestertium.
We are to observe however that sestertius and numus frequently
signify the same thing : thus mille numum, mille sestertium, or mille
numum sesterti&m, may be indifferently said one for the other.
II. Reason of these expressions, and that mille strictly
speaking is always an Adjective.
Various are the opinions concerning the reason for this con-
struction and these expressions : for not to mention those of Varro,
Nonius, and some antients, who without any probability ima-
gined that these genitives, nummum and sestertium (formed by syn-
cope, instead ofnumorum and sestertiorum ) were accusatives; mille
is generally taken as a noun substantive that governeth the genitive
nummum or sestertium.
Scioppius on the contrary pretends that mille is always an ad-
jective, in the same manner as other numeral nojuns ; and there-
fore that we must suppose another noun on which the govern-
ment of this genitive depends. And therefore he endeavours to
show in his fourteenth letter, that then we must understand res of
negotium, just as when Juvenal says :
Quantum quisque sua nummorum possidet area :
Where quantum being an adjective ought necessarily to suppose
negotium. So that if we were to say, res or negotium mille nummorum
est in area, the construction would be quite simple and intire : but
if we say Mille nummorum est in area, it is figurative, and then we
must understand res ? which governs mille nummorum (which are the
adjective and substantive) in the genitive. Now res mille nummo-
rum, is the same thing as mille nummi, just as Phaedrus saith, -res
cibi for cibus. Which we have shewn elsewhere more at large.
Perhaps we might make use of this principle to solve some dif-
ficult passages, which cpincide with this same construction, as
when Terence saith, Omnium quantum est qui vivunt ornatissime 9
the most vain fellow in the whole world. For it meaneth, Quan-
tum est negotium omnium hominum qui vivunt, for quanti stint homines
qui vivunt. Just as the Greeks say %fr/A Say/xarov yw&Mos for
\<*viA.a.<rls ywy, an admirable woman. And as Paul the learned
Civilian said, Sijuraverit sejilio men decem operarum daturum, liber
csto. A nd in another place, Cum decem operarumjussus est dare, for
decem
OF THE ROMAN SESTERCES. 237
decem operas. And it is certain that he might likewise have said,
Cum dccem talentum jussus est dare, where there cannot he the least
doubt but he must have understood rem, since Terence hath even
expressed it, Si cognatus talentum rem reliquisset decem, &c. Where
it is also obvious, that rem decem talentum and decem talenta, are the
same thing, and therefore that decem is the adjective of talentum^
let it be in whatever case it will. Therefore if I say, Reliquit
mihi decem talentum (omitting rem, as this Civilian has done) there
is no manner of doubt but they are both in the genitive, and but
that this word res, is understood upon the occasion.
For which reason when we say mille himinum, mille nummum, it
is the same construction as decem operarum, decem talentum ; and we
may further affirm that it is a construction of the adjective and
substantive in the genitive governed by res or negotium, which is
understood. At least this is the opinion of Scioppius.
This seems even to be the principle, by which we ought to ac-
count for these expressions framed in the plural, as when St. Je-
rom saith, Si Origenes sex millia scripsisset libros. And Livy, Philip-
pei nummi quatuor millia viginti quatuor. And Cicero, Tritici me-
dimnos duo millia. For if this principle of Scioppius be just, we
must resolve these phrases, and say, Scripsit libros ad sex millia ne-
gotia illorum librorum ; tritici medimnos ad sex millia negotia illorum
medimnorum. And in like manner the rest. Which will not perad-
venture appear so extraordinary, when we once conceive, that the
word res or negniium with the genitive of a noun, always supposeth
this very noun in the nominative, res cibi for cibus. Millia nego-
tia medimnorum, for mille medimni, &c. For that millia in the plural
is an adjective, is beyond all doubt, notwithstanding what Linacer,
L. Valla, and Scaliger, pretend; since we find in Pliny, Millia
-tempestatum prtzsagia : in Tully, Decem millia talenta Gabinio esse
promissa, and the like.
Such is the principle laid down by Scioppius, and in the main
it seems to be undeniable. This however does not hinder but in
practice, which is the master of speech* magister fy dictator loquendi,
as Scaliger expresseth himself, one may say that mille is fre-
quently taken as a substantive, being then rather for ^i^tois than
X/A/O/, according to A. Gellius, as when we say unum mille) duo
millia, &c. one thousand, two thousand, &c. And thus we are
furnished with an easy method of resolving those expressions.
For it is not to be imagined that the custom of language should
be so confined to general rules, but it may sometimes make a sub-
stantive of an adjective, and sometimes an adjective of a substan-
tive; nor that the human mind will take a perplexed and dark
winding in order to apprehend things, when it can find a shorter
and clearer method. Hence there are a great many nouns taken
substantively, though in the main they are adjectives, as vivens,
mortalis, patria, Judcea, molar is, &c. which, strictly, speaking, do-
refer to komo, terra, dens ; and the same may be said of the rest.
And therefore when we say 'mille denarium est in area, mille equi-
tum est in exercitu, I see nothing that can hinder us from looking
upon mille as a substantive ; or at least as a noun taken substan-
tively,
238 PAUTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. III. Book VIIL
lively, which shall govern the genitive denarium, equitum, &c.
And thus it is that Lucilius says,
Tu milli nummum potes uno quarere centum :
With a thousand sesterces you can gain a hundred thousand.
Therefore when we say, Sex millia scripsit libros, tritici medimnos
recipit duo millia, we may take it, either as an apposition, libros
sex millia ; or resolve it by ad libros, ad sex millia : which does not
hinder but in the main we may also resolve it by negotium, accord-
ing to Scioppius's principle : just as, strictly speaking, mortalis
ought to be resolved by homo, Judaea by terra, and the rest in the
like manner.
Be that as it may, we must observe that when a verb or an ad-
jective is joined to this word mille, it is generally made to agree
in the singular, whether we are to understand negotium, as Scioppius
pretends, or whether we take it, not for ^/X<o/, but for ^x/as-, a
thousand, as A. Gellius will have it. Qui L. Antonio mille nummum
ferret expensum, Cic. Quo injundo mille horninumjacile versabatur,
Cic. Ad Romuli^ initium plus mille 4* centum annorum est, Varro. Ibi
occiditur mille hominum, and not occiduntur, says Quadrigar, in A
Gellius, lib. 1. c. 16.*
III. Other remarkable expressions in regard to the same
subject.
When we meet with Sestertium decies numeratum esse, Cic. act. 4.
in Verr. it is a Syllepsis of number, or numeratum which refers to
negotium, understood, instead of numerata, which it should have
been ; as indeed it is in some editions, because we are to suppose
centena millia. In like manner, An accepto centies sestertium fecerit,
Velleius, lib. 2. de Curione, for acceptis centies centenis millibus ses-
tertium, and the like.
Now as the antients said, decies sestertium, or decies centena millia
sestertium ; so they said likewise decies <zris, or decies centena millia
<eris : decies ceris numeratum esse, &c. where the word as is gene-
rally taken for the asses, which at first were of brass, as already
hath been observed.
* And this is so much the more to above noun hath this in particular,
be observed, as in French it is quite that it does not take an s at the latter
the reverse, the construction being al- end, except it be to mark the miles
wa3 r s in the plural with this numeral on the highway; for every where else
noun as well as with the rest, since we write in French un mille, dix mille,
we say for instance, Lcs cent or les mille trente mille, &c. one thousand, ten thou-
soldats venus d'ltalie furent tues en ce sand, thirty thousand, &c. though we
combat, the hundred, or thousand sol- say, deux cens, two hundred, quatre-
diers who came from Italy, were hilled vingls, fourscore, and the like with an s.
in this battle. Again, il y e n a tu mille But when we say, mille de tues, it is a
tues, or rather mille de tues and not lue, partition, as if it were mille occisorum
nor de lue, there were a thousand killed, or ex numero occisorum,
Where it appears likewise that the
OF DAYS AND HOURS. 239
CHAPTER IV.
Of the Division of Time according tb the Antients.
TH E antients had a particular manner of reckoning and
expressing time, which is necessary to be known for the
right understanding of authors.
I. Of Days.
We shall begin with a day, as the part of time most known and
most natural.
The antients divided a day into natural and artificial. The na-
tural day they called that which is measured by the space of time
the sun takes in making his circuit round the earth, which in-
cludes the entire duration of day and night. Artificial day the*r
called that space of time which the sun- stays above the horizon.
The natural day is also called the civil, inasmuch as it is diffe-
rently computed by different nations, some beginning it one way,
and others another.
Thus the Babylonians began their day with the sun-rise.
The Jews and the Athenians began it with sun-set, and in this
they are imitated by the modern Italians, who reckon their first
hour from the setting of the sun.
The Egyptians began it at midnight, as we do.
The Umbrians at noon.
The day which commences at the setting or rising of the sun,
is not altogether equal. For from the winter solstice to the sum-
mer solstice, that which begins from sun-set, has a little more than
24? hours: and quite the contrary from the summer solstice to the
winter solstice. But the natural day which begins at midnight, or
at noon, is always equal.
On the contrary the artificial day is unequal in all parts of the
earth, except under the equinoctial line. And this inequality is
greater or lesser according to different climates. Now from thence
ariseth the difference of hours, of which we are going to speak.
II. Of Hours.
There are two sorts of hours, one called equal, and the other
unequal.
Equal hours are those which are always in the same state, such
as those which we make use of, each of which constitutes the four-
and-twentieth part of the natural day.
Unequal hours are those which are longer in summer, and
shorter in winter for the day ; or the reverse for the night ; being
only the twelfth part of the day or of the night.
Therefore dividing the artificial day into twelve equal parts,
Xve shall find that the sixth hour will be at noon, and the third
will be half the time, which precedes from sun-rise till noon ; as
the ninth hour is half the time which follows from noon till sun-
set; and the rest in the same manner.
This
240 PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. IV. Book VIII.
This is what gave occasion to the naming of the canonical hours
of prime, tierce, sexte, none, and vespers, in honour of the sacred
mysteries that were accomplished in those hours, in which the
Church hath therefore been used to say those prayers.
III. Of the Watches of the Night.
The twelve hours of the night were divided into four watches,
and each watch contained three hours. Hence we frequently find
in Cicero and other writers, Prima vigilia, secunda vigilia, &c.
IV. Of Weeks.
Weeks were composed of seven days, as the Scripture sheweth.
And almost all the oriental nations have made use of this method
to compute their days. Whereas the western world did not adopt
it till the Christian religion was established, the Romans gene-
rally reckoning their days by nines, and the Greeks by decads or
tens.
But the Pagans called their days by the names of the seven
planets; thus the first was dies Soils, the second dies Lunce, the
third dies Mortis, the fourth dies Mercurii, the fifth dies Joms, the
sixth dies Veneris, the seventh dies Saturni : and these names are
still in use, except that instead of dies Saturni, we say dies Sabbati,
that is, the day of rest ; and instead of dies Solis, we call the first
day of the week dies Domini, in memory of the resurrection of the '
Son of God : the other days, from the custom of the Church, are
called Ferite according to their order ; thus Monday, Feria se-
cunda, Tuesday, Feria tertia, and so on. -
V. Of Months.
Months are composed of weeks, as weeks of days. But months
properly speaking are no more than the space which the moon
takes either in her course through the Zodiac, and is what astro-
logers call the periodical month, or in returning from one con-
junction with the sun to the next conjunction following, and is
what they call the synodical month.
Yet this name hath been also given to the time which the sun
takes in its course through the twelfth part of the Zodiac, whereby
two sorts of months are distinguished ; lunar and solar.
The lunar synodical month, the only one considered by the an-
tients, is little more than twenty-nine days and a half.
The solar month is generally computed at thirty days, ten hours
and a half.
But the month is further divided into astronomical and civil.
Astronomical is properly the solar month ; and the civil is that
which has been adapted to the custom and fancy of particular na-
tions, some making use of lunar, and others of solar months.
The Jews, the Greeks, and the Romans, heretofore made use
of lunar months ; but to avoid the different fractions of numbers,
they made them alternately of nine and twenty and thirty days,
calling the former cavi, and the latter pleni.
The Egyptians preferred the solar months, each of which they
made of thirty days only, adding to the end of the year the five days
OF WEEKS AND MONTHS. 241
that arose from the rest of the hours, and neglecting the six hours
or thereabouts that arose from the half hours, which was the reason
that every fourth year their seasons fell back a day.
We may be said likewise to make use of those months, though
we render them unequal, reserving moreover the six hours to
make a day thereof every fourth year, as hereafter shall be ex-
plained.
VI. Theantient mariner of reckoning theDaysoftheMonth.
The Romans made u?e of three terms to denote the several days
of the month ; these were the calends, the nones, and the ides,
which they marked thus, Cat. or KaL Non. Id.
The calends they call the first day of every month, from the verb
xotXiv, voco, because as the antients computed their months by the
revolution of the moon, there was a priest employed to observe the
new moon, and upon his first perceiving it, to give notice thereof
to the person who presided over the sacrifices; then the people
were called to the Capitol, and information was given them how
many days were to be reckoned till the nones, and upon the day
of the nones all those employed in husbandry were obliged to be
in town, that they might receive the direction for the festivals and
other ceremonies to be observed that month. Hence some are of
opinion that the nones were called noncc^ quasi novce, as much as
to say new observations ; though it is more likely the reason of
this denomination, was because from that time to the ides there
were always nine days.
The word ides, according to Varro, was owing to this, that in
the Etruscan language, iduare signified divide) 3, because they di-
vided the month into two almost equal parts.
After the first day, which went by the name of calends, the six
following in the month of March, July, and October, and the
four in the other months, belonged to the nones : and after the
nones there w,ere eight days belonging to the ides; and the re-
mainder after the ides was reckoned by the calends of the next
month. These particulars may be easily retained by these two
Latin verses.
Sex Maius, nonas, October, Julius et Mars ;
Quatuor at reiiqni : dabit idus quilibet octo.
So that in the months above mentioned, each of which had six days
for the nones after the calends, the day of the nones was properly
the seventh ; and of course the ides were the fifteenth. But in
the other months that had only four days betwixt the calends and
the nones, the nones were the fifth, and of course the ides the
thirteenth. And the proper day of the calends, nones, and ides,
was always put in the ablative, calendis, nonis, idibus, Januarii,
Februarii, &c. But the other days were reckoned by the follow-
ing term, expressing the number of days till then, and including
both terms, whether nones, ides, or calends, as quarto nonas, sup.
ante : sexto idus : quinto calend. &c.
Now they never said primo nonas ; but nonis, &c. \\wsecundonor
S) because secundus cometh from sequor, and the business here is
VOL. II. R to
242 PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. IV. Book VIII.
to mark the preceding day. For which reason they made use of
pridie ; just as to signify the following day they made use of pos-
tridie, as pridie nonas, or nonarum. Postridie calendas or calenda-
rum, where we are to understand the preposition ante or post, when
there is an accusative ; whereas the genitive nonarum, or the like,
is governed like the ablative die.
VII. Of the Year.
A year is properly the time which the sun takes in performing
its revolution through the twelve signs of the Zodiack. It is di-
vided into astronomical and civil.
The astronomical or tropic year, is that which includes the
exact time the sun is in returning to the same point of the Zodiack
from which he set out : this the astronomers have not yet been able
exactly to determine, though by the nicest observations it is found
to consist of 365 days, 5 hours, and 49 minutes.
The civil year is that which hath been adapted to the custom and
fancy of different nations.
The year appears to have been of three sorts among the Ro-
mans. That of Romulus, who made the year only of ten months,
beginning it in the month of March, for which reason the last
month was called December.
That of Numa, who corrected this gross error of Romulus,
adding two months to the year, January and February, and com-
posing it of 355 days only, which are twelve lunar months.
That of Julius Caesar, who finding this calculation also erro-
neous, added ten days and something more, whereby he made
the year to consist of 365 days and six hours exactly, re-
serving the six hours to the end of four years in order to form
an entire day, which they inserted before the sixth of the calends
of March, and therefore that year they reckoned twice the sixth
of the calends, saying the second tirrie bis sexto calendas, whence
came the word bissextus, and then the year had 366 days, and was
called bissextile. This manner of computing has continued down
to our times, and because of its author is still called the Julian
year. Now the ten days which Caesar gave the year above what
it had before, were thus distributed: to January, August, and
December, each two : to April, June, September and November,
each one.
But as in these latter times this calculation hath been likewise
found imperfect, and the equinoxes had insensibly retrograded, in-
stead of remaining where Julius Caesar had fixed them, thence it
clearly appeared that the year did not contain exactly 365 days and
six hours, but that it wanted eleven minutes : this in 131 years made
the equinoxes fall back almost a day, because an hour containing
sixty of those minutes, a day must contain 14-40 of them, which
being divided by 11. give ISO.^, so that the equinoxes were
fallen back to the tenth of March. For which reason, in the
year 1582, Pope Gregory XIII, in order to correct this
error, left out ten days of that year, by which means he re-
stored those equinoxes to the 21st of March, and to the 22d or
23d of September ; and that the like inconveniency might be
avoided
OF OLYMPIADS AND LUSTRES.
avoided for the future, he ordained that as 131 multiplied by three
make 393, that is near 400 years, the computation should be regu-
lated by hundreds, in order to make a round number ; and there-
fore that in 4-00 years, the first three terminating three centuries
should be common without reckoning the bissextile. And this is
properly what is called the Gregorian account.
So that in this calculation, there is never a hundredth year a
bissextile, except those that can be measured by four. Thus 1700.
1800. 1900. 2100. 2200. are not bissextile. But the years 1600.
2000. 2400. &c. are bissextile.
VIII. Of the Spaces of Time composed of several Years.
Andjirst of Olympiads and Lustres.
I shall but just touch on these matters, because to treat of them
fully, requires too copious a dissertation, and properly belongs to
another subject.
The Greeks reckoned by Olympiads, each of which contained
the space of four entire years. And those Olympiads took their
name from the Olympic games, which were celebrated in the
neighbourhood of 2 J isa, heretofore called Qlynlpia, in Pelopon-
nesus, whence they had the name of Olympic. Those years were
likewise denominated Iphiti, from Iphitus, who instituted, or at
least revived the solemnity of those games.
The Romans reckoned by lustres, that is, by a space of four
or five years : for the word lustrum, according to Varro, cometh
from luo to pay ; because at the beginning of every fifth year, the
people used to pay the tax imposed upon them by the censors,
whose offices had been established at first for that space of time,
though afterwards they became annual.
2. Of the Indktion and the Golden Number.
The INDICTION is a revolution of 15 years, \vhich according to
Hotoman was established by the emperor Constantine, who pub-
lished an edict ordaining that the subjects of the Roman empire
should no longer reckon by Olympiads but by Indictions. Their
name perhaps was borrowed from some tax that was paid to the
emperors every fifteenth year ; for inrfictio signifieth a tribute or tax.
The GOLDEN NUMBER is a revolution of 19 years, which was
invented by Meto the Athenian, in order to reconcile the lunar
to the solar year; at the expiration of which term of 19 years it
was found that the moons returned to the same days, and that
the moon recommenced her course with the sun, within an hour
and some minutes. And this was called the golden number, either
for its excellence and great utility, or because, according to
some, the inhabitants of Alexandria sent it to the Romans in a
silver calendar, on which those numbers from I to 19 were in gold
letters. This number was likewise called THE GREAT LUNAR
CYCLE, or decennovennalis, and ImaSexaVif of 19 years, or Me-
tonicus, from the name of its author ; and has been of great use
in the ecclesiastic calendar, to shew the epacts and the new moons,
it 2 since
244 i PARTIC. OBSERV. CHAP. IV. Book VIII.
since the council of Nice had ordained that the feast of Easter
should be celebrated the first Sunday after the full moon in March.
3. Of the Solar Cycle, and the Dominical Letters.
The SOLAR CYCLE, or the dominical letters, is a revolution
of 28 years,^at the end of which the same dominical letters revert
again in the same order.
To understand this properly we are to observe, that as the
year is composed of months and weeks, every day of the month is
marked out in the calendar by its cypher, or by one of the follow-
ing seven letters, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the first beginning the
first day of the'year, and the others continuing in a constant round
to the end.
Hence those letters would invariably distinguish each feria or
day of the week, as they are invariable in regard to the days of
the month, if the year had exactly but a certain number of weeks ;
so that as A always signifies the 1st of January, B the 2d, C the 3d,
in like manner A would always stand for Sunday; B, for Monday,
&c. But by reason the year has at least 365 days, which make
52 weeks, and a day over, it happens to end with the same day
of the week as it began ; and therefore the next year begins not
with the same, but with the following day. That is, as the next
year 1651 begins with a Sunday, it will finish also with a Sunday,
consequently the following year 1652 will begin with a Monday.
And thence it c6mes of course that the letter A, which always
answers to the first of January, having stood for Sunday one year*
(which is being the DOMINICAL LETTER), it will stand only for
Monday the next year, in which of course the G will be the do-
minical letter or characteristic of Sunday : and so for the rest.
Hereby it appears that if the year had only 365 days, this circle
of dominical letters would terminate in seven years, by retrogres-
sion, G, F, E, D, C, B, A. But because from four to four years
there is a bissextile, which has one day extraordinary, two things
ensue from thence.
The first, that this bissextile year hath two dominical letters,
whereof one serves from the 1st of January to the 25th of Febru-
ary, and the other from thence to the end of the year. The rea-
son of which is extremely clear, for reckoning the sixth of the ca-
lends twice, it follows, that the letter F, which answers to that
Hay, is also reckoned twice, and therefore it .fills two days of the
week, the consequence of which is, that the letter which had hi-
therto fallen on the Sunday, falls now on the Monday, and the
precedent by retrogression takes its place in order to be the charac-
teristic of Sunday.
The second thing that follows from thence is, that as there are
thus two dominical letters every fourth year, the circle of these
letters does not terminate in seven [years, as it otherwise would ;
but in four times seven years, which make twenty-eight. And this
is exactly what they call the solar cycle, which before the refor-.
mation of the calendar, began with a bissextile year, the dominical
letters of which were G, F.
4. Th*
OF THE JULIAN PERIOD, fyc. 245
4. The Julian Period, the Sabbatic Years, a Jubilee,
an Age.
The JULIAN PERIOD is formed of those three cycles or revo-
lutions multiplied into one another, that is of 15 for the indiction,
of 19 for the golden number, and of 28 for the dominical letters;
which make 7980 years. The use of this period is very com-
mon among chronologers, and of vast advantage for marking the
time with certainty ; because in all that great number of years, it
is impossible to find one that has all the same cycles as another:
for instance 1. the cycle of the sun, 2. the cycle of the moon,
and 3. the cycle of indiction. This period was invented by Jo-
seph. Scaliger, and is called Julian, from its being adapted to the
Julian year, and composed of three cycles which are proper to
that year.
The Jews reckoned their years by weeks, of which the seventh
was called SABBATIC, during which they were not allowed to till
the land, and their slaves were to be set at liberty. They had
likewise their j^ears of JUBILEE or remission, which was every
50th, or according to some every 49th year; so that every jubilee
year was likewise sabbatic, but more solemn than the rest ; and the
years of both terms, that is, of the preceding and following jubi-
lee, were likewise included in the number 50. And then each
estate, and whatever had been alienated, was to revert to its former
master.
The word AGE, which is frequently used, includes the space of
one hundred entire years, according to Festus. Servius observeth,
that sceculum, which we render age, was also taken sometimes for
the space of thirty years, sometimes for a hundred and ten years,
and sometimes for a thousand.
5. Of Epoch as, and the word JE\iJK.
We may likewise take notice of the different EPOCIJAS, whicli
are certain principles, as it were, and fixed points, that chronolo-
gers make use of for the computation of years ; these they like-
wise call JERiE, from a corrupt word taken in the feminine for the
neuter cera > a name they gave to the little nails of brass, with
which they distinguished the accounts and number of years.
The most remarkable of all is that of the birth of Christ, as
settled by Dionysius Exiguus, which commences in the month of
January of the 4714th year of the Julian period, and is that which
we make use of.
That of the Olympiads begins 776 years before the birth of
our Saviour.
That of the foundation of Rome of the year 752 before Christ,
according to the most probable, opinion.
And several others, which may be seen in those who treat more
diffusely of these matters.
( 246 )
BOOK IX.
OF LETTERS,
And the Orthography and Pronunciation of the
Antitnts.
Wherein is shewn the antient manner of pronouncing
the Latin tongue, and occasion is taken to point
out also the right manner of pronouncing the
Greek.
Extracted from the best treatises both of antient and
modern writers on this subject.
THE Reader may consult what hath been said in regard
to Letters in the GENERAL AND RATIONAL
GRAMMAR. * But here we follow a different order in favour
of beginners. For whereas, one would imagine, that we ought
to set out with a treatise of letters, as the least constituent part of
words, and consequently of speech ; and afterwards proceed to
quantity and pronunciation, before we entered upon the analogy
of the parts of -epeech, and the syntax or construction which in-
cludes their arrangement ; we have reserved the two former parts
for the present treatise, after having previously discoursed of the
other two ; not only for this reason, that there can be nothing more
serviceable to those who begin to learn a language, than to intro-
duce them immediately into the practical part, but likewise because
there are several things in those two latter parts which suppose
some progress, and knowledge of the former.
And indeed if the point be only to know how to assemble the
letters, children ought to be well acquainted with this, when they
enter upon the study of languages, and therefore they have no oc-
casion here for any instructions about it ; which made Quintilian
say that this is beneath the office of a grammarian. But if we
would examine this point with any degree of accuracy, and develop
the several difficulties that entangle the subject, we shall find the
truth of the following remark of an antient writer ;
Fronte exile negotium
Et dignum piteris putes,
Aggressis tabor arduus. Terentian. Maurus.
But I hope this labour will not be unprofitable, since it may con*
tribute, as Quintilian saith, not only to sharpen the wits of young
people, but likewise to try the abilities of those who are more advanced.
And I persuade myself that it will help to demonstrate the
* A translation of this work was lately published by F. Wingrave, Successor
to J. Nourse iu the Strand,
nature
OF LETTERS, %c. 247
nature and mutual relation of letters; which is indeed the ground-
work of pronunciation and orthography ; the reason of the quan-
tity of syllables and dialects; the surest way of arguiiig from the
analogy and etymology of words ; and frequently serves as a clue
to find our way through the most corrupt passages of the antients,
while it shews us the manner of restoring them to their genuine
sense and purity.
CHAPTER I.
Of the Number, Order, and Division of Letters.
THEY generally reckon three-and-twenty letters in the Latin
alphabet. But, on the one hand, K being hardly any
longer of use, and the I and U being not only vowels, but also -
consonants, and thus forming two new letters, as consonants, which
the most skilful printers distinguish even from I and U vowel, by
writing J consonant with a tail, and the V consonant with a sharp
point, even in the middle of words ; it would be better to reckon
twenty-four letters in the alphabet, giving the Hebrew names Jod
and Vau to the J and V consonant.
Thus of these twenty-four letters there are six vowels, that is,
which have a distinct sound by themselves, and can by themselves
form a syllable ; and eighteen consonants, that is, which have need
of a vowel to form an articulate sound and compose a syllable.
The six vowels are A, E, I, O, U, and Y.
Of the eighteen consonants, X and Z, as pronounced by the
antients, are properly no more than abbreviations ; X being only
a c and an s ; and Z a d and an s, as we shall demonstrate presently.
For which reason they are called double letters.
Of the sixteen remaining there are four called liquids or gliding
letters, L, R, M, N ; though, properly speaking, none but L
and R deserve that name, the other two, especially M^ being hardly
gliding.
There are ten which may be called mutes, and divided into
three classes, according to the relation they have to one another,
and as they may more easily be changed one for the other, thus,
/B P F V
1 LJ, , A , V .
Mutes, < C, Q, G, J.
( D T
V *^J *
Of the two remaining S makes a class by itself, only that we
may join it to X and Z, as it constitutes the principal part of the
double letters. And those three may be called hissing letters, though
it is a fault in some to give them too hissing a sound.
In regard to H, it is only an aspiration, though it ought not to
be struck out of the order of letters, as hereafter we shall more
particularly observe.
This is, in my opinion, the clearest and most useful division of
letters. As to the distinction of consonants into semi-vowels and
mutes,
248
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
mutes, whosoever will take pains to examine into the matter, must
find that this half sound which he gives to the serai-vowels, L, M,
N, R, S, X, does not proceed from their nature, hut only from
the vowel which he prefixes to them in telling over the alphabet,
el, ew, er> es, ex ; for if it had been customary to prefix the vowel
to all the others which they call mutes, and say eb, ec, ed, &c. they
would have an half sound as well as the precedent. And it is easy
to shew that it was merely through caprice, and without any solid
reason, that the Latins prefixed the vowel to some letters rather
than others.
1. Because the Hebrews and Greeks, of whom the Romans
borrowed their alphabet, have always begun with a consonant in,
naming those letters in general.
2. Because x being composed of c and s, it is evident that
according to reason it ought rather to be pronounced after the
manner of the Greeks csi, than ecs t as it is generally sounded,
which is difficult and disagreeable, not only to young people, but to
grown-up persons.
3. The F has so great an affinity with the Greek p, that, the q>
being a mute, there is no reason to think but F was a mute likewise,
and yet they put a vowel before ef.
Upon the whole there is room to believe that this distinction
ought not to be minded, though we retain the name of mutes in
opposition to that of liquids, and not of semi- vowels. Therefore
letters may be divided into
Vowels \ ? ( . '
(shut,
) A, E, I.
JO, U, Y.
I
Liquids,
CL,R.
IM, N.
}
Consonants,
Mutes,
(B, P, F, V.
\ C, Q, G, J.
(D, T.
1
Hissing,
(S
tx, z.
3
t Aspiration,
IH.
1
/
24
CHAPTER II.
Of Vowels in general, as long or short.
THERE is no one article in which the moderns have varied
more from the pronunciation of the antients than in this.
For the distinction of the vowels, long or short, on which depends
the whole quantity of syllables, save only those which are long by
position, is now no more observed, except on the penultima of
words of more than two syllables.
Thus
OF LETTERS, $c. 249
Thus in pronouncing amabam and circumdabatn, it is plain that
jtta is long in the first word, and da short in the second. But in
pronouncing dabam and stabam, it is impossible to tell whether the
first syllable of either be short or long. In sounding legimus in the
present, and legimus in the preterite, we give no mark that the e
in the first syllable of the present is short, and in the preterite
is long. Reciting mensa in the nominative, and mensa in the abla-
tive, one cannot judge whether the last be short in one, and long in
the other.
Now the antierits, in uttering those vowels, distinguished exactly
the long and short ones, wheresoever they occurred. Hence
St. Austin takes notice, that when we find this passage in writing,
Non est absconditum & te os mevm, it is impossible to tell at first whe-
ther the o of this word os be long or short; but if it be pronounced
short, it comes from os, ossis ; and if rt be pronounced long, it
comes from o's, oris. And this without doubt added greatly to
the beauty of versification. For which reason the same Father says
likewise, that in this verse of Virgil,
Arma virumque cano, Troja qui primus ab oris,
if we were to put primly the last of which is long, instead of pri-
mus, where it is short, the ear would be offended, and cease to find
the same harmony. And yet there is no ear, however, so delicate,
that, without knowing the rules of Latin quantity, and hearing
this verse recited with primus ab oris, or primis ab oris, would be
able to distinguish any thing that gave offence more in one than the
other.
The antients also observed this distinction of long or short
vowels in their writing, in which they frequently doubled the
vowel, to denote a long syllable ; which Quintilian acknowledged
to have been practised till the time of Attius.
Sometimes they inserted an h between these two vowels, in order
to strengthen the pronunciation, as Ahala for Ala or Aala ; and,
after dropping the first A, they likewise made Hala ; for this is
still the same noun, though some learned men have been dubious
about it.
And it is for this same reason that we find in the antients mehe
for mee or me long, mehecum for mecum, and the like ; just as we
say vehemens for veemens ; prehendo for preendo ; and mihi for the
antient mi or mil.
But afterwards, for the sake- of brevity, they were satisfied
with drawing only a small stroke over the vowel, to shew it wa
long, thus A", E, O, U. Though for the vowel I they never
used this mark, as we shall shew hereafter. And hence it is
that we still meet with totiens for toties, quotiens, vicensimus, for"
monsus, aquonsus, and such like ; which is owing entirely, as Lip-
fiius observes, to the ignorance of transcribers, who took this small
stroke for a tittle, that stood for an n or an m t as is still practised,
not knowing that among the antients it served only as a mark of
quantity.
250 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
CHAPTER III.
Of Vowels in particular. And particularly of those
that are called open.
THE three first vowels, A, E, I, are called open, because
in pronouncing them the mouth ought to be opened wider
than in pronouncing the rest.
I. Of A.
Nothing more remains to be said of the A, after what hath
been mentioned in the preceding chapter, except that this vowel
hath a relation and affinity with a great many others, as we shall
see in the sequel. We may further observe that it is the most open
of them all, as the most simple, and the easiest to pronounce ; for
which reason it is with this that children begin their alphabet. So
that if we do but rightly consider the natural order of those vowels,
we shall find, that from this, which is the most open, they diminish
gradually down to the U, which is the most shut, and which of all
the vowels has the greatest need of the motion of the lips to pro-
nounce it.
' II. OfE.
There is scarce a letter that admits of more different sounds in
all languages than this ; particularly in French. We may take notice
of three of those sounds which sometimes occur in a single word,
asfermete, nettete, brevete, &c. The first is an e which I call open,
because it is pronounced with the mouth open. The second is
generally called obscure and mute, because it has a weaker sound
than the rest ; or feminine, because it serves to form the feminine
rhymes in French metre. And the third, opposite to this, is called
e clear, or masculine ; as also e shut : it is frequently marked with a
small accent over it to distinguish it from the rest. \
Besides this the French language hath another, which is pro-
' nounced like an a, and therefore ought rather to be called an a,
since the figure is quite accidental in regard to letters : and perhaps
it would be better to write it with an a, were it not for point-
ing out the derivation of words in the original languages. As
Empereur for Ampereur, because it comes from Iwperator ; en for an,
because it comes from in ; pendre for pandre, because it comes from
pendere ; grandement,fortement, difficilement, &c. merit for want, be-
cause they come from the Italian.
But as for the other open <?, which some make use of, as in bete,
fete, tfae, or with an S, beste, feste, teste, we ought to look upon
it as the same with the first e in brevete, fermete, &c. from which
it hardly differs, except in some length of quantity or accent.
This seems to be well illustrated by the comparison of these
two words, fer, andferre, where this e, which becomes longer in
the first syllable of the second word, is nevertheless the same as
thai
OF LETTERS, #c. 251
that of the first word. And therefore we may reduce all the French
E's to three, or at most to four, if we likewise include that which
is sounded as an A ; and these four different sounds may be observed
in a single word, as Deterrement.
But the latter, which is called the long and open e, and appears
particularly in these words, bete, fete, tete, &c. properly corre-
sponds with the Greek eta, whose sound it perfectly represents,
since the aforesaid eta was introduced on purpose to distinguish the
long E, saying #?r*, as if it were beeta. Which made Eustathius
say that /3>j &*, bee bee, expresseth perfectly well the bleating of the ])
sheep ; wherein he is supported by the authority of the antient poet ''
Cratinus. So that it is really amazing, there should be people
who still pronounce it like an j, contrary to the general analogy of
the language, since Simonides, who invented the two long vowels
D and a/, did it with no other intent than to make them correspond
to the two short ones and o ; contrary to the unanimous opinion -
'of all the antients, and the testimony of the ablest writers of the
latter ages ; and contrary, in short, to the standing practice of the
best scholars both in France and other nations ; which might be fur-
ther evinced by a great number of authorities and arguments,
drawn from the comparison of all languages, if it had not been
already sufficiently demonstrated by those who before us have
handled the subject.
On the contrary, the e shut expresseth the Greek !4"Aox, like
the last mfermete. And the other, which is between both, gives
a particular grace to the French language, the like of which is not
to be found in any other ; for it forms the feminine rhymes in verse,
as when they sayferme, terme, &c.
But it is very remarkable that this E, which constitutes almost
one half of the French rhymes, hardly ever occurs twice successively
in the same word, except in a few compounds, as devenir, revemrj
remener, entretenir, contrepeser, &c. and even here it is not at the
end of the words. For which reason in verbs that have an E fe-
minine in the penultima of the infinitive, as peser> mener t it is
changed into an open e in those tenses which finish with this E
feminine: so that they say, cela se pese, il me mene, as if it were
paise, maine, &c. And in the first persons which end with this
same E feminine, it is changed into an E masculine in interroga-
tions, because of the pronoun je which follows and is joined to it,
and which hath also an e feminine. Thus we say, faiine, je joue,
je prie. But in interrogating we say, joue-je ? aime-je ? prie-je ?
And if, to facilitate the pronunciation on those and other occa-
sions, people would only accustom themselves to put some little mark
on the e feminine, as it is customary to put under the 9 in parti-
cular words, it would be distinguished from the e masculine, which
has its mark over it, and the plain letter e might remain for what
we call the e mute and obscure. And thus we might effectuate, al-
most without any trouble, such a distinction in orthography and pro-
nunciation, as may be deemed perhaps of all others the most ue-
cessary in the French language, since v/e see daily that not only fo-
reigners, but even those who are versed in the language, are mis-
taken and puzzled in the distinction of those two <?'s.
NEW METHOD. BoolflX.
The Latins had also their different sounds of this letter. They
had their E long and open, which answered to the Greek Eta, and
for that reason was frequently doubled, as we see in medals and
antient inscriptions, feelix, &eedes > &c.
The second was like the E short and shut of the French, and
answered Co the Greek l4/*Ad. And these two differences of
the E are plainly marked in the writings of the antients. E voca-
lis, says Capella, duarum Grcecarum vim possidet. Nam cum corri-
pitur E t Grcecum est, ut ab hoste ; Cum producitur, ETA est, ut ab
hac die.
But beside this, there was a middle sound between the E and
the I. Whence Varro observeth, that they used to say veam for
viam : and Festus, that they said me for mi or miki: and Quin*
tilian, that they put an E for an I in Menerva, Leder, Magester, and
that Livy wrote sebe and quase : and Donatus, that by reason of
the affinity of these two letters, the antients made no scruple to
say heri and here, mane and mani, vespere and vesperi, &c. Hence
we still find in antient inscriptions, navebus, exemet, ornavet, cepet,
Deana, mereto, soledas, and the like. And, as we have elsewhere
observed, from thence also ariseth the change of those two vowels
in so many nouns, either in the nominative, as impubes and impubis,
puhx and pulex, cinis and ciner, &c. or in the accusative, as pelvem
or pelvim ; or in the ablative, as nave or navi, and the like nouns
of the third declension ; and in the second Dii for Dei. Concern-
ing which see what has been said in the first volume, when treating
of the Declensions.
The fourth E of the French, which is put for A, was also found
n among the Latins ; whence Quintilian witnesseth that Cato wrote
[( indifferently dicam or dicem,Jaciam QY faciein. And hence, with-
out doubt,* it comes that the A of the present tense is so frequently
changed into E, either in the preterite, as fncio, fed ; ago, egi ;
jacio,jeci t &c. or in compounds, as arceo, coerceo ; damno, condem-
THO ; sparge, aspergo, &c. To this also it is owing that they said
balarefor belare (to bleat) which is still to be found in Varro, 1. de
R. R. cap. 2. Incestus for incastus ; talentum for raXavlov -, damnum
for demnum, from diminuo, according to Varro. From this same
cause it proceeds that we meet ,with so many words written with E
or A in antient authors and in the old glossaries, as cequiperare for
<zquiparare. Condamnare forcondemnare, V. Gloss. Dejetigari for
de/atigari, Varr. Effligi for affligi, Charis. Expars for expers, xfjt-oipo^
V. Gloss. Experts for expartce or effcetce, Varr. Imbarbis for imber-
bis, V. Gloss. InarS) arf^vos, for iners, id, Repcrare for reparare t
whence comes recuperare, and the like.
But it is further observable that the E had likewise some affinity
with the O, as we shall shew hereafter ; and even with the U.
Whence cometh diu for die, lucu for luce, altux for allex, the great
toe, dejero for dejuro, Neptunus for Nuptunus, d nubendo terrain, id
st operiendo, according to Cicero, Brundusium for /3^vT>5o-<ov, ulcus
for E\KO$. And hence it comes that the verbs in EO make UI,
moneo t monui ; doceo, docui, &c.
III. Of
OF LETTERS, <$c. 253
III. Of I.
The I, as we have already observed, was the only vowel over
which they did not draw a stroke to mark its being long ; which is
further proved by the authority of Scaurus. But in order to shew
the quantity thereof, they lengthened it in the nature of a capital
letter among the rest plso, vlvus, ^D!LIS, and the like. Where-
fore amdng all the letters it was called long by Synecdoche.
Hence it is that in the Aulularia of Plautus, when Staphilus
wants to hang himself, he says that he wanted to make a long letter
of himself.
ex me iwamfaciam litteram
. Longam, meum quando laqueo collunt obstrinxero.
This is the explication that Lipsius gives of it, which seems far
more rational than that of Lambinus, who understands it of all
sorts of capital letters ; not considering that the Romans had no
small ones, and that among the capitals, this alone surpassed the
rest.
But if we should be asked whether the I was not also doubled
like the other vowels, to signify the long quantity, Lipsius an-
swereth, that absolutely speaking, it was not. And this is the
opinion of the most learned critics, though we meet with some
examples to the contrary, perhaps by corruption, as DIVI! AU-
GUST!, is an inscription in the reign of Augustus.
As therefore the I by its length alone was equivalent to it in
quantity, so it has happened frequently to be put for two real ii t
that is, which ought to be expressed in discourse, as DE MANIB!S,
for manibiis. D!S MANIBUS, for Diis Manibus. And to this are
owing those contractions which are looked upon as established in
the writings of poets, Di for Dei, oti for otii, urbem Patavi, for
Patavii, Virg. and the like.
But the antients marked likewise the quantity of this letter by
the diphthong ei, as Victorious observeth ; so that it was the same
thing to put Divl, or DIVEI, and the like, the long I and ei pav-
ing the same, or at least a very similar sound. This is so far true,
that Priscian thought it was 'the only way to mark the long I;
though what has been above mentioned, sufficiently sheweth there
was another.
And this pronunciation of ei was become so common among
them, that they even gave it to the short words. This shews that
it was not perhaps so much a mark of quantity, as of a fuller and
more agreeable sound, which sufficiently appears from some verses
out of Lucilius, which I shall presently produce, and which made
this its medium betwixt the two vowels, of which we have taken
notice above. Hence it is, that in old copies we still find omneis,
not only for omnes in the plural, but moreover for omnis in the
singular, and others in the same manner.
And indeed there is no manner of writing, says Victorinus,
about which there have been such disputes among the antients, as
this. Lucilius and Varro endeavoured to distinguish it, by laying
down as a rule to put i only in. the singular, and ei in the plural:
so
S54 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
so as to say hujus pueri, amid, &c. and in the plural, hi puerei, ami-
cei, &c. And likewise in the dative illi with i only, but in the
nominative plural illei with ei. This is proved from the following
verses out of Lucilius :
Jam puerei venei'e, E posiremumjacito atque I.
Ut plures puerei jiant, &c.
Hoc \\ViJactum uni, tenue hoc jades I.
Hoc illei fecere, addes, E, UT PINGUIUS FIAT.
With the rest which may be seen in Joseph Scaliger, who extracted
them partly from Quintilian, and partly from Victorinus, where
it is observable, as I have mentioned, that this writing with ei, for-
merly made a fuller sound ; since he says, ut pinguiusjiat.
Quintilian nevertheless finds fault with this manner of writing,
'as well because he says it is superfluous, as also because it is only apt
to confound those who begin to learn to read. Whence we may
conclude that the pronunciation had changed, and that there was
no longer any difference betwixt ei and i. This made Lipsius say,
that it is idle now to dispute, whether we ought to write omneis or
omnis, puereis or pueris ; since according to Quintilian there was
jiot the least difference between those two sounds in the Latin lan-
guage. Concerning which see what we shall further say in the
5th chap. n. 3. treating of this diphthong.
CHAPTER IV.
Of the three last Vowels, which are called shut.
TH E three last vowels are O, U, Y. They are called shut,
because in pronouncing them the mouth is not opened so
wide as in pronouncing the others.
i. o/o.
The O by its two sounds, long and short, perfectly represented
the Greek omega and omicron, the pronunciation of which was very
different, says Caninius after Terentianus. For the o was pro-
nounced in the hollow of the mouth with a full and thick sound,
as including two oo ; and the omicron was pronounced on the edge
of the lips with a clearer and more slender sound.
The French have these two ways of pronouncing, expressing the
long O by the addition of an S, coste, hoste, which are different
from cotte, hotte, motte ; or by the diphthong au, haute, faute, &c.
The affinity between this vowel o and the French diphthong au,
is not without example among the Greeks, who say avA| or
u\a^ sulcus ; rgavfjux. or lya/pa, according to the Dorics, whence
it is that the Latins have also caudex or codex, caurus, or corus, &c.
And hence it is perhaps that as this diphthong au partook greatly
of the A, so the O had also some affinity with A. For the Mo-
lians said rporos for rfaror, exercitus ; ovu for uvu, supra. Which the
Latins have likewise imitated, borrowing domo from ^a^ta;, and
saying Pabius for Fovius, according to Festus; Farreus forforreus,
&c. And in French the A and O are oftentimes joined in the same
word, laon f jaon, paon f which are pronounced with a long A, Ian,
f
OF LETTERS, S$c.
f&n, pan $ though Ramus takes notice that in his time some
marked the long O with ihese two letters AO, which they did
perhaps in imitation of the Greeks, who change <xo or , as well as
, into u long in their contractions.
The O hath likewise an affinity with the E ; hence it is that of
\iyu, dico, the Greeks have made xAoya, dixi, and the like ;
that the jEolians said r^o^ea for rfs/xw, tremo, that the Latins of
a-^ri^M, libo t made spondeo ; ofpendeo, portdus ; of tego, toga ; and
they say adversum or advorsum ; vertex or vortex ; accipiter for
accipitor, or acceptor, itgat%, according to Festus, a bird of prey ;
hemo for homo ; ambe for ambes, for ambo and ambos, in Ennius:
exporrectus for experrectus, &c. Hence also it is that there are so
many -adverbs in E and in O, vere and vero, tute and tuto, nimie
and nimio, cotidie and cotidio, rare and raro, in Charisius, and such
like. And it is by this very analogy, that the nouns in US make,
some the genitive in ERIS, as vulnus, vulneris, and others ORIS,
as pecus, pecoris ; stercus, sterceris, and stercoris, &c. And that the
verbs have a reduplication in E and O, as momordi for memordi,
spopondi for spepondi, &c.
But the O had still a much greater affinity with the U. Hence
it is that the antients, says Longus, were apt to confound those
two letters ; and though according to him, they wrote consol with
an O, yet they pronounced consul with an U. And Cassiodorus
informs us that they wrote prcestu for prtesto ; poblicum for publj.-
cum ; colpam for culpam, &c. Pliny in Priscian tells us the same
thing, and thence it is that we say hue, illuc, for hoc, illoc, which
Virgil himself hath made use of.
Hoc time ignipotens calo descendit ab alto, ^En. 8.
Which is likewise proved by Servius on this passage. And Quin-
tifian observeth that they said, Hecoba, notrix, with an o for an u ;
that of Odysseus^ the ^Eolians made Udysseus, whence the Latins
had borrowed Ulysseus. And in short his tutors had wrote Servom
with an o, whereas in his time they wrote it with two uu, though
neither of those writings did perfectly express the sound which
struck the ear.
II. OfV.
from what has been said it plainly appeareth that the U had a
very full sound, which bordered very much on the O. And Te-
rentianus expressly declared that the U filled the sound of the.
diphthong or. In vain does Lipsius, as well as Vossius, pre-
tend that this pronunciation was only for the U long, and that
the short one was pronounced like an \J/Aov, that is like a French
. For Priscian teacheth the contrary, and doubtless his autho-
rity is preferable to their's on this occasion. And in regard to the
argument which they draw from a passage of Varro's, which says
that they pronounced luit in the present, differently from luit in
the preterite ; we shall shew hereafter, in the treatise of accents, that
this difference was only in the quantity, and not in the sound.
And if any body should still doubt of this truth, we might fur-
ther produce the authority of antient marbles and inscriptions,
which being written according to the simple pronunciation, have
frequently ou for u, not only in long words, as loumen, nountios,
S56 N E W M E T H O D. Book IX.
but likewise in the short, as fouom, fouo, &c. And fouit for fait
is in Gellius, lib. 1. c. 12. according as we find it in the edition
of H. Stephen, esteemed by all the learned. And it is without
foundation that Vossius attempts to correct it.
Besides, we find that Ausonius, speaking of the sound of this
Towel, does not make this distinction, but says absolutely,
Cecropiis ignota notis,ferale sonans U.
Where mentioning that there is no such sound among the Greeks,
he plainly gives to understand that it could not have the sound of
v4"*o* ; as on the other hand he has sufficiently pointed out the
natural sound of this letter by the word Jerale, whereby he meant
the note of the cuckoo, or of the night owl, to which a parasite
in Plautus alludeth, where he says, "
n ,, , . Tu, TU, illic inquam, vin 9 adferri noctuam,
Qua TU, TU usque dicat iihi ? nam nos jam nos usque defessi SUMUS*
Which perfectly represents the sound of the U like ou, according
to the note of that wild and well known bird.
And if any body should object that Cicero in- his book de Ora-
tore takes notice that heretofore they wrote Phruges and Purrhus
without Greek letters, and therefore that the u on those occasions
had the sound of i>4"^ov I answer that on the contrary, writing
Purrhus, they pronounced according to the value of the letters
Pourrhous; as we see an infinite number of words, which passing from
one language to another, assume the sound as well as figure of the
language they pass to. And this answer is agreeable to Quintiiian,
when he says, Fortasse etiam quemadmodum scribebant, ita Sf loque-
bantur. Though we may likewise say that perhaps sometimes they
Erroneously pronounced the u like an upsilon, and put it in the stead
of v-^i^nv. But then this was no longer a Latin w, but a real
Greek Y in power, though not in figure, which is merely acci-
dental to all sorts of letters.
And thus we are to understand the verses of Terentianus, which
Vossius endeavoureth to wrest to another meaning, where he says
of the three common vowels among the Greeks, namely, a, /, ;
Tertiam Romana lingua quam vacant Y non habet t
Hujus in locum , videtur U Lntina subdita :
QUCB vicem nobis rependit interim vacantis Y,
QuandfTcommunem reddit Latino Sf Grcsco sonum.
For since he formally declares that this third vowel Y does not
belong to the Latin tongue, he plainly sheweth that the Latin
U was not sounded like the Greek Y, because otherwise he would
have had no reason to say that the Romans were without this letter.
And adding that the U was sometimes put instead of this Greek
Y, when, says he, it made a sound that was common both to Greeks
and Latins, he lets us know that this U was put there improperly
and instead of the Greek Y, which was owing merely to the am-
bition of the Romans, who made use of Latincharacters, that they
might seem to borrow nothing of the Greeks. Thus it is that Cas-
siodorus observes they wrote Suria for Syria , and Donatus that
they put sura for syra.
Longus mentions the same thing, adding nevertheless that it is
better to use the Y in those Greek words. Which shews that they
/
r^isi/-^ +*
//
.
Or LETTERS, #c. 257
had still retained the sound thereof, even when they made use of
the U. For if the U, as a Latin letter, might have been sounded
as the Greek Y, that is, like the French U, which is much
softer than that of the Latin OU, Quintilian would not have said
that in the word Zephyris, for instance, there were two letters, (the
Z and the Y, which he calls jucundissimas litteras) which the
Romans had not, but were obliged to borrow of the Greeks whenever
they wanted to make use of Greek words, because if they had attempted
to write them with Latin letters, this would have produced a rough
and barbarous sound, lib. 12. c. 10.
If after all this there can be any doubt that the real pronun-
ciation of the Latin U was that of the French diphthong ou, we
need only to observe the manner in which it is pronounced by the
modern Italians. And should it be imagined that this U might
sometimes have the sound of the Greek Y in Latin ; then the
Greeks in all probability must have been very much in the wrong,
when in making use of Latin words they had recourse to to ex-
press the force of the Latin U, when they needed only to have
Wrote their \J,/Aov.
To this genuine sound of the Latin U it is owing, as already
hath been mentioned, that it was so frequently changed into O,
as volt for vult, &c. because the U being pronounced like the
French ou, it greatly partook of the nature of O. And for this
same reason these two letters are so often changed for one another
in analogy. For from ro'jur cometh roboris, from dominum in the
singular cometh dominos in the plural, and the like.
But it is to be observed, that we still retain something of this
antient pronunciation of the U in those words where it is followed
by an M or an N. Dominum, dcderunt, &c. This is owing to the
natural property of those two consonants, which produce a very
particular sound, and are always pronounced broader and fuller,
let them be joined with whatever vowel they will: it being the
same thing, according to Quintilian, to say servom, as servum, or
servoum. Though we have lost this pronunciation in some words
when the n is followed by a c, as nunc, tune, hunc, cunctis, and de-
Junctis in the Church service.
But if it should be asked whether the U had entirely the Same
sound as the diphthong , we may answer it had not, but some-
thing very like it ; because the diphthongs, as the word implies,
were productive t>f a double sound composed of two vowels, as
we see in the French diphthongs, czW, beau, mien, &c. though of
one syllable. This was not the case of the U, which had but one
though a full sound. And this is the opinion of Ramus, for other-
wise, he says, it would have passed for a diphthong. Hence we see
that Joseph Scaliger had no right to find fault with Ausonius for
saying in this verse,
Cecropiis ignota notisjerale sonans U,
that the sound of this U, which is ou, was unknown to the Greeks,
because the sound of the diphthong ou was not altogether the
same.
VOL. II. S But
258 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
But besides this natural pronunciation of the U, there was an-
other, according to Quintilian, that had a middle sound, as it were,
between I and U, which was the reason of its being variously
written : and thence it is that we still meet with optimus or optumus,
maximus or maxumus y monimentum or monumentum, &c. And the
antient inscriptions abound with these variations, stupendium for
stipendittm y aurufex for aurifex ; and in like manner we say, capulum
ensis, the hilt, from capio ; clipeus for clupeus ; exul for exit, from
exilium ; Jacul for facile ; lubet for libet ; manibice for manuUce ;
olilare for volutare, Varr. and the like.
III. OfY.
There is hardly any thing further to be said in regard to this
sixth vowel, after what has been observed upon this head, when
speaking of the U ; we are only to take notice that it was always
used in Greek nouns, and pronounced very near in the same
manner as the French U, which has a middle sound between the
Latin i and u.
The French particularly make use of this letter Y in all words
ending in y, as epy, fourny, garny, &c. though they have lost its
sound, for they always pronounce it as an t. And this pronun-
ciation they have even introduced into the Latin tongue, where
there is in some measure a necessity for tolerating it because of
its being established by custom ; but it is by no means to be ad-
mitted into the Greek language, where the v4>/Xov ought to be
pronounced like a French U : which is demonstrated by all the
antient and modern grammarians, and may be further corrobo-
rated by an invincible argument, borrowed from those words
which are formed by the imitation of sound, to signify the cries
ft of animals. For it is beyond doubt that when we say foaxr/f /
j J ululare, p,pxac, mugire, rv&/v, grunnire, the original intent was
" not to convey the sound of an I, but of an U, as the vowel that
borders nearest on the cry of those animals.
Therefore it may be observed here in general, that use being
the mistress of living languages, and the Latin being now adopted
by the Church, and in every body's mouth, it would be imprudent
to change the pronunciation of it in things universally received.
But in regard to the Greek tongue, as it is confined to a small
number of literati, it seems to be wronging their abilities to say,
either that they are ignorant of the genuine pronunciation of the
antients, of which so many learned men have wrote express trea-
tises, or that knowing it, they make a difficulty to conform thereto ;
since it is now received by the most learned of every nation : and
were it not for this (as hath been observed by Sir John Cheke,
the king's professor in England, who wrote a learned dissertation
on this subject above a hundred years ago), we should be deprived
of the whole beauty of the analogy of this language, whether in
regard to the numerousness of periods, and the cadence of verse,
or to the surprising relation which the words have to each other
in the declensions, conjugations, augments, dialects, and inter-
changing
OF LETTERS, &c. 259
Changing of letters : which shews a most beautiful proportion in
the whole, and greatly facilitates the principles to those who have
a mind to learn the Greek tongue.
CHAPTER V.
Of Diphthongs.
WE join the diphthongs to the vowels as the whole to its
parts. Lipsius calls them BIVOCALES, double vowels,
because they are compounded of two vowels : and it may be ob-
served that there are eight in Latin, M, cetas, AI, Maia, AU,
audio, !EI, eta, EU, eurus, OE, pcena, OI, Tro'ia, UI, harpuia.
For in this word there is a Greek diphthong, says Servius, though
some write it also with a Y only, harpya.
These diphthongs used to be pronounced with a double sound,
as their name implieth: but the two vowels were not distinguished
alike, one being sometimes weaker, and the other stronger.
I. Of the Diphthongs IE and AI.
Therefore in ce and ai, the first vowel had its full and complete
sound, because the A of itself is stronger than the other vowels,
and never loseth the advantage it has over them in pronouncing,
as Plutarch witnesseth in his treatise of banquets : on the contrary
the latter had a much weaker sound, as may be experienced in
Aiax. Hence it was that oftentimes they did not distinguish whe-
ther it was an E or an I, and for this reason they wrote hereto-
fore with an AI, what afterwards they came to write with an JE,
musai for muses ; Kaisar for Kcesar, whence the Germans and Fle-
mings have still preserved the word Keyser, to signify Ccesar ; Juliai
for Julia, and the like ; as appears by the authority of Quintilian,
Longus, Scaurus, and other grammarians. Hence it is that in
some words the A hath remained by itself, as AQUA ab cequando,
says St. Isidorus, so that in the Greek the diphthong ai ought al-
ways to be more open than the , and we should lean more upon
the A than upon the I. Though we must confess that after the
corruption of the language, the M was also pronounced like a
simple E, for which reason, instead of M they frequently put only
the E, as eger for tzger, etas for cetas, es alienum for CBS. And on
the contrary the M has been sometimes put for a simple E, as
tzvocatus for ewcatus, and the like, with which the old glossaries
abound. And hence it is that Beda in his Orthography ranks
aquor among the words that are written with a simple E. Which
lie does likewise in regard to comcedia. Whereby it appears that
the corruption which hath been introduced into the pronunciation
of the diphthongs, was contested even in his time, that is, so early
as the seventh century.
II. Of the Diphthongs AU and EU.
The pronunciation still observed in AU and EU, borders
nearer upon that of the antients. For the AU had a great affinity
s 2 with
260 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
with the O, for which reason they wrote caurus and corns ; cauda
and coda, lautus and lotus, plaustt um and plostrum, with a great many
others which may be seen in Festus and in Priscian, lib. 1. This
the Latins had borrowed from the Dorians, who said oX*| for
avAaf , sulcus ; rgZ>(*ot for r^xv^at, vulnus ; where we likewise per-
ceive that the pronunciation of the u was much fuller than that of
the omicron, since it bordered upon the aa, only that they sounded
the A somewhat stronger in order to form a diphthong, whence
it is that we find Aorelius for Aurelius, in Veter. Epigram.
The EU was pronounced almost in the same manner as we now
pronounce Eudoxia, Encharutia, Euripus, not joining the two letters
all together, but dividing them as little and as nicely as possible,
and leaning more upon the U than the E. These two diphthongs
had a relation to each other; for from Eurus comes aura, and
they have this in particular, that both in Greek, Latin, and
French, they have nearly retained the same pronunciation. So
that it is quite without reason or foundation that some attempt to
pronounce a.v in Greek like af, and iv like ef, as if 4//Ao was an
j 9 and not an u ; or a diphthong could be formed of a vowel and
a consonant, instead of two vowels; or. in short the u ought to
have any other effect on both those occasions than the diphthong
s, which is pronounced ou and not of, as one would think it ought
to be pronounced if those other two sounds were to be admitted.
From this error nevertheless it comes that the French pronounce
un af-tomate, un e-vangile, and not au-tomate, nor eu-angile t as
they say eu-nuque, eu-charistie. And though it be ill founded, yet
it seems to have been introduced a long time ago, since Beda in
his poetry takes notice that they said a-vrum for au-rum, e-vange-
Immforeu-angelwm. But as to the verses which are quoted out
of Tertullian,
Tradit evangelium Paulus sine crimine mundum,
itf is not his, no more than the others which are attributed to him,
according to what Mons. Rigault hath observed in his notes on
this author. And it is contrary to the practice of the antients, who
always make eu long, as in Eii-ander, Eu-ans, and such like.
Namque ab Enandro castris ingressus Hetruscis, Virg.
Nee non Euantem Phrigium, Paridisque Mimanta, Id.
Which they would never have done, says Vossius, had the U been
separated from the epsilon, which is naturally short.
But it is observable that Terentius declares that these two
diphthongs an and eu were pronounced somewhat shorter titan the
others.
AU& EU quas sic Jiabemus cum Gratis communiter,
Corripi plerumque possunttewporum salvo rriodo. And lower down;
"EyTToA/v, wevjt^v fy yyy, ant poefam 'E/9nc^y,
Syllabas primas necesse est ote raptim promere ;
Tempus at duplum manebit, nihil obest correptio.
Ill Of the Diphthong El.
In the diphthong El, the E was very weak, so that scarce any
other sound was heard but that of the I ; hence it is that this E
was
OF LETTERS, $c. 261
was often lost, and there remained only a long I, as in eo, is, it, for
eis, eit, &c. because, as we have already observed, the long I had
almost the same sound as this diphthong, as Cicero sufficiently
testifieth, when he makes an allusion and comparison betwixt bini
and m/, and as we likewise see in the old monumental inscrip-
tions, where they wrote indifferently dico or deico, heic or hie, om-
neis or omnis, &c. Which was owing to a delicacy of the language
particularly used by well-bred people ; whereas the vulgar or
illiterate persons rather sounded the E entire. For which reason
Varro observes that the peasants said vellum for villain, which
came from vehil/am or veillam. And in Cicero, Crassus reproves
Sulpicius, because by leaning too much on the E in this diph-
thong, he did not pronounce like an orator, but like a ploughman. And
hence also it is that heretofore some pronounced leber, and others
liber, because it came from leiber ; and in like manner Alexandrea
or Alexandria, as coming from Alexandria : and the like.
IV. Of the Diphthongs OE and OL
Terence and Victorinus inform us that these two Latin diph-
thongs had a very great affinity with the Greek diphthong OI.
And Ramus in the third book of his schools, expresseth the sound
of the latter by these French words moi, toi, soi. This has occa-
sioned the changes we sometimes observe in the antient copies, as
Adelphoe for Adelphoi, in Terence ; and in another place Oinonem
for Oenonem, with the like: and shews us the reason why in ren-
dering words from Greek into Latin, they are always changed;
one for the other, -rro/t^, pcena, &c. where we see that as of Al
they made 1E 9 so of OI they made OE, only by changing I
into E.
Now as among the Latins the O bore a great relation to the U,
it happeneth that OE hath been oftentimes changed into U, as
when of pcena they made pu nire, that isnounire, after their manner
of pronouncing the U. And therefore we find in antient inscrip-
tions, oisum or cesum for usum. Coiravit or cceravit for curavit.
They said likewise moerus for murus aggeribus moerorum, JEn. 8.
according to Servius, whence also cometh pomcerium quasi post
moerum sive murum ; we find also moenus for moerus (changing n
into r) and in the plural mcenia for munia, from munio. In like
manner mcencra for munera, &c. Thus it is that the Flemings
write goet, and pronounce it goot, to signify goad : and thus we
still say Puni for Pceni ; bellum Punicum for Pcenicum ; the Car-
thaginians having been called Pceni, quasi Phceni, says Servius,
because they came from Phoenicia, where we may likewise take
notice of the change of PH into P. For the Jews and other eastern
nations, according to St. Jerom, had no P; whence it comes that
he always translates Philistiim to signify the people of Palestine,
though now of one and the same letter, which is the 3, they make
either a P or a PH, putting it with or without a daguesh.
But we are to take notice that this change of the diphthong OI
into U, was received only in those words where the O was sounded
stronger than the I : whereas in most other places, it partook a
great
62 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
great deal more of the sound of the I, as Lipsius sheweth.
Which makes us doubt whether Ramus hath sufficiently explained
the sound of this diphthong, when he says it was the same as in
the French words moi, toi, soi ; and whether it would not be better
represented by these verses out of Virgil, JEn. 1U
Proinde tonaeloquio solitumtibi; megue timoris Argue.
Where proinde being only a dissyllable, perfectly expressed the
sound of this diphthong, says Vossius, Hence, as in these words
where the O was strongest, it has prevailed, and been afterwards
changed into U ; in like manner where I was strongest, it has
often remained by itself. For from Xo/ffw or te&u comes libare ;
from loiber or leiber cometl) liber ; and thereby we see that it is
no wonder that the Athenians did not all understand in the same
manner this oracle pronounced at Delphi :
"Hf / Augictzos jrohspos j Xo</x.o a/x otvru.
and that some took Tu^of for Xo^w, a famine instead of the plague,
Not that these two words had entirely the same sound, says Vossius,
but because in reality there was very little difference.
CHAPTER VI.
Of the nature of I and V consonants. Whether there
are any Triphthongs, or other Diphthongs among the
Latins, than those above explained.
IN order to explain entirely what relates to the Latin diphthongs,
it is necessary for us here to take notice of the I and V con-
sonants.
I. Whether the I and V were Consonants among the
antients.
Scioppius pretends that the I and V were never any thing else
but vowels among the Latins, and his principal argument is that
in verse we often see them unite into a diphthong, as Jitisset, of
two syllables in Lucilius ; pituita, of three in Horace ; suadet,
suasit, suetus, and others, of two in Virgil :
Suadet enim vesana fames &c.
where the u in sua is pronounced in the same manner as in qua.
So that according to him the Latins pronounced vinum, vale, just
as the Germans pronounce tain, wal, &c.
Hence he believes that in navita, the first syllable was pro-
nounced in the same manner as in nauta, because it is only the
same word; and the first mjavitor (which we find in Plautus) in
the same manner as injautor, the I being lost in those words,
merely because it was scarce distinguished in the pronunciation.
This may be supported by the authority of Tully, when he
shews that there was no great difference between cauneas and cave
ne eas. For the E of cave, being hardly distinguished, no more
than injace, dice, and the like imperatives, where it is now entirely
disused ; they seem to have said cau-neas, for cave ne eas.
II. Whether
OF LETTERS, %c. 263
II. Whether there are any Triphthongs.
Now according to this opinion of Scioppius, we must also
admit not only of more diphthongs than are commonly allowed,
but of course of triphthongs, as U^E in aqucc, VEA in alvearia,
laquearia, &c.
Seu lento Juerint alvearia vimine texta t Virg.
And we find even by Cornutus, that they were admitted by some
of the antients ; for otherwise they would not have given them-
selves the trouble to refute this opinion. Besides that Charisius
expressly declares in the beginning of his first book, that sylla-
A
bles may be long either by a single vowel, as A, or by two, as
UA, or by three, as U^E.
On the contrary Quintilian says, that there are never three
vowels in a single syllable, but one of them is changed into a con-
sonant. And Terentianus maintains the same thing.
Syllabam nee invenimus ex tribus vocalibus.
Vossius likewise rejects these triphthongs, insisting that the Ro-
mans had at all times the J and V consonants, and founding his
opinion on this, that the oriental languages have their vau and
their jod, which answers to these two letters, as we likewise find
that they have been adopted by the French and by other vulgar
languages.
We read also in Cassiodorus, that according to Cornutus, Varro
had taken notice of the V consonant, which he called va or
van, because of its rough sound. Priscian declares the same
thing, and confirms it not only from Varro, but likewise from
Didymus. And it does not seem at all probable, that the Latins,
after following the JEolians in every thing, should not likewise
have borrowed their digamma, that is the V consonant which sup-
plied its place every where ; pursuant to the same Priscian.
This is further corroborated by the figure invented by the em-
peror Claudius for this V, which is only an inverted j. Which
doubtless he would never have done, had it not been received in
the pronunciation. Whence one might infer that the use of this
V consonant was greater than that of the I, for otherwise he
would have no reason to order a new character for one more
than for the other : though they are both marked as consonants
in the antients, as in Quintilian, Charisius, Diomedes, Terentianus,
Priscian, and others.
St. Austin, in his book of the Principles of Logic, observes also
as a thing beyond all sort of doubt, that in these words venter,
vqfer, vinum, and the like, where V is a consonant, the sound fo
strong and full. For which reason, says he, we drop it in some
words, as amasti, abiit, for amavisti, "abivit, &c. in order not to
offend the ear. And hence it is, he addeth, that we derive the
etymology of the word from vis, because sonus verbi, quasi validus, 1 1
congruit rei qua significatur. Which is consonant to the opinion of //
Plato in his Cratylus, and to that of the Stoics, who believed there
were
264 NEW METHOD. Book. IX.
were no words, but what could be some way accounted for by the
sound of the letters : though Cicero laughs at this opinion, which
St. Austin likewise seems to disapprove.
But besides these reasons and authorities, Scioppius's opinion is
liable still to three or four difficulties, which it will not be easy to
solve.
The first is, that it destroys the position in verse, where one
would think that ad, for example, in adjuvat could not be long,
if the I after the D were not a consonant. And it signifies nothing
to say with this author, that the ad is long by the apposition of
the diphthong iu, which being hard to pronounce, sustains this
first syllable. For if this length of ad proceeded only from the dif-
ficulty of pronouncing the second syllable* how comes it that this
syllable itse.f was not long, since according to Ijim it lasted longer
in pronouncing ? And how came it to give to the first syllable a
length of time and quantity by sustaining it, when it was neither
long^nor sustained itself? But if the length of one syllable might
be owing to the fullness of the next, how comes it that the first in
Adauctus, is not rather long, since the second is so full and so hard
to pronounce, as to be long both by nature and position ?
The second objection that may be made against him, and which
depends on the first, is, that if the j was a vowel in ab Jove, ad-
juvat, and the like, it would be a diphthong with the next vowel,
and therefore would lengthen that syllable, whereas it is short.
To which it signifies nothing to answer, that all diphthongs are
not long by nature, because the first in queror, and the second in
aqua, sanguu, and the like, are not such. For it may be said, I
think, that those syllables are not real diphthongs ; the nature of
the diphthongs, as we have already shewn, being to have a double
sound, whereas that of the U was always to become a liquid after
these two consonants, Q and G ; as in aqua, sanguis, &c. and even
frequently after S, as in suavis, sue.tus, suarfet, and the like, whose
genuine pronunciation is to be only of two syllables. And then
the U was lost, and slipped away in such a manner, that it had no
power or force to lengthen the syllable, unless the following vowel
was already long by nature, as in qucsro, suadet, c.
The third objection is that if this I and this V had been always
vowels, they would have occasioned an elision of the letter m or
of the vowel in the preceding word, which they do not. As tollere
vento. Incute vim ventis. fyiterpres divum Jove missus ab ipso. Au-
denies Jortuna juvat, Virg. And not toller* uento,jorturi > inuat, &c.
The fourth objection is, that even the U and I vowels are fre-
quently changed into consonants, as in gen-va labant. Ten-vis ubi
argilla. Ar-jetat in portas. Par-jetibu^que premunt arctis, accord-
ing to Frobus and Tet^ntianus. Which is much more probable
than the opinion of Macrobius, according to whom those verses
would begin with a foot of four short syllables.
But whatever may be the result of this question, which hath its
difficulties on both sides ; what we are most to observe is, that in
all probability the Latins did not pronounce this I, though a con-
sonant,
OF LETTERS, #c. 265
sonant, so strong as we do. As may be still seen by the Italians,
who always pronounce their I like a vowel, unless they put a G
before it, to which they even give something of the D'; for though
they write Gicicomo, they pronounce it almost like Dgiacomo ; but
except on this occasion, always lacomo or zacopo. And in the La-
tin words where they do not put the g, because they cannot alter
the orthography, as jacio, judico, adjuvo^ they pronounce this j
In such a manner, that we only perceive the sound of the i vowel,
though they call it i consonant. And among the Hebrews the vau
and the jod have a much greater affinity with the sound of our i
and u vowels, than of our consonants.
It is for this reason very likely, that the poets join one of these
vowels to others in verse oftener than we imagine. For, not to
mention suavis, suetus, suadet, and others, which have this sound of
themselves, and not by poetic licence ; we find alveo of two syl-
lables only, alvearia offour,fuisset of two in Lucretius, and a great
many more, whether this is to be called a diphthong or a triph-
thong, or a Syneresis, that is, when two syllables are contracted
into one ; examples of which may be seen in the next book, in thai
Section of Latin Poetry, chap. 3, n. 5.
III. Whether the I may sometimes pass for a Double
Consonant.
From the foregoing discourse it is easy to see that the Gramma-
rians had very little foundation to say that the I was sometimes a
double consonant, since it appears rather to have been only a semi-
consonant. And little does it import to allege that it makes
the syllable which precedes it long by position, as the first in wza-
jor 5 since it is certain that if the I was a double letter, it might
be resolved into two simple ones, which is not so much as imagined.
And therefore the reason why the first is long, in major, pejus, and
the like, is not that thej is a double consonant in those words, but.
on the contrary it is because being there a vowel, it makes a diph-
thong with the first, mai-or, pei-us y &c.
And indeed it evidently appears that this i cannot form a long
position of itself, since in byugus, trijitgus, quadrijiigus, the i is short
in the antepenultima before this consonant.
Interea bijugis infert se Leucagus albis^ ^En. 10.
Which happens not only to the compounds of jugum, as some have
fancied, but likewise to the other words.
Aure rejectantem mistos cum sanguine dentes, M\\. 5.
as Pierius would have us read it ; whereas others put ejeciantem,
which Macrobius, Farnaby, and Vobsius, seem to favour : though
this makes nothing at all for the I consonant, the first syllable being
long in this word, only because we are to read it with a diph-
thong ei-ectantem, and perhaps they even put two w, as Priscian
witnesseth that the antients wrote with a diphthong erius, peiius,
Pompeiius, examples whereof are still extant in antient inscriptions ;
and as we learn from Longus, that Cicero wrote aiio, Maiiam, and
the like with &
For
266 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
For this very reason the first is long in Caiius, and Caii, and the
like.
// Quodpeto da Caii, non peto consilium, Mart.
/ and Lucretius has made it the same in reii, eii, as likewise
Plautus.
CHAPTER VI.
Of Liquids.
THEY generally reckon four liquids, or gliding letters;
that is, which run glib and smooth in pronouncing; namely,
L, R, M, N ; though, as we have already taken notice, the two last
are not very gliding.
The L and R have so great a relation to each other, that those
who want to pronounce an R, and are not able to effect it, be-
cause of its great asperity, do naturally fall into the L.
Hence ariseth the mutual change betwixt these two letters.
For not only the Attics say xf/avo* for xA/avo$, clibanus ; and
the like ; but the Latins have also taken cantherus from xavhSxiof,
liUum from Xe/^ov, vermis from &/K./V?, or Fc'Afuw, a tvorm, &c.
And by the same analogy of niger they have made nigellus, of
umbra, umbella, and such like diminutives. They used also to say
conftacuit for confracuit, Varr. Parilia for Palilia, Festus ; just as,
we say Alvernia for Arvernia, Auvergne.
But the R was put also for D, as Priscian observeth, Arvocatos
for advocates ; arverna for adverna. And in like manner meridies
for medidies, taken from media dies, &c. And the R was likewise
changed into S, as we shall shew hereafter.
The M hath a very obscure sound, and is pronounced on the
edge of the lips, whence it was called mugientem litteram. It was
often dropped in prose, as it is still in verse. Restitutuiri, in the
civil law, instead of restitutum iri. Salte for saltern, Vet. Gloss.
On the contrary the N was called tinniens, because it had a
clearer and neater sound, the tongue reaching the palate of the
mouth, as Nigidius and Terentianus observe. Which sheweth
that it was pronounced in Manlius the same as in an, in menses
the same as in en, &c. Though sometimes it lost great part of
its force in particular words, and helped to form a simple sound
between it and g, as we shall more particularly take notice in the
9th chap. num. 7.
// Scaliger in his book de emend, temp, observes, that the Chal-
/' deans frequently changed nun into lamed; Nabonassar, Nabolassar;
\\ Nabonidus, Labonidus.
It was also customary with the Greeks to change the n into /,
saying for instance, AeVas for yfaw, from whence we have Lepus .
wXev/xwv for wevfAuv, from whence we have pulmo : M*M/o* for
Manlius, &c. But sometimes they dropped the n entirely, as
'OTIO-/O?, for Hortensius : which made Lambinus imagine, that the
real name of this Roman orator was Hortesius, contrary to the
authority of an tient copies and inscriptions. Besides, we find by
* a mul-
Se
>y-y->^_
OF LETTERS, #c. 267
a multitude of other examples, that it was usual with the Greeks
to drop the n t when it happened not to be final, as rAA/ N-
CtfvW*, Aay5*)<r*, 'la-Trav/a TagKuvnvtot in geographers and histo-
rians, for Gallia Narbonensis, Lugdunensis, Hispania Taraconensis t
'OvciXw for Valens, &c. KX>5/xy, K^O-MS, novSw, for Clemens, Cres-
cens, Putlens, in the New Testament and elsewhere.
This letter is also sometimes lost in Latin, as when of abscindo
is formed abscidi in the preterite. We likewise meet with abscidit
for atroTfpvti, in the present, V. Gloss. Hence they used to write
cost, to signify consules, as Quintilian observeth by cutting off the
n. But very often this omission of the n can be attributed to no
other cause but the ignorance of transcribers and sculptors, when
we find in the antients, for example, Clemeti for Ctementi, cojux
for conjux, meses for menses, &c. Because as the small strokes that
are put over the vowels to mark the long ones a, e, o, have been
sometimes taken by the ignorant for tittles that made n and m, as
we have already observed ; so on other occasions, where they af-
terwards really signified those same letters, they were omitted by
those who believed that they xvere only marks of quantity. And
that is what deceived Lambinus in the word Hortesius, as we have
seen but just now.
Quintilian says that the m was frequently at the end of words in
Latin, but never in Greek, and that the Greeks changed it then
into w, because the n had a more agreeable sound, though it was
rare in Latin to see words ending with this letter.
Hereby we see that it is an error to pretend that in Greek the n
ought to be pronounced like an m before /3, <jr, or /* ; since at the
end of words it would be a barbarism, according to Ramus, to
say TOV /o/ov, as if it were torn bion, rw fug/$, as if tern merida, and
the like.
But N had also an affinity with R, as dims and S/vo*, Juria from
0ov/<z. And from thence comes JEneus for cereus. Cancer for car-
eer, of which they formed cancelti. Carmen for canimen, from cano.
Germen for genimen, from geno for gigno, according to Joseph Sca-
liger upon Varro, and the like. And it was likewise put for S.
whence we have cessores for censores in Varro, as the same Scaliger
observeth. Sanguis for sanguen, &c.
CHAPTER VIII.
Of the Mute Consonants, andjirst of those of the Jirst
order, P, B, F, V.
WE give the name of mutes to those consonants, which have
a more obscure and less distinct sound than the rest. There
are six of them in our division, which we disposed according to the
relation they bear to each other.
L Of
268 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
I. Of Band P. , . ,
B and P are so near a-kin, that, according to Quintilian, rea-
son required a b in tlie word obtinuit, but the ear could distinguish
only a p, optinuit. Hence we find by antient inscriptions, and
by the old glossaries, that these two letters were often confounded,
apsensfor absens, optimus for obfimus, plcpsforplebs,poplicusforpub-
licus, and such like. Hence we have still remaining suppono for sub-
pono, oppuno for obpono. Sac. And several nations frequently pro-
nounce one of these letters for the other, as the Germans, who say,
ponum vinum for bonum, and the like.*
The Greeks also used frequently to change these two letters, one
for the other ; and Plutarch takes notice that it was customary for
the inhabitants of Delphi to say, @arw for ware'iv, (3utov for THX^OV,
&c. And hence it comes that whenever an S followeth, we change
the b into p. Scribo, scrips?, just as the Greeks say, Ac/Cw, W^w,
&c. for the B, according to Priscian, is never suffered to precede
the S in any syllable. But this is not so general as this author
imagined, since we still meet with absis and absinthium, for the
Greek words 4"? an d \J//0io.
It is by this same analogy that the Latins have taken pasco from
&OCTKU, papcz from /3aj\ buxus from 7rv|o?, pedo from /3&, puteus
from udo?, and the like ; as the Greeks have borrowed w^yo?,
turris, from the Phoenician word Borg 9 whence the French word
bourg seems also to be derived.
These two letters have likewise tnis in common, that they have
crept into several words wjthout any necessity, as absporto for as-
porto, see Gloss. Obstendit for ostendit, see Gloss. Obstentui for
ostentui, ibid, and thence it is that from urere they say comburere ;
and hence also, according to Nonius, they say celebre for celere, &c.
And the same in regard to the P. Dampnum for damnum, see Gloss.
Scampnum for scdmnum, Id. Sumpsi for sumsi t &c. See the Pre-
terites, vol. 1. rule 51. p. 257.
II. Of the F and the V consonant.
The F was pronounced almost like 9, but not with so strong an
aspiration ; as Terentianus observes.
P littera a Grceca 4> recedit lenis fy hebes sonus.
Hence Tully rallies a Greek, who instead of Fundanius, said <|>MW-
daniuS) that is a p with an aspiration, P-hundanius. Nevertheless,
upon the decline of the language, these two letters used to be put
for one another, as may be seen by the old glossaries, folanx for
phalanx* and in like manner, jilosophiaifalerce, &c.
The V, that is the V consonant, had a fuller sound, but less
rough tlian we now give it, by which we make it border very
near upon the F. It had more of the German W, tuinum, wine ;
concerning uhich see what hath been already said, c. 6. And
hence the Greeks frequently changed it into ov, Varus, Qvafos, &c.
III. Re-
OF LETTERS, $o. 269
III. Relation between the V and the Digamma.
ThisV supplied the place of the -flSolic Digamma, which was
so called because it had the figure of two rammas, one upon ano-
ther, thus, F. But we are particularly to observe that the digam-
ma was not pronounced 'so strong as we now pronounce the V con-
sonant, for which reason it produced no position in verse, as we shall
shew hereafter. Hence Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius,
hath extremely well observed this difference between the digamma
and the V consonant, that after the digamma is dropped, the word
still subsists, as FA*', IXD, u Fox, <Joy : whereas the V is necessary
to form the word, as vulgus, volo, vado, which would be destroyed,
were we to say only ulgus, olo 9 ado, &c.
IV. Other Relation between V and B.
This V consonant had likewise a great relation to B, for which
reason in words derived from the Greek, one is often taken for
the other, as /3/w, vivo ; @ix, vis ; /SovAw, volo ; Gabu, venio ;
fHxtifyj, vado ; &a-x.u, vescor ; /3o^, vox ; 0v o?, vorax ; fkotiu t vo-
veo. For we have already taken notice that e was frequently
changed into 0, and at into e.
Hence it comes that the Greeks spmetimes rendered by a /3
the Latin words that begin with a V, j3aA3gt for valere, because,
as they no longer used the digamma, they had nothing that came
nearer to it ; especially since the B began already to degenerate
from its natural sound, which is that of 0. This is a further
proof, says Lipsius, that this V was not sounded in the present
manner, because otherwise the Greeks would as naturally have
attempted to express it by 9 as by /3. Therefore the passage we
quoted from St. Austin, chap. 6. n. C 2. who calls it crassum fy quasi
validum sonum, ought not, in all probability, to be understood of
the roughness, but rather of the fullness of the V, which sounded
almost the same as the French diphthong ou, and was very near
a-kin to the German W. But this does not prove by any maans
that the Greek B should be pronounced like a V consonant,
which we have made appear in the New Method of learning the
Greek tongue.
Now what has been here observed in regard to the affinity be-
tween the B and the V, greatly favours the pronunciation of the
Spaniards and Gascons. And though this error may seem very
gross, yet it is more antient than people imagine. For not only
Adamantius hath taken particular notice of it in Cassiodorus, but
there are examples of it in old inscriptions, as BASE for VASE,
CIBICA for civic A, &c. Just as we likewise meet with instances
of V for B, VENEFiteUM for BENEFICIUM, siBE for siVE ; and
in the Florentine Pandects, AVEO for ABEO, VOBEM for BOVEM,.
VESTIAS for BESTIAS, and the like ; which is very necessary to
observe.
It is likewise in consequence of the. affinity and relation betwixt
these two letters that of atifaro is formed aiifero, whence we have
~ abstuli,
270 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
abstuli, ablatum. And to this also it is owing that we have arbilla
for arvilla, taken from arvina. Likewise albena for alvena ad-
vena, whence coineth aubain in French, a foreigner according to
Cujas : and also aubene, as much as to say advene : bona caduca sive
adventitia, the droit d'aubene, or escheatage, being relative to the
estates of foreigners deceased without lawful heirs, and which
therefore devolve to the king.
V. Relation of B to F, and to $.
But beside this relation of B to V consonant, it had also another
to F, and to <f>. For they used to say bruges forfruges, as Cicero
takes notice; of QgepM they ma&e fremo, of @<x<rx.<*vos jhscinum, of
&svQo;,fundum, &c. And on the contrary they used to say sifilare
for sibilare, whence also comes the French word siffler ; they said
of vobis for ab vobis ; and thence we have still remaining, suffero
for subfero, sufficit for subficit, suffusio for subfusio, and others.
Whereas the Macedonians, as Plutarch informs us, said BA<*WW
for 4>/A/7ttjrov, and such like ; and according to Festus we say album
for a'xpov, a kind of white itch ; from p<pu cometh ambo ; and the
rest in the like manner.
VI. Other relations of B orPtoM, and of P to F
or PH.
As the letter M hath a very obscure sound, and is almost as
labial as B and P, hence it is often changed into one of these two
letters; SLS globus t a globe; glomics, a bottom, or clew of thread:
submitto, summitto, /AE'AXE/V, ^Eol. /SeXXs/v, jra.Qova-x, ^Eol. fuxdovcrar,
vermis from J^TTO/, somnus from virnq, polluo from p&vvu, fnxxoXw,
^Eol. 9r/xxj;Xo5, whence the Italians have taken picolo, little.
Again, as P hath a relation to B, and B to F, so P hath also a
relation to F, as Jldo from vei&u persuadeo, Jlgo from veTyu. And
it has likewise a relation to PH, either because originally this PH
is no more than an aspiration added to the sound of P, or because
in process of time this PH .was pronounced like an F, which, as
we have just now observed, has an affinity with P. Thus trophceum
comes from rgoirotiov, romphcza from po^otioi^ verto from fkttu. In
like manner, caput from paA, carpo from v.a.^u > sapiens from
&C*
CHAPTER IX.
Of the second class of Mutes, C, Q, G, J.
THERE is an affinity or relation between C and Q, as likewise
between G and J consonant. Besides, there is an affinity
between C and G ; but we must see in what manner.
I. /fe-
OF LETTERS, #c. 271
I. Relation between C and Q.
So great is the relation between C and Q, that several gram-
marians have attempted to discard the Q as a superfluous letter,
pretending that the C and the U are sufficient to express the same
sound as Q. And we see that the Greeks have not this letter,
which was taken from the Kophe or Koppa of the Syrians, and in
French it has no other force than that of the single K, or that of a
C before A, O, U.
Quintilian asserts, that the letter K hath nearly the same proper-
ties and effect as Q. And Ramus declares, that in the university
of Paris the letter Q had always the same sound in Latin as it has
now in French, till the foundation of the royal professorships, under
Francis I. So that they said qalis, qanttis, qis, as we see some
people pronounce it still. And he observes, that at first every body
opposed the other pronunciation, introduced by the king's profes-
sors, as an innovation by no means to be admitted ; though after-
wards it made its way.
Nevertheless the letter Q still retains the same sound as K or C
before O and U, as we see in quum, which is the same thing as
cum, pursuant to what hath been mentioned in the remarks on the
pronouns, chap. 1. num. 4. And in quo: hence Cicero, as Quin-
tilian informs us, rallying a cook who was intriguing for some
high preferment, made use of these words, Ego quoque tibi jure
Javebo, because they could not tell by the sound whether it was
the particle quoque, or the vocative of coquus, a cook.
But in conjunction with the three first vowels, A, E, I, it has a
thicker and fuller sound, which is so particular, that it cannot be
expressed by any Greek letters, Duras fy ilia syllabas facit^ says
Quintilian, qua? ad conjungendas demum subjeetas sibi vocales est utilis,
alias supervacua, ut EQUOS ac EQUUM scribimus, cum ipsce etiam
has vocales dace efficiant sonum, qualis apud Gr&cos nullus est, ideoque
scribi illorum litter is non potest. Though this sound proceeds as much
from the U as from the Q, because after a G the U has the same
effect in lingua, sanguis, and others ; and heretofore it had the
same after S, suavis, suadet, &c. which has still continued in verse,
as we have already observed.
This shews nevertheless the unreasonableness of some in rejecting
the Q, as of Varro according to Censorinus, and of Licinius Calvus
according to Victorinus, who never would make use of it ; for it is
always of service, since its office is to unite the two following vowels
into one syllable, where the C denotes they are divided. This
makes the difference between the nominative qui and the dative cui,
between the infinitive sequi, taken from the verb sequor, and the
preterite of seco, secui, and a great many others. This is further
confirmed by Priscian, and by Terentianus Maurus, whom some
have placed late in the fifth century, though he must have flou-
rished in the middle of the fourth, since St. Austin quotes him as a
dead author in books of his that were written before 390.
And so real is this difference between C and Q, that we find the
antient poets have put a C where we always write a Q, when they
wanted
272 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
wanted to divide the words into more syllables than they naturally
form. Thus Lucretius useth cui'ret, a trissy liable, for quiret.
Confringe.re nt arcta
Naturte primus portaruut claustra cu'iret.
And tfws also he made acua a trissyllable, for aqua. And in the
same manner Plautus wanted to put relicuiis, in his Cistell. act. 2.
sc. 1.
Quod dedi datum non vcllem, quod relicuum non dabo.
Because if we do not read it thus, the verse, which is trochaic, will
not have its full measure.
II. Whether Q ought to pass for a double letter.
As we have observed that Q supplied the place of C and U, there
are grammarians who insist on its being a double letter, and among
the rest Capella, Diomedes, and Longus ; an opinion which Vos-
sius has also favoured. The ground they go upon is, that the
antients wrote QT, Q^E, QID, &c. without a w, examples of
which are still to be seen in antient inscriptions, whence it follows,
say they> that the U was included in Q, and consequently that this
is a double letter.
Nevertheless it is beyond all doubt that Q cannot be a double
letter, for otherwise the first in aqua, equus, and the like, would be
long, whereas it is short in verse.
To their arguments I shall give two answers ; the first that it was
the custom of the antients frequently to take a single letter for the
characters which formed the name of the letter : putting, for in-
stance> a K only for Ka or Ca, they wrote Krus for Kams, and
yet this did not make the K a double letter. So that they might
put likewise a q only for qu, andqis for quis, &c.
And thence it appears, to mention it only by the way, that
when in Greek writings we meet with o for a, this o stands for the
name of the letter, as Quintilian observes ; for its name was ov,
according to Victorinus, just as they said pv, vv, ov; the name
of no letter whatever being formed by a simple character. Hence
the E itself was called El, as we find in Eustathius and Plutarch ;
so that sometimes, when they wrote only E, they pronounced El,
the single letter standing for the name of the letter itself. And
therefore we meet in Athenaeus with AIONY2O for A<ouc-, and in
the two Farnesian columns, which were removed from the via
Appia, TO TPITO for T rg irts, HEPOAO for Hf u$ov, and the like.
The second answer I make to their objection is, that when the
antients wrote qis, perhaps they pronounced it as if it was a K,
and the writing changed with the pronunciation. Fortasse etiam sicut
scnbebant, ita fy loquebantur, says Quintilian. And this answer
seems the more exact, as in Gruterus's inscriptions we meet not
only with q, but also with c only, for qu ; Cintus for Quintus, sicis
for siquis. As on the contrary we meet with Q only for C. Qur-
tius for Curtius, scequlum for steculum, mequm for mecum : and with
qu for C, as liquebit for licebit or liqebit ; which is proper to be
observed in order to correct a multitude of corrupt passages.
III.
r
OF LETTERS, $c. 273
III. Of the U which always accompanies the Q.
But in the present manner of writing the Q is always accom-
panied of course by a U, which has given occasion to gram-
marians to start a thousand idle questions: as whether it be a
vowel or consonant, whether it forms position with Q for the pre-
ceding syllable, or whether it makes a diphthong with the follow-
ing vowel, &c.
To cut short, I say that this U which always accompanies the
Q is not a consonant, and therefore does not form position ; and that
it is a vowel, but a liquid vowel, which glides away so nimbly
in pronouncing it, as to be hardly perceptible, according to Beda ;
and therefore it does not form a diphthong with the following
vowel, because it loseth its whole force as a letter in verse, amittit
aim luterce in. metro, says Priscian, which made Donatus believe,
that, strictly speaking^ it is neither vowel nor consonant.
Hereby we see that Alvarez, as well as Vossius, had very little
foundation to call it a liquid consonant, because,- if this was the
case, it would at least render the first common in aqua, aqmlex,
aquilo ; eques, equidem, and the like, which it certainly does not.
But a stronger argument that this u is only a liquid vowel, is that
being used also after G, as in anguis, it has been omitted in several
words where it formerly took place, as redigo, exti/igo, for redi-
guo, extingiio, &c. And the French use it thus not only after Q
and G, as question, anguille, &c. but likewise after C, as cueillir,
&c.
IV. Relation between C and G.
G is only a diminution of C, according to Quintilian ; and
therefore there is a very great affinity between them, since of
x.vsgrnT-ris we make gubernator, of xAe'or gloria, of egi actum, of nee
otium, negotium, &c. And Quintilian observes, that in Gains,
Gneius, they did not distinguish whether it was a C or a G.
Hence it is that of centum they formed quadringenta, quingenta,
septingenta, &c. Of porricere (which is still used in regard to sa-
crifices) they made porrigere, and the like.
It is supposed that the letter G was not invented till after the
first Punic war, because we always find a C instead of G on the
column called ROSTRATA, which was raked at that time in
honour of Duilius the consul, and is still to be seen in the capitol
at Rome, asMACisTRATOS, LECIONES, PUCNANDO, COPIAS CARTA-
CINIENSIS. Which is impossible to account for, unless we take
the C in the same sound as K. And it is observable that Suidas,
speaking of the crescent which the senators wore upon their shoes,
calls it TO 'PufAouKov xaTTTTje, plainly shewing thereby, that the C and
K passed for the same thing ; since indeed there was no' difference
between them in the sound. For whereas at present we 'greatly
soften the C before E and I, pronouncing Cicero nearly as if it was
Sisero, they on the contrary pronounced it in this and in all other
words, the same as in caput und in corpus.
VOL. II. T I say
274 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
I say the 'same of G, which always retained the same sound.
For whereas we have greatly softened it before e and t, pro-
nouncing it in regis and re ge, as in the French word regent and
regir ; they on the contrary pronounced it every where as in rego.
1 Hence St. Austin saith, Cum dico LEGE, -in his duabus syllabis,
aliud Qracus, aliud Latinus intelligit ; giving us to understand,
that the Latins pronounced theg as strong in lege, as the Greeks
in Aey and that these two words had in his time but one and th*
same sound.
V. Relation between G and J consonant.
The soft pronunciation which we give to G, is likewise the
cause of its having a great relation to the sound with which we
pronounce J consonant, when followed by an E or an I. For we
sound regi like rejicio, and rege like pejero, and so for the rest.
But this soft pronunciation of the G is lost, when it happens to
be followed by an a, o, or , as rcgat t rego, regum, whereas we al-
ways preserve it with the J consonant, asjacio, major and majus t
&c.
And if we should be asked whether this J consonant had really
this same pronunciation among the antients, we refer to what has
been above mentioned, chap. 6. p. 262.
VI. Whether the antients pronounced Gn in the manner
the French do at present.
Another question may arise, whether the Romans pronounced
the G before n > in the same manner as the Italians do at present,
and as the French pronounce it in these words, Agnez, magjiifique,
Espagnol, &c.
In all probability they did not, but pronounced the G in agnus,
as in agger, for this other pronunciation being so particular, and
differing so greatly from the usual sound of the G, the antients
would not have failed to take notice of it.
It is moreover observable that the G is sounded so very little
in these words Agnez and the like, that it serves only to denote
the liquid N, as the same G in Italian is a sign of the' liquid L,
Jtgliola, daughter. Hence it is that the Spaniards do not use the
g at all on those occasions, but are satisfied with putting a small
tittle over the n, to signify its being a liquid, and that it receives
this pronunciation, writing senor, and pronouncing segnor. And
for this reason also Ramus, in his French grammar, useth a par-
ticular mark for this liquid n in French, without putting a g, but
only a small comma under the n.
VII. That there is still a middle sound between G and N,
which is neither intirely one nor the other, and has
given the Greeks occasion to change Ninto r before y,
?> X> or
Another difficulty may here arise, to know whether the N is
changed into r on certain occasions among the Greeks, as in
-
fa 4 *f*U**>
OF L E T T E R S,
y%i(rat t ayxugx, &c. and whether the r be then pro-
nounced as an N. For it seems, says H. Stephen, to be a mistake
of the transcribers, who lengthened the v a little too much in the
ligatures of the small letters, and made a y of it. Hence in MSS.
in capitals, such as those he made use of in compiling his The-
saurus, we find those words intire with an N, ANFEAOS, and the
like. Besides, Joseph Scaliger, in his notes on Eusebius, quotes,
from an antient inscription, ANKTPA for Ayxt^a. And indeed,
addeth H. Stephen, it seems ridiculous to say tn at this N should
be changed into r, for no other end but that the r should at the
same time be pronounced like an N.
But in answer to this, wo do not say it is pronounced like a
Greek N, but as a vulgar n ; or, to speak more properly, with a
middle sound between the N and the G, according to Victorinus,
contemporary with Donatus, St. Jerome's master, who acknow-
ledges this change of letters, and this pronunciation among the
Greeks. Which made Scaliger say, that if we sometimes meet
with an N, this must be rather deemed an error of the tran-
scribers, who imagined they should express this sound better by
this letter, whereas, according to Vossius, it seems rather to re-
quire a new character.
And the "Latins had something like it in their language, which
Nigidius, as Gellius observeth, used to call a false N, as in anguis,
ancora, increpat, ingenuus, and others : In his enim non vemm N t sed
adulterinum ponitur, these are his words, Nam si ea littera esset, lin-
gua palatum tangeret. For which reason Varro, according to
Friscian, lib. 1. takes notice that Attius and the antients used to
put two gg on this occasion, like the Greeks, writing aggidus,
aggens, aggerunt, and the like.
CHAPTER X.
Of the third class of Mutes, which are D and T.
c/ </
TH E letter D is only a diminution of T, as G is of C,
even according to Quintilian. This seems to favour those
who in Greek do pronounce the r like a after a v, saying Trav-n*
as if it were ir&itx ; XEOVTO? as if it were As'ovcfo? : a softening that
perhaps may be admitted, though it is not a fault to pronounce
it otherwise. But even in Latin it is very certain that there is a
great relation between those two letters, in consequence of which
they are often changed one for the other, as at for ad; which
made Quintilian laugh at those who scrupled to write them in-
differently ; set for sed, kaut for hand, and others in the writings
of the antients : Quit for quid, adque for atque, &c. in inscriptions
and elsewhere.
The Franch write voit with a t , though it comes from videt
with a d. And whenever the d is at the end of a word, and the
T 2 next
276 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
next begins With a vowel or an h without being aspirated, they
pronounce it like a , and say, for example, grant esprit, grant
homme, though they write grand esprit> grand homme. Which Shews
that in French we ought always to lean harder upon the final con-
sonants when the next word begins with a vowel, than in any
other place.
In every other respect the French have almost intirely preserved
the' sound of those two letters, except in the T, which is in great
measure softened, when joined with an i t before another vowel,
where it is sounded almost like the s of the antients, pronuntio, as
if it were pronunsio. Whereas they pronounced it in litium, mtium t
&c. all the same as in litis, vitis ; of which nobody can entertain
the least doubt, because this soft sound is taken notice of by none
of the antients, and moreover because it is a constant maxim, that
no, consonant hath two different sounds, either among the Latins
or among the Greeks, this privilege, as Lipsius observes, being
reserved for the vowels.
True it is 'that we have a fragment of one Papirius a gram-
marian, which mentions that the ti before another vowel was
pronounced like tzi, justitia like ju&titzia. But besides that this
pronunciation does not intirely establish our's, this very author
excepts, among others, those words, in which an i comes imme-
diately after ti, as otii, &c. Which shews that this pronunciation
was introduced only by degrees, and in proportion as the Latin,
was corrupted by the mixture of foreign languages. Hence also
it is, that in the old glossaries we find eciain for >etiam : and in
Festus, Murtia Dea or Murcia (the goddess of sloth) according to
the observations of Scaliger.
CHAPTER XL
Of the Hissing Letters.
T TNDER the name of hissing letters we include the S, and the
\*J double letters which are resolved by S.
I. Of 'ike letter S.
S is called a hissing letter, because of its sound. It has been
variously received among the antients, some having intirely re-
jected it, while others affected to introduce it every where.
Pindar calls it x/C^Xov, adulterinam, and has avoided it in almost
all his poems. Quintilian says it is harsh, and makes a disagreeable
sound in the connexion of words. For which reason it was often in-
tirely rejected, dignu', omnibu 9 , and the like in Plautus, Terence,
and elsewhere. In some Latin authors it was also changed into
T, in imitation of the Attics, as mertare, pultare, aggretus, for nier*
sare, pulsare, aggressus, &c.
Others, on the contrary, affected to introduce it ev^ry where,
Casmcence for Camcena, dusmostz for dumosce, &c. And Quintilian
takes
OF LETTERS, #c. 277
takes notice that in Cicero's time, and afterwards, they frequently
doubled it in the middle of words, caussa, divissiones, &c.
Be that as it may, there is no doubt of its being harsh if it I:e
too hissing, or too often repeated ; which obliged the French to
soften it in such a manner, that when it happens to be in the
middle of two vowels, they pronounce it like an Z, saying
mizere, and not missere. And this soft sound they have introduced
into Latin words, pronouncing miseria, like the French word
misere, though the Romans always sounded their S in the same
manner as in seria, and the like.
This letter had an affinity with R, which is the reason of there
being so many nouns in ER and IS, as vomer and vomis, ciner
and cinis, volucer and volucris, saluber and salubris, pulver and
pulvis, and many others, where we must also suppose the change
of E into I, of which we have taken notice above. Others are
in OS and in OR ; labos and labor, honos and honor, &c.
The Attics were also used to put the a for f, a.%wt for upfav,
tnasculus ; *%<rcx.\tos for Sotpfaktos, audax, &c. Thus from rv$<ns
comes turns ; from ta-u (of which they made lo-o^ai} ero ; from ))
vgei<roY, porrum ; from xfow, celer, and the like. And so from Fu-
iius, Furius ; Valesius, Valerius, &c.
But S had likewise a relation to D, as appears even by the Z,
which includes both these letters, as we shall demonstrate in the
following numbers ; by the increase of several Greek and Latin
nouns, clamis, damydis, for clamis, ys ; lapis, lapidis, &c. (whereto
we may refer litis, ditis, militis, and the like, because of the
above-mentioned affinity between D and T) by the compounding
particles, assumo for adsumo ; by the Greek and Latin verbs, *>,
cano, oicru ; ludo, lusi, &c. and, in fine, by divers particular words,
as from edit comes est, he eats, by Syncope, for esit.
II. Of the Double Letters.
The double letters always include the S, and therefore in great
measure partake of its hissing.
The Greeks have three, Z, S, ; but the Latins have only
two, X and Z ; which is the case of most of the vulgar lan-
guages.
The X is equivalent to cs 9 ; as dux for dues, for 'which reason it
makes ducts in the genitive ; and likewise to gs, as rex for regs,
(notwithstanding what Vossius says) for which reason it makes
regis in the genitive. For since G and C have so great an affinity,
as we have already observed, and since they are so frequently
changed one for the other, as itegligo for nee lego, there is a very
strong probability that the same double letter is also capable of
expressing them both.
This X was sometimes put with a C, as VICXIT, JUNCXIT, and ,.
sometimes with an S, as CAPPADOXS, CONJUXS, &c. S. Isidore
takes notice that it did not obtain before the reign of Augustus, and
Victorinus informs us that Nigidius would never make use of it.
The Z had a softer sound than X, for which reason Quintilian
calls it mollissimum fy suavissimum. Yet this is not the same sound
as
278 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
as we give it at present, which is only a moiety of the S. Beside
this it had something of the D, but with a very soft pronunciation ;
fylezentius, as if Medsentius ; Zethus, as if Dsethus, &c.
Hence it is that the Dorians changed this letter into SD, whe-
ther in the beginning of a word, as o$yyos for vyoj, or in the
middle, as o-yp/VSw for cvgtfa. Not that the was equivalent to
c-S, as Vossius remarks in the first book of his grammar ; but by
reason of a kind of transposition or Metathesis; both Flaccus and
Longus observing, that as the X began with a C, in like manner
the Z ought to begin with D; so that all the double letters end
with S. Yet Erasmus and Ramus pretend the contrary, and Sex-
tus Empiricus endeavours to prove against the torrent of gramma-
rians, that was as much equivalent to rS as to So-.
Be that as it may, the /E,;lians also changed the $ into , as
^aCaAXm for c><aCaXX<y, calumniari ; from whence they took aoAos
for diabolos, which we meet with in S. Cyprian and S. Hilary ; and
which Erasmus renders delatorem or calumniator em, and Budeus ad-
versarium, and is the usual word by which S. Paulinus distinguishes
the evil spirit. *
The Latins likewise have frequently changed this | into D, and
sometimes into S, taking odor, from oe/v, and from ^a^a, massa ;
from -CTT.'W, patrisso, &c.
The Z had also the like affinity with G. Hence it is, as Sea-
liger observeth, that when the modern Greeks would express the
month called Giumadi, they write </x,a/, and to express a Per-
sian or a foreigner by the word Agiami, they write 'A^a/x^ This
was even customary among the antients, as Capella observeth,
Z, says this author, a Greeds venit, licet etiam ipsi primo G Gr&ca
ntebantur ; nam TETTM dicebant, nunc ZETUM dicimus. The
Latins also of fyvyos have made jugum, of ^e/oi/, majus, and the
like, where ihej consonant had nearly the same sound as g. The
Italians, to express the J consonant, prefix a G, and pronounce it
like dg ; they write Giacomo, but pronounce Dgiacomo for Jacomo,
James. And it is observable likewise in French, that they who
cannot pronounce the G, or the J consonant before e and i, (be-
cause these letters require to be sounded with a kind of hissing)
pronounce exactly a Z, as when they say, le zibet, du zinzembre,
des zettons, ze ne s$ai, zirai la, instead of gibet, du gingembre, des
jettons, &c.
By all these relations we find it is no wonder that the Z, which
in Greek, ought to characterise the fourth conjugation, because it
is the fourth consonant of their alphabet, is also changed into two
<r in the present ; that is, that the verbs of this conjugation ter-
minate in w or o-o-a. We find likewise why gome take now and
then a 5,. and others pow and then a y, for the characteristic of
their, second aorist. This is intirely owing to the affinity betwixt
the and those other two letters; which may be observed in a
single word ; for what the Latins call viridarium, the Italians call
if and the French un verger.
OF LETTER?, fa. *79
CHAPTER XII.
Of the aspiration H.
GRammarians are in doubt whether H ought to be ranked
among the letters or not, because they say it is only an
aspiration.
We acknowledge that H is only an aspiration, but we add that
it is a real letter nevertheless, because every character instituted
by mankind, to apprize us of some change in the pronunciation,
ought to be deemed a real letter, especially where it has a place
in the alphabet among the rest, as we see that H has. And in.-
deed it is very ridiculous to imagine that H is not a real letter,
because of its being only an aspiration, since we see that the
oriental languages have three or four letters which they call gut-
turals, to express only the different aspirations.
The H supplies in Latin the rough breathings and the aspirate
consonants of the Greeks ; and thus it has two general uses ; the
1. before vowels in the beginning of syllables, as- in honor, hcedus,
prehendo ; the 2. after consonants, as in thronus, Rhodu$ 9 philosophus t
charitas.
I. Of H before Vowels.
With regard to the former use the French have greatly changed
the pronunciation of this letter in Latin words, and preserved it
only in some French words. For in Latin they hardly pronounce
it at all, as in honor, homo, humor ; and in French it is entirely
lost in these very words, honneur, homme, humeur ; and in most
words borrowed from the Latin or the Greek, pronouncing them as
if there were no H, but merely onneur, umeur, omme, &c.
Now it is beyond all doubt that this was not the Roman way
of pronouncing, but that they sounded the H with as strong an
aspiration as it is sounded in words purely French, such as la har-
diesse, la halcbarde, la hauteur, &c. And perhaps they gave it even
a stronger aspiration.
This appears by two clear and irrefragable authorities. The 1.
of St. Austin, who, complaining to the Supreme Being that man-
kind were more diligent observers of the rules of grammar than
of his divine laws, mentions that they were so exact in this pro-
nunciation ; Ut qui ilia sonorum vetera placita teneat, aut doceat,
says he, si contra disciplinam Grammatical, sine aspiratione prime*
syllabce, Ominem dixerit, magis displiceat hominibus, quam si contra
tuaprcecepta hominem oderit, cum sit homo. Conf. 1. c. 18.
The second authority is of Catullus, who rallies a person for
introducing the letter h into every word. For the raillery is not
because he pronounced the A in a different manner from others,
but because, as the h had something of a harsh sound, he offended
the ear by putting it where it ought not to be.
Chom*
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
Chommoda dicebat, si quando commoda vellet
Dicere, fy hinsidias Arriu^ inddias :
Et turn mirifice sperabat sc esse locutum,
Cum quantum poterat dixerat hinsidias.
Credo, sic mater, sic liber avunculus ejus,
Sic maternus avus dixerat atque avia.
Hoc misso in Syriam, requierant omnibus aures,
Audibant eadem hcec leniter Sf leviter.
Nee sibi post ilia metuebant talia verba :
Cum subiib affertur nuniius horribilis,
lonios fluctus postquam illuc Arrius isset,
Jam non lonios esse, sed Hionios. Carm. 85.
Here a person may ask in what manner this H ought to be pro
iiounced, when it is before, words beginning with an i aspirated
in Greek, as Hieronymus, Hlerusalem, &c. One would think that,
since I is never a consonant in the Greek language, and that
even the Latins, as already hath been observed, gave it a softer
sound than we, this I ought always to pass for a vowel, though
with the aspiration, and that we ought to say Hieronymum, Hieru-
salem, &c. just as Arrius said Hionios, when he wanted to aspirate
the I of lonios ; and since even the modern Jews pronounce their
Jod in this manner.
Yet the practice is various upon this head, some pronouncing it
as a vowel, while others give it the whole force of a J consonant,
as if it were Geronimus, just as the" French always say Gerome,
Gerusalcm, &c. wherein we must conform to the custom of vulgar
languages.
II. Of H after Consonants.
In regard to H after consonants, Cicero de Orator e observes that
the antients did not make qse of it, and that they only put it
after vowels, which made him inclined to say pulcros, triumpos^
Cartagi?iem, &c. But that at length having reserved the specu-
lation of these things to himself, he had fallen in with the custom
of the people in regard to the practical part and to pronunciation ;
however that they still continued to say Orcinos, Matones, Otones,
Ccepiones, sepulcrtf, coronas, lacrymas, without H, because this gave
no offence to the ear.
Quintilian moreover affirms that the antients used frequently to
drop it before vowels, saying cedos^ ircos, &c. whereas in his time
they were fallen into the opposite excess, saying, chorona,pr(zchones t
and the like. But we must consider the language, as it was in its
purity.
Therefore as this H after consonants was introduced into the
Latin tongue merely to supply the Greek aspirates, it seems as if
it ought to be put only after the four consonants, C, P, T, R ;
though this happens (at least in regard to the three last) only in
Greek or foreign words.
HI. Of
OF LETTERS, Sfr.
III. Of the pronunciation of CH.
CH is pronounced differently in Latin and in French. For in
*Latin it is always pronounced like a K, making no difference with
the C, except before the vowels E and I, or the diphthong, ce, ce,
before which the C is pronounced like an antient S, as already
hath been observed ; whereas the CH always preserves its sound o
K; Achilles and Achates being pronounced in the same manner.
But in French the genuine sound of CH before all vowels, is
that which obtains in char, cher, chiche, chose, chu, chou. For
which reason, though we have retained this h with the other con-
sonants in words derived from the Greek, which begin with an.
aspirate, yet one would imagine it ought to be omitted with the
.C, as in caractere, colere, Baccus, and such other words, to prevent
the mistakes of the unlearned, who being unacquainted with the
derivation of those words, might pronounce cha instead of ca t
cho instead of co, and chus instead of cus. And this is the opinion
of Mons. de Vaugelas in his remarks on the French tongue, to
which we refer the reader.
And indeed there is the greatest probability that both the Greeks
and Romans were strangers to this pronunciation, since it is so
particular to the French tongue, that the Italians, in order to ex-
press it, write sci, as sciolere, sciaractere, &c. Though it is very
certain that the Greek X and the Ch of the Latins were pro-
nounced differently from the Greek y.diriroc. and the Latin K or
C before any vowel whatever, that is, by giving it a strong aspi-
ration : for otherwise Catullus could not have censured a man for
saying chommoda instead of commoda, as we have seen in the epi-
gram above quoted.
IV. Of the pronunciation of PH.
The same may be said in regard to Ph : for we pronounce it
like F, saying philosophic, as if it were jilosophie. Whereas the
antients pronounced it. almost like a P with an aspiration, p-hi-
losop-hia, or raihcrfhilosofkia, since it partook, as it still does par-
take, of the nature of / in its aspiration, and yet had not the ,
same sound as it, as appears by the above quoted testimony of
Cicero, who otherwise would not have laughed at a Greek for
giving the sound of $ to F, pronouncing Fundanius at if it were
Qundanius, that is Fhundanius.
V. Of TH and RH.
In regard to Th in theatrum, thesaurus, and Rh in Rhodus and
the like, the H is hardly perceived in the modern pronunciation
of the Latin, though there is no doubt but it was distinguished by
the antients, and in the Greek these aspirations are to be ob-
served.
VI. From
38% NEW METHOD. Book IX.
VI. From whence the Latins borrowed this aspiration H.
The Latins borrowed their H from the Greek Hra, as the
Greeks had borrowed it of the Phoenicians, and these of the
Syrians, who formerly said Heta instead of Heth. Which evidently
shews that we ought to pronounce Eta in Greek, and not Ita.
But at first this H was used only as an aspiration ; for which
reason they wrote HEPOAO for l^ot/, HOAOI for o$f, HEKATON
for Ixarov,, centum ; whence it comes that the H formerly signified
a hundred, as the first letter of that word, pursuant to the observa-
tion of Longus, Scaurus, and Priscian.
"They likewise used to put the H with the weak consonants, in-
stead of the aspirates, which were not invented till some time after
by Palaraedes ; so that they wrote THEO2 for EOS and the like.
VII. Of some relations between the H andWie JEolic
digamma, which at length was changed into V con-
sonant, and into (3.
But it is further observable, according to S. Isidorus, whom
Cheke and Vossius have followed, that from the H arose the
mark of breathings ; for splitting it in two, at first they made F
for the rough breathing, and d for the smooth, which were after-
wards rounded, in order to give to the former the following
mark ', and to the latter that of a comma. This is further con-
firmed by antient editions, and among others by Aldus's Hesy-
chius, where the different breathings of the Greek words are
marked by these two moieties of the H, namely F and 5. And
if we examine strictly, we shall find that from the former moiety
was taken our small ^, where they only lengthened the second
instead of a transverse line. And to this same reason it is owing,
that the C in vulgar languages was sometimes no more than a
mark of aspiration, or of a stronger sound, as we still see in Clo-
taire, whicn is the same as Lotaire ; in Clovis, which is the same
as Lovis or Louys and the like.
But as this mark of aspiration was not rounded in the begin-
ning, perhaps it was owing to this that the digamma F, which
represented nearly the first half of an H, hath oftentimes passed
for a rough breathing, as appears in FEA^ for I;JD, FE^IJV^ for
wfwu, &c. And neither this digamma, nor the Attic H made
any position in verse, as Priscian observeth ; which the Romans
have followed, their h having no power to render a syllable long by
position.
The mutual affinity between these two letters is the reason that
even in Latin they have been frequently put for one another ; fa-
dum for hcedum 9 Jircum for hircum^foriolum for hariolum, Jbstem for
ftostem, hemi?ias forfeminas, hebris forfebris, and the like.
But this digamma used also, though not so often, to be put for
a soft breathing, as F<AAo? for ixXo?, strains, squint-eyed. It was
customary likewise to insert it in the middle of words, to prevent
the hiatus or concurrence^ of vowels, as 5$W for o/$, from whence
comes
OP LETTERS, 8$c. 283
comes ovis, *Fo for yov, from whence ovum. Where we see also
that the V consonant has ever supplied the place of this digamrna.
It is owing to all these relations that the rough breathing, the
H, the digamma, and the V consonant, are oftentimes con-
founded and interchanged for one another. For example, of
"Everot or FewroJ the Latins have made Heneti or Veneti. In the
same manner from '$/ or F*f/ cometh Vtsta ; from iv^ris or
J?etrr>s, vestis ; from , 5f > or Fj, ver ; from vms^x or Fto-ireja,
vespera ; and so for the rest. But sometimes this digamma, or
this rough breathing, is changed into /3, as Passerat sheweth in
his treatise of letters ; fyirug for f-nrug, $%olo for ^Sor. Which
particularly obtained among the Cretans, who said oo or ^Cec*
for ovum, and the like, always putting a /3 instead of the digtmnut ;
whence perhaps" ariseth the mistake of pronouncing ft like a V
consonant.
Now these, as well as most of the preceding variations, are
proper to be observed, not only in order to discover the origin
and derivation of words, but likewise to understand divers obscure
passages, to correct such as have been corrupted, and to decipher
the antient manuscripts. Therefore to facilitate the use of them,
I have subjoined the following table, where the most considerable
of these variations will appear immediately at a single glance;
though I did not intend to include them all, but only the most
necessary. And here you are to observe, that when I shew that
one letter may be put for another, as E for A. 9 Jaciem forjbciam>
this means that we may generally conclude vice versS, as A for
E, inars for iners t balare for belare ; and the same may be paid of
others which I mentioned above, though I have not inserted them
in this table ; having been satisfied,, for the sake of brevity!, with
taking notice only of th most usual and ftiost remarkable manner
of writing.
T A
L E
Of the manner of writing of the Antients.
/"* /*<*-
fE. Eidem/or idem. Leitem/or litem, Ubei, &<;,
VOWEL, jl. Maiia, Caiius, eiius,/or Maia, Caius, &c.
as jO. Jous/orjus. Souo, quicuonqu ;/orsuo,quicunqj
-5
(iJ. Juus/orjus. Arbitratuu, luuit,/orarbitratu,luit.
*3
n
/"C. Vicxit, juncxit,/or vixit, junxit, ice.
>.
1 N. Quotiens/or quoties.
*
^
CONSONANT, J S. Exsigunt,exsercere. Amasso/oramaso.o/ainaro.
h
b
O
as ( P. or B. Quips for quis. Obstendit/or ostendit.
1 ST. Stlis/or lis.
., I
V.D. Tuad/c-r tua. Plebed, marid, estod.
S
&
a
.2
BOTH, as Leibertated/or libertate.
fmt
a '
^A SYLLABLE, as < Postidea/or postea. Indotestato for intestate,
VOWEL, CO- Fenus/or fcenus. Popli/or popoli.
as { I. Adicito,subice,reice;/or Adjicito,subjice,rejice,
^ 1 CONSONAN ^' Osa/cr ossa. Clase, jusit; /c/r classe, jussit.
*<R. Acera/or acerra.
v ( L. Pelex/or pellex.
"*, for A. Faciem/or faciam, &c.
r
E, for I. LeUer, Menerva, praesentebos ; for pressentibus.
O, for E. Vorsus, voster ; for Versus, vester.
O, for V. Servos, volnus/or Servt:?. Dicont/or dicunt.
VOWEL,
O, for AV. Coda/or cauda ; plostrum/or plaustruna, &c.
as {
OEandOl,forV. Ccerare, for curare. Oilier, oitile,/or utier, utile.
V, for E. Dicundo, faciundo, ferundo ;^for dicendo, &c.
V, for I. Optumus, Maxumus, sestumare.
V, 'for O. Adulescens, epistula j for adolescens, &c.
s.U, for Y. ^Eguptus, Sulla, Surius j for ./Egyptus, &c.
In
^B, for P. Obtimus/or optimus.
QUA-
C, for G. Cenas, lece, lecio j for Genas, lege, legio.
LITY,
D, for L. Fidius, dingua; for Filius, lingua.
in the
D, for R.Fedetrius/or feretrius.
change
F, for B. At virod/or ab viro. Sifilus/or sibilus.
of
CONSONANT,
L, for D. Delicat/or dedicat.
as
L, for R. Confl acuit for confracuit.
Q, for C. Pequnia/or pecunia.
R, for D. Arlabi, arfinis; fur Adlabi, adfinis.
S, for D. Assum, asversa ; for Adsum, adversa.
S, for R. Asa, casmen, minose; for Ara, carmen, minore.
T, for D. Alexanter, Cassantra, Set for sed. Quit/or quid.
^V, for B. Vobem/or bo vein.
They have also frequently preserved the final letters of prepositions in. com-
pound words without changing them, Inlustris, affectus, Conlega, &c.
g < Ausom for aurum. Exfociont for eflFugiunt. Prodigos/or prodi-
L ' J gus.
C Adecito/or adicito. Add eictos for add ictus. Continoeis for continuis. Dei-
, \cundo/or dicendo. Endo/or in. Fasis/or farris. Fousiosos/or furiosus. Max-
In both < sumo/ormaximo. Oloi/or illi. Poplos/or populus. Poplei/or populi. Prae-
Jseted/or praesente. Proxsumos for proximus. Sopera for supra. Faxsit/or
^fecerit. Rupsit/or ruperit. Jousit, jousus,/or Jussit, &c
OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 285
CHAPTER XIII.
Of the genuine Orthography to be observed at present.
SUCH was the manner of writing that obtained among the
antients. But as custom has departed in many things from
that antiquity, we must see which is the genuine orthography, to
be observed at present in the use of the Latin tongue.
Orthography may be known either by reason, or by authority.
By REASON, when we consider the analogy of the language
and the origin of words : thus we have shewn in the Preterites,
vol. 1.. p. 257. that sumo makes sumsi and riot sumpsi. Thus we
know that gratia is written with a T, because it comes from
grains ; and that audacia on the contrary is written with a C, be-
cause it comes from audax, ads. And we learn that delicice ought
to be writ with a C, because it comes from delicatus ; that we
ought to write vindico, and not vendico, as it is in most books, be-
cause we say vindicitz, and they both come from vindex.
To reason also we ought to refer the distinction which we find
between certain words, as between ara and hara, between abeo
and habeo, and the like.
By AUTHORITY, when we follow the manner of writing most
usual in good authors, as when we write caussa, caussce, because
thus we find it in antient inscriptions, in Cicero, Virgil, and
Quintilian.
But as there are many words, concerning which the learned
are divided, and others that are written two different ways, for
instance, neglego or negligo, fieri or here, we shall therefore subjoin
an orthographical list of the best authority.
List of some particular words, whose orthography may
be depended upon.
\ ERIUS and ^ETHERIUS ought to be - ARCESSO is better than accerso, be-
** written with an i in the penul- cause it comes from arcio, compounded
tima, according to Aldus ; and" the of ar for ad, and of do, to call. For
antient copies favour it, as also the the r used to be put for d, as we shall
Greek analogy eUjioj, atSl^o?. Yet see presently. This verb hath been
we may write them with an E, as already taken notice of in the Pre-
well because we find it thus written terites. There are some who disr
in sojne antient copies, as because tinguish between these two words, as
they are more consonant to the Latin Charisius, Diomedes, and Agroetius,
analogy, which says, igneus, malleus, who pretend that accerso is taken for
& c - to bring of* to call ; and arcesso for to
ANACHORITA is commonly written accuse, to appeal, or to repel. But Ter.
with an i, and thus we find it in St. Scaurus and Velius Longus reject this
Jerom and in Calepine. Yet it would distinction, affirming that whichever
be better with an E, because it does way it be written, it preserves the
not come from ava^ea^a, recedere facia, same signification, and is never taken
hut from amp^ew, recede. for arcere, to repel, or keep of. And
Appur.Eius, see lower down, Sail. therefore it ought to be wrote according
APSIS or ABSIS, see the Heteroclites. to its real derivation.
ARTUS
286
NEW METHOD.
Book IX.
ARTUS occurs in antient manuscripts
for ARCTUS, close, namw t . though we
cannot condemn the latter, which was ,
first introduced for the sake of distin-
guishing it from artus, a. joint.
AUCTOR. When it comes from au-
geo, there is too sort of doubt but it
ought to take a C, as anclor patrimo-
nii: or auctor, an auctioneer (seethe
Preterites, vol. 1. p. 294.) But when
it is taken for the person who begins,
or is the author of a thing, then there
is some doubt. The antient inscriptions
and MSS. make use of C even in this
sense ; which Vossius in* his Etymolo-
gist approves of. And others give also
this reason, that it is then, quasi ACTOR.
But in French we ought always to write
it without either C or H. AUTEUR,
AUTORITE, &c.
BENIVOUJS occurs in antient wri-
ters for BENEVOLUS. And reason seems
to confirm it, because the E is fre-
quently changed into I in composition.
JSenivolus, says Beda in his Orthogra-
phy, and maiivolus t malificus, just as of
face is formed pacljicus.
BUCINA was said for BUCCINA, ac-
cording to St. Isidorus. And thus we
find it in antient MSS. and inscrip-
tions.
C.BSTUS and CESTUS, which a great
many confound, ought to be distin-
guished, according to Servius. For
the latter is feminine, and signifies the
waist of a new married woman, or of
Venus, and comes from jesvT~v, pun-
gere, because it was marked with little
points. But the former is masculine,
signifying the arms of fencers, arid
comes from ceedo.
Sin ciudo fid'tt pugnam commitlere
\ ccpstu, Virg.
CETERA, because it is said for
2r{a, though we find it with a simple
e in old MSS. and inscriptions.
CECIDI, and not CJECIDI, with <P,
though it comes from c&do, because
the <K is what is changed into i long,
and the first syllable is only an augment.
See the Preterites, v. 1. p. 172.
CCELUM, because it comes from xc?Xoy,
cavum.
CCEPI, to signify / have begun, from
the old verb ccepio. For crpi comeh
from capio. See the Preterites, rule 28,
vol. 1. p. 210.
CONVICIUM ought to be written
with a C and not with a T in the -pe-
nult i ma, either because it comes from
LKUS, according to Festus, or because
it is said for wnvotium, according to
Labeo, by reason it is only a confusion
of sounds and reproaches.
CULCITA is better than CUI,CITRA,
according to Vossius, a mattress, a
feather bed.
DISTRICTUS and DESTRICTUS, are
both good. But Phrigius will have
it that the latter ought ever to be
wrote, having the authority of antient
MSS.
EDEPOL and not Oedefrol, as some
pretend who derive it from ab cede Pol-
lucv, but it is compounded of three
words, me, dens, Pollux, sup. adjuvet.
Therefore edepol is for medepol, in the
same manner as we still say ecastor or
mccaslor, for me Castor, sup. adjuvet.
which are forwis of swearing in use
among the antients.
EPHEBIUM or EPHEBEUM, is the ge-
nuine writing; as in Greek iq>n@iw or
i$nf3eioy, and not Eph&bcum, or Ephe~
b(pum, as some will have it.
FISTULA and ADULESCENS ever occur
with a U in antient copies. But
epistola and ad^lescens are become so
familiar at present, that it would seem
grating to the ear to pronounce them
otherwise.
ETHICA is better than ^ETHICA,
says Vossius, because it comes from
0tfl. Yet there are many who write
it with E, for which reason one may
doubt whether we might not comply
with this custom; just as we may
write scana in compliance with cus-
tom, though it oomes from C-KWYI, as we
shall presently see.
FECUNDUS, FELIX, FEMINA, FENUS,
FETUS, and their derivatives are better
with a simple E, than with a diphthong,
as we find them in antient inscriptions
and MSS.
INCHOO or INCOHO, have been always
the subject of dispute among gramma-
rians. Yet Verrius and Servius are for
the latter.
INCRFBESCO, INCREBUI, is the genuine
writing, and not incrtbresco, increbrui :
just like rubesco, and others. Yet we
say nigresco, which may favour the
other way of writing.
INTERSUNDINIUM. Thus we ought to
write it, according to Victorinus, and
not internundirium.
LACHRYMA or LACRYMA : the latter
is preferable, because it comes from
Xa the augmentative particle, and xu-
/M#C . frigus, tears being only a cold hu-
mour that drops from the brain : hence
Festus takes notice that the antients
wrote dacryna t taking it fr oin
OF ORTHOGRAPHY.
jw, Which is the same as fctxpu?, fr i-
gus.
LEVIS ought to be written with a
simple e, whether it signifies light or
smooth, because the latter comes from
X~8?, and the Greek diphthong n is not
changed into the Latin <E, but into i,
or e Jong. Thus the whole difference
is that levis, smooth, has the first sylla-
ble long by nature, and levis, light, has
the first short. But Itevus, left-handed,
unlucky, is written with an ee, because
it comes from Aai'e;.
MARCIUS NARBO, or M-ARTIUS. Vos-
sius is. for the former, because we find
that the colony was sent to Narbonne,
under the consulate of Marcius and
Porcius : but the latter occurreth in an
antient inscription of the town Of Nar-
bonne, intending perhaps to allude to
the name of Mars, for the greater ho-
nour of its founder.
NE ought to be written with a plain
*, -even when it affirmeth, says Vos-
sius, instead of nte : though Aldus is
for the latter, because it comes from
the Greek v. But all the antients
write it with a simple e: concerning
which see Faernus, Malaspina, and
Lambinus.
NUMUS or NUMIMUS. The former ap-
pears more natural, for it is derived
from vo/nw;, lex, because money was in-
vented to serve as a law in commerce.
But the latter is also received, be-
cause consonants tased frequently to be
doubled.
OCIOR and not OCYOR, readier, be-
cause it comes from the comparative
iwttov, and not from the positive i>xt3f.
OFFER IOR for expecio, and not ope-
rior.
PARCIMONIA with a C, rather
than with an S, as well because it
conies from parco, like alimmia from
alo, as because it is favoured by antient
copies.
PATRICIUS with a C, and not PATRI-
TIUS, because it is derived a patribus
tiendif, according to Velleius, and
others. The same ought to be said of
3/Edilicius, tribunicius, faticius, vovicius,
which should be written with a c, as
Priscian proveth. And this is also the
opinion of Aldus and Vossius.
PENTECONTARCHUS, and not PENTA-
CONTARCHUS, because it comes from
mrrnnovra,, quinquaginta, and the MSS.
favour it. This observation would be
useless, if we did not see a number of
fine editions in which it is written with
an a.
PERLECO is more usual at present,
though the antients said pel/eg'>, in the
same manner as intell'go or intclligo, as
appears by the testimony of Terentiaft,
Scaurus, arid Vossius.
P(BNA with ce and not ce contrary to
the opinion of Mar. Corradus, by rea-
son it comes from irowfi.
P CE N i T u T notwithstanding occurs
sometimes with & ; which may make
us put up with the other, though it is
always best to write it with ce, as we
find it in excellent MSS.
POMGERIOM ought to be writ with a,
since it comes from pnne and mrcruf,
according to Varro. Yet we find pome'
rium in antient authors.
PORCIUS with a C, and not PORTICTS.
For the Porcian family at Rome, of
which Cato was descended, took their
name from the word Porous.
PRJEDIUM with JE and not PRCEDIUM
with at.
PRJELIUM. Thus it is always writ;
and yet Vossius maintains against
Frischlinus, that we ought to write it
prcslium : for since JE cometh from
the AI of the antients, as our OE
from their OI, it appears that they
wrote proilium, as well by the authority
of Capella, who says, sed proilium t
Oinonem, similidque planS exoleverunt,
as by the testimony of Muretus, wh
says that in Plautus it was proilium for
prcelium, where the common editions
have put proilio.
QUATUOR and not QrjATruon, as Aldus
pretendeth ; because it is contrary to
the antient MSS. as well as to etymo-
logy, since it comes from quater.
QUICO.UID, rather than QUIDQUID,
according to Priscian and Victorinus ;
and it appears by Quintilian that this
question had been started so early as
his time, and that a great many were
for writing it with a C : ne interrogart
bis videretur, as he says ; but he him-
self pays no great regard to it; verum,
these are his words, hacjam inter ipscts
ineptiat evanuerunt.
RH^ETIA with ^E, because the Greek?
call these people patrol: though the
old inscriptions vary.
RHYTHMUS, thus we ought to
write it, and not rhjtmut, with a. sin- '
gle aspiration. For it comes from
RIPH^I, and not RIPAI, though
it comes from pwraioi, because the te-
nuis is changed into an aspirate, says
Vossius, and it is confirmed by antient
MSS.
288
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
SJEPIOS, S^PIMENTUM, which
are commonly wrote with a simple e,
occur with a diphthong inaatieiit copies,
as Fieri us, Giffanins, aud Vossius have
observed. And thus they ought to be
wrote.
SALLUSTIUS, and not Salustius. AP-
POLEIUS and not Apule'ms, though it is
.otherwise ia books. But this is contrary
to autient inscriptions.
But we must say LUCILIUS and not
LucUlius, because it is authorized by
the antient copies, and likewise by ana-
logy, for it is the same as Servihus.
SCENA or SC&NA, neither of them is
bad. The former is more agreeable to
analogy, because it comes from <rxmh :
and the second has the authority of au-
' tient copies and of inscriptions, which
seems preferable. Even Varro writes
SCJENA and SC.EPTRUM, though he owns
that Actius wrote scena, and others
sceptrum.
SCRIPSI, NUPSI, &c. with p$, and not
i, though it comes from scribo, nubo,
fce. The reason hereof may be seen
above, chap. 8. n. 1. p. 2G8.
SESCUNX. and SEXCUNX, which Calepin
confounds, ought to be distinguished.
For the former, as Budeus observes in
the beginning of his book de Asse, is
an ounce and a half ; and the latter
signifieth tix ounces, as if it were sex-
unx, the c being only a letter added,
pursuant to what we have already ob-
served, chap. 1 1.
And sexunx, is of the same analogy
as quincunx, septunx, and the rest.
SIDUS, which is often written with a
y, should never be wrote so, this letter
being reserved only for words derived
from the Greek, which is not at all the
case of sidus, whether we take it from
insido, according to Varro, or from
elsewhere.
SILVA ought always to be put with
a simple ?, though it comes from v\v,
and not from Sileo. The same must be
said of Silvanus, JEneas Silvius, Rhea
Silvia. Which is proved by the autho-
rity of antient MSS. and even by the
Greeks, who in translating these words
write, SiXyavoc, itXyo?, 2x|3ta, as may be
seen in Strabo, Plutarch, Suidas, and
others.
SOI,EMNE, rather than solenne, as
it is written by those who derive it
from solus and annus. For the antient
MSS. have solemne, and Sanctius is
strongly for this orthography, because,
as Festus observeth, it comes from
the old word*so/m*, which in the Os-
cian language signified totus, whence
also cometh SOLLERS, according to
the same author. So that the word
solemne does not properly signify ivhat
ii done every year, as they pretend, but
what is done commonly and usually,
or principally and chiefly ; with a so-
lemn and extraordinary apparatus, and
even with a particular sense of reli-
gion, as much as to say 0X0? crsyuvoj,
totus aitgustus & venerandus. Hence we
find, Nuptiarum solemnia an&funerum
solemnia, in Tacitus and other writers.
Cicero understood it thus, when he
said, Tantum igitur nostrum illud so-
lemne servemus, ut neque isthue euntem
sine litcris dimittamus ; our religious, or
our usual custom, &c. and Pliny, Certe
novx nuplK intrantes, etiam solemne ha-
bent pastes eo attingere,, have this re-
ligious or usual custom. And Justin,
lib. 42. c. 4. Sed 'fatum Parthia fecit,
in qua jam quasi solemne est reges parri-
cidas habere, where it is a usual thing
to see kings that have been parricides:
and Horace, Insanire pulas solemma me,
lib. 1. epist. 1. that is, KATA V solem-
nia, according to the custom of the
world. And lib. 4. cd. 11. 5uz dies
jure solcmnis mini sanctwrque pene natnli
proprio. In like manner Virgil in this
passage of the 5th Book of the J2neid,
Annua vota iamen solemnesque ordine
pampas : for solemnes means there only
precellentes, which is perfectly expressed
by the French word solemnel, though
several have been led into a mistake by
this passage, because of the precedent
words, annua vota.
SOLLISTIMUM, according to all the
antient copies, and not solistimum.
SPEL.&UM, a den, ought to be writ-
ten, one would think) with an /E in
the second, because it comes from a-nh-
Xjaiov. Yet in the old copies it is
written with a simple E, which is au-
thority sufficient,
SULFUR, and not sulphur, because
the <J> was never admitted into Latin
words, and ought to be used only in
those of Greek original.
SUBOLES is better than soboles, not
only because we find it written thus in
antient copies, but because it comes
fropa subolesco.
SUBSICIVA, or SUBSECIVA, and not
succissiva. For which we have the au r
thority of the best MSS. and of the
antient inscriptions ; and it is likewise
agreeable to analogy, because it does
not come from succido t but from subseco,
according to Vossius*
TESTER,
OF LETTERS, $c. 289
TJETER, and not teter, according to logy favours it, for in Greek we say
the antient copies. r^cTntJov, though most moderns now
THUS or Tus. See the Genders, vol. write TROPH/BUM.
i, p. 20. ' VINEA and TINEA, are always written
TOFOS, and not TOPHCS, because it is with an e in the penultima, though
not of Greek original. Ursinus mentions his having seen them
TROP*UM, as we find it in antient somewhere with an i.
MSS. and inscriptions : and the ana-
, ,
CHAPTER XIV.
Of some other Remarks on Orthography.
I. Of Words that ought to begin with Capitals.
TH E Romans had no other letters but capitals. But since
small letters have been introduced, it is proper to observe,
where the capitals ought to be placed.
Words .beginning with a capital are therefore;
I. Proper names, as, Moses, Homerus, Cicero, Roma, and evea
adjectives formed of those words, as Mosaicus, Homericus, Cicero-
nianus, Romanus, &c.
Our Saviour's name is likewise wrote often in capitals out of
respect, JESUS CHRISTUS.
II. Nouns that in some measure supply the place of a proper
name ; as Dominus for CHRIST. Poeta for Virgil. As also those
of arts and dignities, as Rhetorica, Astrologia, Rex, Dux, &c.
Those of festivals, Pascha. In short, all those that are intended
to be any way remarkable or to make a figure in discourse. But
you must avoid using too many.
III. Words that begin a new period. Yet when the period
is very short, you may be satisfied with a small letter, as we .shall
shew hereafter.
IV. The beginning of every verse ought also to be distinguished
by a capital.
II. Of those fiords which the Romans expressed by a
Jew letters only.
The Romans generally expressed their proper names by a few
letters only. Some by a single letter, as A for Aldus : others by
two, as CN for Cnceus : others by three, as MAN for Manlius,
and the like, which may be seen in the preceding book of Particular
Observations, chap. 1. n. 1. p. 227.
The inverted letters signified the proper names of women, as
j\[ for Marcia, 3 for Caia, as already hath been mentioned, p.
229. but 3 likewise stood for the syllable con, as ojux for conjux 9
oliberta for conliberta, &c.
^ F by itself made Filius, N. Nepos, M. F. or M. N. Marci
Jilius, Marci nepos, and so for the rest. Q. sometimes stands for
Quintus, sometimes for Qucsstor, and sometimes for Quirites, ac-
cording to Diomedes.
VOL. II. U P. C.
NEW METHOD. Book IX.
P. C. makes Patres Conscripti, R. P. Respublicd, P. R. Populus
Romanus, S. P. Q. R. Senatus Popidusque Ramanus, S. C. Senatus
Consultum, Cos. Consul. Coss. Consules, H. Sestertius, ' a small
sesterce. See what has been said in the preceding book of Ob-
servations, chap. 3. p. 235.
When the same letter is repeated, it frequently is a mark of
the superlative ; thus B. B. is as if it were twice bene, btne y and
for optime, or even for boni, boni, that is, optimi. In like manner
F. F. signi&esfortissimij or Tefiasstmt, P. P. piissimi, L. L. liben-
tissime ,* or locus laudabilis, a remarkable passage in a book, says
Valerius Probus, as the Greeks used to put a ^ to signify ^>5roy or
^f*io-//xoy, and on the contrary a to signify things which they
thought worthy of censure or blame. M. M. meritissimo, or mains,
malus, that is pessimus.
III. Of the right manner of putting Syllables together.
I. When a consonant happens to be between two vowels, it
must always be put with the last, as a-mor t le-go, &c.
II. If the same consonant be doubled, the first shall belong to
the former syllable, and the second to the latter, as an-nus, flam-ma.
III. Consonants that cannot be joined together at the beginning
of a word, generally speaking, are not joined together in the
middle, as af-duus, por-cus. Though there are some examples of
the contrary in Greek, as exfl$ s > hostis.
IV. But consonants that may be joined together in the be-
ginning of a word, ought also to be joined in the middle without
parting them. And Ramus pretends that to act otherwise is com-
mitting a barbarism. Therefore we ought to join
'bdellium.
x//,EX0<z, tabes*
Cneus.
Ctesiphon.
gnatus.
Mnemosyne.
phthisis.
oa.
ne-Ddomas, i
cm.
Pyra-cmon,
en.
te-chna,
ct.
do-ctus,
gn.
a-gnus,
mn.
nhth
o-mnis,
Jj/tlsf(
ps.
scri-psi,
pt.
a-ptus,
S b.
Le-sbia,
sc.
pi-scis,
sjn.
Co-smus,
sp.
a-sper,
sq.
te-squa,
St.
pa-stor,
tl.
A-tlas,
tm.
La-tmius,
in.
JE-tna, j
psittacus.
\ , / Ptolemaeus.
) because we say { ,
scamnum.
smaragdus.
spes.
squamma.
sto.
Tlepolemus.
Tmolus.
o
Exception to this Rule.
Words compounded of prepositions are an exception to this
rale, since in these we must ever separate the compounding parti-
cle, as in-ers, ab-esse, abs-trusus> abdomen, dis-cors, &c.
OF PUNCTUATION.
And the same judgment we ought to form of other compounds,
$sjuris-consullus t aller-uier, amphis-bana, et-enim, &c.
IV. Of some other particular Marks.
When a vowel is dropped at the end of a word, we put over
it a small comma, called apostrophe, as egon\ ain y , viden', nostin',
&c. for eguiie, aisne, videsne, nostine. And this figure, though rare
among the Latins, is very common in French and in Greek.
When we want to separate one vowel from another, we put
two points over them, as aera, to show that they must not be pro-
nounced (Era ; ui a dissyllable, to show that it must not be pro-
nounced vi in one syllable, as in Ovid.
Ne temere in mediis dissoluantur aquis :
where the verse would be good for nothing, were we to read dis*
solvantur in four syllables.
When we want to draw two words into one, we put a small line
between them, as in Virgil ante-matorum. This is what the an-
tients called ty !, unitio. And its figure is sometimes thus"*.
CHAPTER XV.
Of Punctuation.
THE manner of pointing, that is, of making stops or pauses
in discourse, seemeth arbitrary, and to differ in some mea-
sure according to the idiom in which a person writes, and even
according to the particular turn of style which he has formed : yet
since it has some foundation in reason, we shall mention what is
most observable in regard to this subject, according to the practice
now established among most Of the learned.
I. Of Three Sorts of Distinctions.
The distinction observed in discourse, either in speaking or
writing, is threefold.
The first is only a light breathing, or a short pause, which seems
designed only to sustain the voice, and to avoid obscurity and
confusion : this is called xo/x/^a, in Tully incisum. that is, fragment)
or a part Cut off, and is marked by a F^iall c inverted thus ( , )
which we call comma or virgula. The Greeks give it another
.name, Itro^ty^ and the Latins subdistinctio, for a reason we shall
mention hereafter.
The other is a longer pause, that takes in a greater part of the
sentence, but still leaves the mind in suspense, and in expectation
of what follows. This is called pi<rn, media, whence conies the
French word mediation, or x*ov, membrum : and it is marked with
two points thus ( : ) But this pause is subdivided, as we shall show
presently, the one which is the complete member, being marked
with two points ; and the other with a point and a virgula, which
some call a semicolon.
2 Tto
392 NEW METHOD. Book IX.
The third is that which finishes and renders the sentence en-
tirely perfect ; it is called period, and is marked with a single point
at the end of the last word, thus ( , ). The Latins call it ambitus^
or rircuitus ; and the Greeks riXsta fty^rt, perfect distinction.
True it is that the antients did not make use of all these dif-
ferent marks. For having but the point only, if they put it at
the bottom, they made it their comma, which for this reason was
called subdistinctio ; if they put it to the middle of the last word
they made it their o/ow, or media distinctio : and if they put it to
the top, it was their period or perfect sentence, as may be seen
in Diomedes, lib. 2. in Donatus, ed. 1. cap. ult. in St. Isidore,
lib. 1. Orig. cap. 19. And it is likewise the opinion of Alstedius,
Encyclop. Lib. 6. de Grammat. Latina, cap. 19. and of Melancthon
in his grammar. Though Gaza at the end of his grammar says,
that* if they put the point to the middle, they made it their com-
plete sentence ; and if they put it to the top, it was their middle
sentence, that is, their colon or mediation. This is alst) the opi-
nion of Vergara, lib. 4. Gramm. Vossius in his small grammar,
p. 272, says, that if they put the point to the middle of the final
letter, they made it their comma: if they put it to the top, they
made it their colon ; and if they put it to the bottom, their period.
But as he quotes Donatus and St. Isidore, it is likely he meant
something else ; the opinion of these authors being clearly expressed
in the above-mentioned passages.
II. Oj f the Comma.
The use of commas is particularly necessary, when we are to
make several distinctions, either in nouns, as
Grammaticus, rhetor, geometres, pictor, aliptes, Juven.
In like manner,
Nonformosa, sed prudens.
But if there be a copulative conjunction, some are of opinion that
it will not admit of a comma, and others will have it here like-
wise ; as Vir magnus, pius & doctus, or Vir magnus, pius, et doctus.
If the conjoined words are synonymous, there is more reason to
take away the comma, as Doctrind fy eruditione darns atque tf-
tustris.
In verbs, as Hortari, orare, monere non desinit.
Feras, non culpes, quod vitari non potest, Publ. Syr.
In adverbs, as, Serins, ocius, necesse cunctis est mori.
The comma serves also to distinguish the sense and the mem-
bers when they happen to be very short, and to have a particular
connexion, as when Horace says,
Nos numerus sumus, fyjruges consumere nati,
Again,
Quo semel est imbuta recens, servabit odorem
Testa diu, Id.
The comma is likewise necessary to prevent ambiguity, and to
render the sense clear and distinct ; as Summa quidem auctoritate
philosophi,. severe, sane atque honeste, hccc tria genera cortfusa, cogita-
tione distinguunt, Cic. If there had not been a comma after confusa,
it would seem to refer to cogitatione, which is contrary to sense.
Or PUNCTUATION. 293
III. Of the Colon y or Two Points.
The two points denote indeed a complete construction and the
sense already perfect in itself; but which requires nevertheless
something after it to end the sentence. Thus when there are two
members in a sentence, each of which has its particular verb, as
Ante omnia necesse est seipsum astimare: quiajere plus nobis videmut
posse, quam possimus, Senec.
Nee verbum verbo curabis reddere^Jidus
Interpres : nee desilies imitator in arctunt,
Vnde pedem referre pudor vetet, aut operis lex, Hor.
But if the period be long, each member is distinguished by two
points, as when Cicero speaking of people of property, useth
these words, Quce primum (res familiaris). bene parta sit, nul/oque
turpi qu<estu> neque odioso, turn quamplunwis t rnodo dignis, se utitem
prabeat : deinde augeatur ratiune, diligentia, parsimonia : nee libi-
dini potius luxuriaque, quam liberalitati Sf btnejicentia pareat.
Offic. 1.
IV. Of the Full Paint or Period.
The period, as we have already taken notice, ought to com-
clude with a point, shewing that the sentence is complete, Nowr
we may observe two sorts of periods, the one short and the other
somewhat longer. The short, as
Oderunt peccare boni virtutis amore. Hor.
And then if there are many of them collected in one series, they
are distinguished, it is true, by a point ; but this point is followed
only by a small letter, as in Seneca, Non est Jides nisi in sapiente,
apud sapientem snnt ipsa honesta, apud vulgum simulacra rerum Ao
nestarum. And if this happens in verse, as verse must necessarily,
begin with a capital, you must be satisfied with putting two
points, as in the same passage of Horace, whence the above
verse was taken.
Tu nihil admittes in teformidine pcente :
Sit spesfallendi, miscebis sacra prnfanis, lib. 1. ep. 16.
Sometimes even in prose, and in long periods, we may put
either a capital after two points, or a small letter after a point
only, in order to render the sense more distinct, and to increase the
pauses, by a greater variety of punctuation.
For an example of the pointing of long periods, we shall give
the following, which is no less remarkable for the sense, than for
the expression : Si quis est paulo erectior, quamvis voluptate capiatur,
occultaty Sf dissimulat appetitum voluptatis, propter vertcundiam, ex
quo intelligitur corporis voluptatem non satis esse dignam hominis prts-
stantia, eanique contemni Sf rejici oportere : sin sit quispiam qui ali-
quid tribuat voluptati, diligenter ei tenendum esse ejusjruendce modum.
Itaque victus cultusque corporis ad valeiudinem rejerantur, Sf ad vires,
non ad voluptatem. Atque etiam si considerare vo/umus, qua sit in
natura excelle-ntia Sf dignitas : intelligemus quam sit turpe diffluere
luxuria, Sf delicate, ae molliter vivere : quamque honestum parce 9
tontinenter, severe, sobrieque, Cic. OflBc. 1.
V. Of
.KNEW METHOD. Book IX.
V. Of 'the Semicolon, or Point and Comma.
To the three preceding punctuations a fourth is added, namely
the point and comma, called a semicolon ; which denotes a pause
Somewhat longer than the comma, but less than the two points.
As in this example out of Cicero : Etsi ea pcrturbatio est omnium
jrerum t ut SUCB quemque fortunes waxime pceniteat ; nemoque fit guin
ubi vis, quam ibi, ubi est, esse malit ; tamen mi hi dubium n<>n est, guin
hoc tempore, bono viro Homce esse, miserrimum sit, Epist. ad Torq.
And in Gellius, Cogitate cum animis vestris, si quid vox per labo-
rem recte Jeceritis ; labor ille a vobis cito recedet ; benefactum &
tibbis, dum vivetis, non abscedet. Sed si qua per voluptatem neqmter
Jeceritis, voluptas cito abibit ; nequiterjactum illud apud vos semper
tnanebit, Cato apud Gell.
These examples exhibit all sorts of punctuations. But the
point and comma particularly takes place in things opposite or
contrary ; or when we make an enumeration of several parts, as
propria, aliena ; publica, privata ; sacra, profana, &c.
VI. Of the Point of Interrogation and Admiration.
v Interrogations have also the following mark by which they are
signified, thus (?) Pnrumne igitur, inquies, glories relinquemus?
Cic. shall tve then leave but little glory, you will say? But the
Greeks make use of the point and comma for this purpose, r/
We/*; quidjacis?
If the sentence is so far protracted, that the interrogation which
appeareth in the beginning, seems to slacken and lose its force,
then the mark of interrogation is omitted, as here, An tu putas
esse viros bonos, qui amicitias utilitate sua colunt : nihil ad humani-
tatem, nihil ad honestum rcferunt ; nee libenter ea curant, qu& ego
nisi curarem prtzter c&tera, prorsus me tua benevolentia, in qua mag-
nam Jelicitatis mece partem soleo ponere, indignum putarem.
Some make use also of a point of admiration, which is thus
formed ( ! ) as O me perditum ! me ajflictum ! tempora ! O
mores. 1 &c.
[ 295 ]
BOOK X.
OF
PROSODY.
SECTION I.
Of the Quantity of Syllables.
THIS treatise of quantity shows the right measure of syl-
lables, in order either to make verses, or to pronounce prose
in a proper manner, by preserving the tone and accents.
Quantity is therefore, properly speaking, the measure of eack
syllable, and the time we ought to keep in pronouncing it, ac-
eording to which some are called short, others long, and others
common.
The short have this mark ( " ) and are equivalent only to half
a long one.
The long have this other mark ( " ) and ought to last as long as
two short ones.
The common are those which are sometimes short, and at other
times long in verse. We have distinguished them here by this
mark ( " ) which partakes of the other two.
Now this measure of syllables is known either by rules, or by
the authority and reading of poets. The rules are either general
or particular, as we are going to explain them.
But we are first to observe that syllables are long or short, either
by their nature, or by accident, that is on account of the place
where they are put, and the letters that follow them, which is
called Position. Thus the first in patris is short by nature, because
it comes from pater, which first is short. But as it is followed by
two consonants, it may be also long.
On the contrary prce is long by nature, because it is a diph-
thong ; but in compound words, if it precedes a vowel, this sort of
position renders it short, as pr&ire.
Sometimes a syllable is long, both by nature and position, as
ouster.
But though it may be said that it is by position one vowel is
short before another, just as it is long when it precedes two con-
sonants ; yet generally speaking we use this word position, only
to signify the latter sort of long syllables.
RULES
296 NEW METHOD. Book X.
RULES of the Quantity of Syllables.
General RvJes.
RULE I.
Every syllable formed by contraction is long.
EXAMPLES.
AS often as two syllables are joined or contracted
into one,, this syllable so formed by contraction
is long ; as cogo for ctfago or ctinago ; coperuisse for
cooperuisse, Lucr. ml for mhil ; tibtcen for tibiicen ; It
for Tit ; mt for nuhi ; vemem for *cehemem t Hor. and
the like.
ANNOTATION.
s&WE place this rule the first, because it is the most general,
and may serve for an introduction and inlet to a great
many others. For example, a diphthong is properly no more
than the union and contraction of two syllables, or of two voweli
into one syllable, as mitstz for musai, &c. Thus Mnestheus a dis-
syllable for Mnestheus a trisyllable ; Orpheus for Orpheus, and
the like have the last long ; because these two syllables are con-
tracted into one by a Syneresis, of which we shall have occasion to
peak hereafter.
In like manner allus is long, because it comes from aluus ; am-
%ages* because it comes from avnhe and ago, from whence was first
formed ambeages, and afterwards ambages ; bigee, trigee, quadrigce,
because they come from bytigie, hijuga, quadrijugce, &c. bobvs
or bubus, because it is instead of bovibus s junior, because it is
^instead of juvmior ; norms instead of novenus / malo instead of ma
([or magis} volo ; stiperidium instead of stipipendium ; mdago because
it comes from induago composed of indu for in and ago. And a
multitude of others ; which we shall take notice of hereafter.
For we must remember what has been said in the preceding
treatise of letters, which ought to be considered as the foundation
of this of quantity ; that the antients used formerly to write the
long syllables with two vowels, as veenit for venit long in the
preterite, instead of vcnit short in the present: for which reason
the former hath twice the time or measure of the latter.
But we must distinguish between a syllable cut off by Syncope
and that which is joined to another by Syneresis, as for instance
smi h<,mo for 'semi homo ; smi animis for semi anintis : for whatever
5s cut off and taken away, can have no manner of influence on
the next syllable, which therefore remaineth, always in its natural
state. This we shall make appear on sundry occasions in the
sequel.
RULE
O F Q U A N T I T Y. 297
RULE II.
Of Diphthongs.
1. Hence all diphthongs are long.
2. Except that prae is short, when it precedes
a vowel.
EXAMPLES.
1. Therefore diphthongs are always long; asfoe-
aurum, turns ; because they are in some mea-
sure a contraction or union of two vowels into one
syllable.
2. Yet the preposition prce is short in composition,
when followed by another vowel; zspraesttpraustus,
pr&ire.
Jamque novi pr&euut fasces, nova purpurafulget.
ANNOTATION.
Statius however made it long, having regard to the nature 6f
the diphthong, and not to the subsequent vowel.
Cum vacuus domino praeiret Arion, Th. 6.
The first in MaTotis is doubtful.
. Et Moeotica tetlits^ Virg.
Longior antiquis visa Moeotis hycms, Ovid.
Which is owing to this, that some considered the nature of the
diphthong, and others the position or place it held, being before
another vowel, pursuant to the next rule. And the same may be
said of rhomphcea, and rhomphcealh.
We find tne first of&nigma, htzresis, and sphara, short in Pru-
dentius, as that of h&morrhois in Fortunatus. Also the second of
catachumenus in the same Fortunatus, and that of solcecismus in
Ausonius. Which is by no means to be imitated, since it pro-
ceeds only from the corruption of the language, when, as we
have observed in the treatise of letters, they wrote the E simple
instead of BL and CE, because they no longer pronounced the
diphthong in those words, but the E only,
RULE III.
Of a Vowel before another Vowel.
3. A vowel before another vowel is short.
%. But E between two I's is long.
3. I ITI the tenses of f 10 without R, is short.
4. liis in the genitive is doubtful ;
5. But alius is long.
6. And alterjus short.
EXAM*
$98 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Ex A M P L E S.
1. A vowel followed by another vowel is short; as
justitta, dulcia, Deus.
2. But E is long in the genitive and dative of the
fifth declension, when it comes between two I's ; as
diet, speciei. This happens to all nouns of this de-
clension, except these three, Jidei, spei, r&i, which have
not the E between two ii.
3. I info is long in those tenses that have not an
R, namely fJo, fiam, fiebam. Where there is an R,
the I is short; as jfierem, fieri.
4. I in the genitives in i'us is doubtful, as umus,
illiuSj ipsius, totius, utrius.
5. Alms hath I long in the genitive.
6. Altenus hath I short. Which gave occasion to
this verse in Alstedius.
Corripit alterius, semper producit alms.
ANNOTATION.
Solius, is always long in approved authors. Alterulrius and Neu-
trms, are almost always long, though utrius be common.
The penultirna is likewise long in aulai^ terrai, and other antient
genitives. As also in Cai t Pompei. And 'tis for this very reason
that the nominatives in ejus, or eja, make E long, PompciuS) Fon-
teius ; Aquifcia, elegeia : and that the genitive and dative of the
fifth have it also long. For they used to say dieii, specieii, &c. and
this they even did in regard to other nouns of this declension,
where the e is not between two j. We meet with reii in Pruden-
tius, Jideii in St. Paulinus, as well as in Fortunatus and other
Christian poets, concerning which, see also the treatise of Letters,
p. 265.
Fieret hath the first long in Terence, Adelph. a. 1. sc. 2.
Injurium est, nam si esset, unde id fleret,
Faceremus.
Which proceeds undoubtedly from this, that heretofore, as we
have observed in the Remarks, p. 117. they used to say feirem,feiri t
as audeirem, audeiri, and afterwards they transposed Jeirem into
Jierem. Hence Priscian says that inhere, there is a resolution of
one long into two short.
The first is long in then, but doubtful in o'lve ; as also in Dtana,
because this word being formed of Dca Jana (for Janus signifies
the sun, and Jana the moon, according to Macrobius and Varro)
some have considered it as a word formed by Syncope of two let-
ters, Dea-na, or D-iana, where the first is short by nature, as pre-
ceding another vowel : while others have considered it as a word
which at first only dropped the o, so that it remained Deiana, of
which
OF QUANTITY. 299
which was afterwards formed Diana, the diphthong el t as may be
leen in the treatise of Letters, being frequently changed into *
long.
Before we go any further, we must say something in regard to
Greek words, because they have oftentimes a great many things
that seem contrary to the foregoing rule.
OF GREEK WORDS.
Of those which are written with Long or Short Vowels.
In regard to Greek words, the knowledge of their quantity
ought to be derived from the language itself. For those which
have an 17 or u in Greek are long, and such as have an o or an c
are short.
Thus we see that ariihmtlicn> psalttrium must have the antepe-
miltima long, because in Greek we write ^iQ^rtK^, 4"*fiiov.
We see that Troes and Troades have the first long, because in
Greek they are written with an u : we see that Dtipkobus has the
first long and the penultima short, because we write <fo/oor.
We see likewise that in Thermodontis the second is long, because
in Greek it is an <y, as we find it in Apoll. 2. Argon.
ewi Sc fo/xa e^wSovro?.
Hence in Virgil,
Quales Threicia cumjlumina Thermodontis
Pulsant, &c. TEn. 11.
It is a mistake to read Thermodoontis ; as Pierius hath observed,
and Vossius demonstrated, against those, who wanting to avoia
the spondaic verse have corrupted the quantity : which has hap-
pened also in other places, as we have made appear when speak-
ing of potestur, p. 116. And hereby we see likewise that there
is no necessity for admitting of what Servius saith, that Thermo*
don is a Syneresis instead of Thermodoon.
Of those which are variously writ.
When a word is variously written in Greek, the quantity also
varies in Latin verse. Thus the first is common in Eos, Eous, &c.
because in Greek we write eus, and %u<; : luos and riwor. Which Ser-
vius seems not to have sufficiently observed, when he attributes
the making of the first short in Eous to a pure licentia poetica.
The accusative in ea coming from nominatives in eus* have ge-
nerally the e short, as Orphea, Satmonea : but sometimes they have
it long, as Ilionea-, Idomtnea, which they seem to borrow of the
lonians, who write these words with an y.
Of the Three Common Vowels.
In regard to the three common vowels, a, /, v, it would lead
BS into a long discourse to treat of them with any exactness. The
most general remark we can make on this head is that the nouns
ending in wi's, have generally the penultima long, as Nais, Lais.
JL llw
SOtf NEW METHOD. Book X.
The terminations aon or Tow have also the penultima long; as
JMachaon, Lycaon, Amphion, Pandlon, &c. as also the compounds
of \aos, Menelaus, Archelaus, Nicolaus, Charilaus.
But these rules are not always certain : for Phfton, Deucalion,
and a great many others, have the penultima short. The penultima
is doubtful in Orion, Gerion, and in Nereides.
Of Words that have a Diphthong in Greek.
Diphthongs must be always long. Hence we see so many
Greek nouns that have the e or i long in Latin, because in Greek
they are written with /, as Cassiopta, Centaurea, Deiopea, Galatea,
Medea, &c. Also Basitius, Darius, Clio, Elegia, Iphigeriia, Anti-
ochia, and such like.
Cause of the Deviation in Greek Words from the fore-
going Rules.
The Latins nevertheless have frequently deviated from these
rules in regard to Greek words, and for three different reasons.
The first, because taking these words as if they had entirely lost
one vowel of the diphthong, they ceased to consider them as long,
but made them pass for short or common. Hence it comes that
chiragra hath always the first short, according to Vossius, though
in Greek we write ^^y^x. And hence Virgil hath:
Vos fy Cyclopea saxa, JEn. 1.
though in Greek it is xuxXwTTE/a. And for the same reason Chorea,
platea, and Malea, a proper name, and some others, have the pe-
nultima common. To these we may also join Academia, though
it is more frequently short, because in Greek it is more frequently
written with an /, than with the diphthong e/.
The second is that they oftener paid more regard (especially in
the latter ages, when the Greek was but little known) to the ac-
cent, than to the orthography in regulating the quantity. Thus
they put eremus, poesis, idolum, and such like with the penultima
short, though in Greek we write eg-n^os, iroi^yts, I'^&Aov, &c. (where
the penultima is long) only because the accent is on the antepe-
nultima. This has been particularly the practice of ecclesiastic
"writers, who neither in this respect, nor in whatever relates to
poetry, have been so exact, as to serve fr any rule to go by.
Thus in the hymn to the Holy Ghost, the word Paractetus hath
the penultima short, though in Greek it be written with an t,
TlotgaHXyTaf, consolator, which has been owing entirely to the ac-
cent on the antepenultima. And thence proceeds the error of
those who in the Church service have generally wrote Paraclitus
with an i, into which they were also led by the bad pronunciation
of ^hose who sound vt like i, though to say the truth, this word
is neither Greek nor Latin.
The third is that the Romans have sometimes appropriated
the Greek words to themselves in such a manner, as to render*
them entirely conformable to the analogy of their own language.
Thus they said crcpidas, the penultima short, as it came from,
crepitum 9
OF QUANTITY. 301
crepitum, whereas according to Gellius it comes from
And in Eanius we find Hectorem long, because he looked upon it
in the same mariner as pictorem, and the like.
But there are still some words whose quantity is disputed, which
it will be more proper to throw into a separate list at the end of
this treatise, in order to proceed to other rules.
RULE IV.
Of a Vowel long by Position.
A vowel is long, zvhen followed by two consonants.
EXAMPLES.
A vowel is long, whenever it is followed by two
consonants, or by a double letter equivalent to two
consonants, which is called POSITION; as at plus,
Deum cole. Carmen, sapiens, Sec.
Now the double letters are X, Z, as axis, Gaza,
apex.
ANNOTATION.
For a syllable to be long by position, there must be at least one
of the consonants in the very syllable lengthened. For if they
are both in the next, this does not, generally speaking, make it
long; asfrigorejrondes; cequvra Xerxes ; scepe stilum vertas, &c.
Yet it sometimes happens otherwise, as
Ferte citijerrum, date tela, scandite muros, Virg.
Which Catullus and Martial seem particularly to have affected,
as it is very common in Greek.
RULE V.
Of a Mute and Liquid. 1
1. Whenever a mute is followed by a liquid in
the same syllable, the preceding short vowel
becomes common in verse;
2. But remains short in prose.
EXAMPLES.
What has been hitherto said, relates to that sort
of position, which they call firm and unchangeable.
But there is still another called weak and change-
able, which is when after one of these seven letters
B, C, D, F, G, P, T, distinguished by the name of
mutes, because they have only a kind of obscure
sound, there follows one of these two, L or R, which
are called liquids or gliding letters. For in that case
the
302 NEW METHOD. Book X.
the preceding vowel, which by nature is short, he-
conies common in verse; that is, it may be put either
long or short ; as
Et primo similis volucri > mo,v vera volucris, Ovid.
Nox ten^bras profert, Phoebus fugat inde tenebras, Id.
Omne solumforti patria est, mihi patria ccelum.
The same may be said of refto, repko, poples, locu-
, and the like.
2. But in prose this position of a mute and liquid,
never lengthens a syllable by nature short ; therefore
it would be wrong to say for example, locuples, tene-
br<, the accent on the penultima, when it should be
on the antepenultima.
ANNOTATION.
These liquids have also the same force in Greek words, as Cy-
clops, Pharetra. But besides L and R, this language hath the
liquids M and N ; as Tecmessa, Cygnus, Progne 9 &c.
The position is weakened in Greek, when the vowel is followed
by mn, or qd, or pt t whence Martial took the liberty to make the
second short in smaragdus, lib. 5. epigram. 11.
, Sardonychas, smaragdos, adamantas, iaspidas uno.
But we are to take particular notice of two conditions necessary
for this weak and changeable position. The 1. the mute and liquid
must be both in the same syllable. The 2. the syllable we want
to make common in verse, namely that immediately preceding
these letters, must be short by nature.
Hence the first syllable in obruo will be ever long, and not com-
mon, because the first condition is wanting, the br not being in
the same syllable, for it comes from ob and ruo ; the same may
be said of obtueor, quamobrem, &c.
Again, the first is ever long in acris, atri, matris, fratris, for
want of the second condition, because they come from acer, ater,
mater 9 frater 9 whose first syllable is long by nature. We must say
the same of ambulacrum, candelabrum, delubrum, lavacrum, simula-
crum, salubre, volutabrum, which are long by nature, a circum-
stance that has not been always attended to by Christian poets.
Vossius further observeth that this kind of position of mute and
liquid is so weak, that we ought not easily to make use of it, for
the purpose of lengthening a syllable short by nature, without
having some antient authority ; and he adds for example, that he
would not choose to make the penultima long in genitrix.
Now the weakness of this sort of position is owing to the in-
equality of two consonants, because the liquid gliding away much
nimbler than the mute, to which it is. joined in the pronunciation,
it drags the mute in some measure along with it, or produces an
inequality, in consequence whereof the preceding syllable is not
sufficiently sustained, as it is when there happen to be two other
consonants,
303
consonants, for ins
then there is no in
is before, as qrs, a
lowing mute : or
abluo, for then t,
such force. Thi
ciation, though
Whether I be,
To the doub
wise the I, win
ce astra, or even two liquids, as terra ; for
aality in the consonants : or when the liquid
,;, for in that case it is sustained by the fol-
short when they are in a different syllable, as
liquid does not draw the mute after it with
e aiitients must have perceived in the pronun-
are hardly sensible of it at present.
metimes a Double Letter, and V some 1 -
times a Liquid.
letters by us mentioned, grammarians add like-
it happens to be between two vowels, because,
say they, it thA makes the preceding vowel long by position, as
major, rejicio,fo* But this error hath been sufficiently refuted in
otters, chap. 6. num. 2. p. 264. where we proved
lable in those words was not long by position, but
ecause the antients pronounced it as a diphthong.
,tbe vowel before i must be ever short, as we see in.
fyurando, antejacit, btjugus, and others,
ewise that the V after Q is a liquid consonant, be-
e the first in aqua and the like words, would be
lave also given an answer to this in the same treatise,
,264.
have been upon the general rules, we must now
as are particular, and first of all mention a word
ivatives and compounds, because they relate to
the treatise of
that the first
by nature, a
For otherwis
semtjacens,j
They say
cause other
long. But
chap. 6. n.
Hitherto
come to su
concerning
middle syfiab
.
WE shall c
regard to deriv
general rules ab
neral they folio
and animosus ha
animus, whose tw
two first in natural
they are long also;
because it comes fro
Thus the second is
its being short in virgi
aratrum, ambulacrum,
ambulatum^ volutatum :
is
tent ourselves with giving an Annotation ill
es, because it is very difficult to lay down anj
the matter. Yet we may observe that in ge-
,the nature of their primitive. Thus animare
the two first short, because they come from
rst are short also. And on the contrary the
re long, because it comes from natura where
nd the first syllable of this word is long,
atutn.
ort in virgineus and sanguineus, because of
and sangmni. The penultima is long in
tabrurn, because it is the same in aralum,
but the first is common in liquidus, because
m
sometimes it is derived fW>m liqueo, the first short ; and at other
times from the verb liquor, jvvhich hath its first syllable long, when
of the third conjugation. For although we say liquatur the first
short, we likewise say liquitttK the first long : but the noun liquor,
, liquor, hath always the first short.
Exceptions
304 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Exceptions to the preceding Rule.
There are a great many derivatives SHORT, though their pri-
mitives be long; as dux, duds, from duco >'/ dicax from dico ; sopor
from sopio ; sagax from sagio / ditto from dis, ditis ; fides from
fido, though Tully derives it from facto, quia id jit quod dicitur :
but there is more analogy in deriving it fromjido, just as in Greek
ir/r comes from wsftu, from whence Jido is also derived according
to Vossius. Add to these molestw from moles, and several others
which may be learnt by use.
There are other derivatives LONG, though they come from
short primitives; as vox, vocis, from voco ; rex, regis, and regula,
from rego ; tegula from tego; sedes from sedeo ; macero from macer ;
humor from humus ; hum anus from homo ; secius from secus ; male*
dicentior, the third long from maledicus short, and others which
may be learnt by the use of authors.
But what is most remarkable on this head, is that the deriva-
tives do not follow their primitive, when they drop or add a con-
sonant. For as the first in rettulit is long, because it reduplicates
the t, though it comes from refero the first short : so the following
have the first short, though they come from long primitives, be-
cause they lose a consonant, as disertus from dissero, farina from
f arris ; curulis from curro, ofella from offa ; mamilla from mamma ;
tigillum from lignum ; sigiUum from signum ; and the like.
There are even some that do not follow the analogy of their
nearest primitive, but of another more distant, as fatuus the first
short, which does not follow fari the first long, but q>a,u, from
whence cometh p y^i, dico : as lucerna the first short, which does
not follow the quantity of lux, but of TJ? AWOJ?, whence lux itself
is derived by contraction instead oflucis : as vadum, the first short,
which does not follow the quantity of vado, the first long, but of
@aSu, from whence comes vado as well as /3a/a/ : as likewise wofo,
which does not follow the quantity of the supine notum, the first
long, but of vow, from whence comes, volcrxw, vw<rxw, yitua-Ku, and
from thence gnosco or nosco. And so for the rest.
OF COMPOUND WORDS.
THE quantity of compound words is frequently known by that
of the simple, and the quantity of the simple by that of the com-
pound, which boys will easily discern, provided they are accus-
tomed betimes to the right pronunciation of Latin. For it is the
same quantity in lego and per lego, in Itgi and perlegi. As also in
probus and improbus ; in scribo and adscribo ; in venio, adwnio, ad-
vena : and the like.
And this quantity is still preserved, when the vowel comes to
change as in eligo, seligo, taken from lego : thus from cado comes
6c<;ido ; and from ccsdo, occido : from Icedo, allido t collido : from
6udio, obtdio, obedis, &c.
But the following are short, though their primitive be long:
the compounds of dico ending in dicus ; as camidicus t veridicus,
&c.
OF QUANTITY. 305
^cc. dejero mdpefiro, fromjuro : cognitun and agnttum, from notum,
which are shortened by the analogy of simple polysyllables in
itum ; as taciturn, bibitum, &c. nihilum t from ne arid hitum ; irinu~
ba and pronuba, from nubo ; but the antepenultima in connubium is
common. For in Virsil we find cotwubia, the antepenultima long :
and we likewise find it short in connubio, connubiis, unless we chuse
to make them trisyllables.
Connubio jungam stabili, propridmque dicabo, 1 JEn.
The second is long in imbvcillus, though b&culus hath the first
short ; and the third is short in sonisopitus taken from sopio, the first
long. The participle ambitus hath the penultima long, contrary
to the nature of the supine am/ntum, as also of these verbal nouns
ambitus and ambitio. Yet Lucretius makes ambitus also short in,
the participle ; for which reason Scioppius and Vossius look upon
it as common, because this word is compounded of ambe and itus 9
even according to Varro; so that when the i is long, it comes
from the diphthong ei t ambitus for ambeitus (as we say ambages
long, from ago short, because it is said for arnbeages) ; and when
it is short, it conforms to the nature of its supine itum, as the
others aditus, exitus, initus t obitus, subuus* which are always
short, because they are formed without any appearance of contrac-
tion.
Now ambe comes from ap.$i 9 of which was first formed ambi, af-
terwards ambe, the p being changed into b, just as in ambo taken
from i*.$u : as may be seen in the Treatise of Letters, p. 270.
RULE VI.
Of divers Compounding Particles.
1. A, DE, SE, DI, are long, when joined to
verbs or nouns.
2. Yet DI is short in disertus and diremi,
3. Re is short except in refertfrom the noun res.
EXAMPLES.
1. All those particles are long in composition,
amitto, deduco, erumpo, dtripio, separo, and the like.
<2. Di is short in these, dirimo, diremi, diremptum,
disertus y tiiserti) &c.
ANNOTATION.
De sometimes preserveth its long quantity before another
Towel ; as
Deest servitio plebes hoc ignis egentis, 9tat.
Which deserves more to be remarked than followed. For ia
general it is either made short, Dona rfthinc auro gravia, Jn. 3. or
it is joined with the following vowel m tbe same syllable, Deest
jam terra JugGi ^En. 10,
VOL. II.' X 3. R*
306 NEW METHOD. Book X.
3. Re is short in composition, as re'deo; refero, r$-
fers ; refert, referre, to tell or relate.
But refert, it behoveth, it concerneth, it is useful, is
long, because it does not come from the particle re,
but rather from the noun res.
Prczterea nee jam mutari pabula refert. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
The poets, in order to lengthen the particle re in composition,
do sometimes reduplicate the following consonant, as relligio, ret-
'tulit. Though we must not imagine that they did it always, as
some pretend, not considering that the chief rule of poetry is the
ear, which would be sometimes offended with such reduplications.
Hence in revolvo, reverto, the consonant is never reduplicated,
because it is contrary to the nature of this V, which perhaps at
that time was not a consonant.
Nor is the consonant repeated in rafeo, redoleo, and the like, be-
cause the D is only a letter that was borrowed already to prevent
the hiatus and meeting of vowels. There are also some other oc-
casions on which it is not practised.
RULE VII.
Of the other Prepositions.
1. The other prepositions are short except pro.
2. But pro is also short in the following com-
pounds ; profiteer, protervus, proficiscor,
procella, procus, profanus, profecto, pro-
fundus, pronepos, profari.
3. In the following, pro is doubtful, propello,
propulso, procurro, propago.
EXAMPLES.
1. The other prepositions being short by nature,
are also short in compound words; as adimo, abest,
aperio ; coercuit, ctimedo, obumbrant, omitto, anhelat, Vn-
offensus, superesse, subeunt, peragit.
We must except pro, which is long; produco, pro-
fero, prdveho, profugio, &c.
2. But in the words mentioned in the rule, pro is
short, as protervus, prqfecto, &c. and some others
which use will shew : as likewise those words where
pro is the Greek preposition T^O, which signifies ante,
as
OF QUA'NTITY. , 507
as propheta, propontis, and the like; though sometimes
the Greek pro is long, conforming to the Latin ana*
-.-
3. In some compounds pro is common, as propello,
propulso, propago, as, a verb; and prdpago, inis, a
noun ; procurro, procumbo, prof undo, &c.
RULE VIII.
Of Words compounded without a Preposition.
In compound words A, O, are generally long ;
and E, I, U, are generally short.
'But compounds formed by contraction's also the
compounds ofdie$ 9 ubi,and ibi, have i long.
EXAMPLES.
In compound words two things may be considered,
the former and the latter part. As to the latter part
there is very little difficulty about it, because it is ge-
nerally just as it would be out of composition. Thus
the second in dedecus is short, because it comes from
decus, the first short. Abutor hath the second long,
because it comes from utor. the first long. But it is
i t_7
more difficult to know the quantity of the former part
of the compound.
Nevertheless in general it may be said, that these
two vowels, A, O, are long; and that these other three
E, I, U, are commonly short. But we must inquire
into this more particularly.
. A is long in the former part of the compound, as
quare, qucipropter, quacunque, quatenus. Yet there are
some short, which may be learnt by use, '^htxamrter*
* V */ /
catdpulta.
^ E is short, whether in the first syllable, as mfas, m-
JastuSyKe/anduSytitfarius, trcdccim, trecenti, nVqueo, equi-
dem, mque : or in the second, as valcdico, madZjacio,
tremefacio, according to Virgil (though Lucretius and
Catullus make E also long in this sort of words): or
in the third, as hujuscemodi, &c.
The following are excepted, having the first long,
sedecim, nequam y nequitia, t2equaquam > nequicquam, ne-
NEW METHOD. BookX.
quando, memet, mecum, tecum, secum. As also these,
which have the second long, veneficus, videlicet.
I is short whether in the first syllable, as biceps, tri-
ceps, fricolor, tricolor, bwium, tfivium, siquidtm : or in
the second, as agricola, aliger, arttfex, caussidicus, fa-
fiducus, omriipottns, totidem, uriigenitus, uriiversus, Sec.
We must except those where the I changes in de-
clining, as quidam, quwis, quilibet, qualicumque, quan-
ftvis, umcuique, retpublic<E.
Those also which cotne from a contraction, as 7/-
cet, scilicet, bigg, quadngte, prtdie, postrtdie, tibJcenrfoT
tibiicen, Sic.
The compounds of dies, as bJduum, trtduum, mert-
dies ; but quctidie is doubtful.
The following have also I long, trlccni, trtcesimus,
stquis, and tdem masculine. As also liimirum, ibidem,
utique, utrobique, ubJvis : but ubicumque is commonly
the same as ubi.
O is generally long, as alioqui, introduce, quand'dque,
quandocumque, utrdbique, and others.
We must except however, htidie, quandoquidem,
quoque.
Also the compounds of two nouns, as Timothem,
sacrdsanctus, Sec.
U is short, whether in the first syllable, as ducenti,
dupondium ; or in the second, as quadrupes, camufex,
Trojugena.
But genuflecto, cornupeta, usuvenit, usucapit, are
still doubtful among grammarians ; though the surest
way, in my opinion, is to make u long on those oc-
casions, because it is an ablative that remains intire
in its natural state.
ANNOTATION.
Jlere we may be asked whether the second is long in paricida /
mairicida, because we find them long in Ausonius.
Ut paricidae regna adimat Didio> De Sev. Imp.
Matricida Nero proprii vim pertulti ensis.
^Though in regard to the latter, there are some who read matri-
quecida Nero, &c.
On the contrary we find that paricida is short in Horace.
Telegonijuga paricidae, Od. 29. lib. 3.
]But as paricida is a Syncope for parenticida, being taken not only
for
OF QUANTITY. 309
for one who kills his father, but likewise for a person that violates
the duty he owes to his parents and to his country, we may say
that Horace has made it short, merely by considering the dropping
of the syllable, and leaving the others in their natural quantity :
whereas Ausonius must have considered this word as formed by
contraction, and therefore he made it long.
OF PRETERITES AND SUPINES.
RULE IX.
Of Preterites of Two Syllables,
1. Preterites of two syllables have the former
long, as egi.
. But the following are short, bibi, fidi, tuli,
cledi, stti, scidi.
EXAMPLES.
1. Preterites of two syllables have the former long,
as egi, veni vJdi, vJci.
2. Yet the preterites of the following verbs are
short; bibo, bibi; Jindo,fidi; fero, tuli; do^dldr^ sto,
steti ; scindOj scidi.
ANNOTATION.
Some have been for adding lam to the above verbs, because of
this verse in Virgil.
Luminis effbssijluidum lavit inde cruorem.
But lavit is there the present tense, as well as lavimus in Hor. lib.
1. sat. 5. coming from lavo, lavis ; hence we meet with laverc,
and in the passive lavi, to be washed, in Nonius.
ABsclDir is long in Lucan, lib. 6.
Hie cumam l&va morienti abscldit ephebo*
And in Martial, lib. 4.
Abscldit vultus ensis uterque sacros.
Which sheweth that this preterite was heretofore doubtful, un-
less we choose to say that it comes then from abscido, compounded
of abs and ccedo. But this verb being obsolete, the surest way if
to pronounce the above preterite short in prose, abscidit.
Now this rule of the preterites of two syllables holds alao good
for the plural ; forjierunt,Jlarunt, norunt, and the like, have al-
ways the former long.
But we tindjuverint the former short, once in Catullus.
RULE X.
Of Preterites with a Reduplication.
J. The two first syllables in preterites that have
& reduplication are short.
. But
310 NEW METHOD. Book X.
y% -T> i i 7 7 - 1* 7 -i
2. But the second in pepedi, is long, as also in.
cecidi from credo.
EXAMPLES.
Y'l - ! -r^ . .1 , ,.. . . ,
1. Preterites with a reduplication have the |two first
syllables short, as didici from disco; cecini from cano;
tetigi from tango ; cecidi from cado.
2. Eutpedo hath the second in pepedi long, as also
ccedo in cecidi.
Qui nullum forte cecidit. Juv.
ANNO T A T I O N.
In regard to the other preterites, if it be a syllable that does not
depend on the increase, they follow the quantity of their present,
as colo, colui, the first short.
Except posui, the first short, from, pono, whose former is long.
And genui, which followed its old verb geno ; as likewise potui,
which cometh from potis -sum.
Except also dwm, divtsum, the second long, from -divido, the
second short.
But if it be a. syllable that depends on the increase, the rules
thereof shall be given hereafter. Yet we may observe at present,
tha' all preterites,, either of two or more syllables, ending in vf,
have ever the penultirna long, as amavi,Jlcmj quivi, audivi, &c,
RULE XL
Of Supines of Two Syllables.
1. All supines of two syllables are long.
2. Except those of eo, reor, sine, do, ruo, sero 3
lino
3. The supines of queo, and sto, are short.
4. The supine of cio is long, and that of cieo
is short.
EXAMPLES.
1. Supines of two syllables, as well as preterites,
are long ; as notum or notus from nosco ; wsum, or
v7sus from video ; motum from moveo.
. But the six following verhs have their supines
short; eo, itum;. reor, rdtus sum ; sino, situm ; do, da-
tum, rwo'formerly had rutum, from whence comes di-
rutum, erutum, obrutum ; sero, satum ; lino, lifum.
f 5- These two have also their supines short, queo,
qmtum ; sto, sidtum ; but staturus, though derived
from thence, hath the former lorig.
4. Cio,
OF QUANTITY. 311
4. do, cis, cm, citum, clre, the former long. Cieo,
cis, civi, Citum, the former short.
Excitum ruit ad portus, $ littora complent. Virg.
Bacchatur quails commotis excita sacris. Id,
ANNOTATION.
.
Of the Supine STATUM.
It appears that STATUM is short by the substantive status,
liujus status ; by the adjective status, a, urn ; and by the verbal
noun statio.
Hie status- in ccelo .multos permansit in annos. Ovid.
Musa quid a fastis non stata sacra petis ? Id. ..
Campus, fy apricis statio gratissima mergis. Virg.
Hence its compounds which change a into i t make this i short in
the supine, as pr&stitum ; hence also the vei'b statuo, which seems
to be derived from this supine, hath the first short.
Urbem quam statuo vestra est Virg.
Yet the participle staturus, hath the former long.
Tune res immense placuit statura labore. Lucan.
As also its compounds.
Constatura/zaV Megalensis purpu rn centum. Mart.
And this made Priscian believe that the former in the supine sta-
turn was also long, though what hath been above mentioned,
proves the contrary. Nevertheless we may say, I fancy, that it.,
was heretofore common, since we still see in the compounds, that
in those which retain the a it is long, though in such as change
the a into i, it is short.
Non praestata sibi prastat natura, sed units, St. Prosper.
Whence also it comes that stator is short in Prudentius, and long
in Ovid. And statim, which is derived from stando, according to
Vossius, is long in Avienus and Alcim. Avitus, but short in/ Ca-
tullus, whose authority is preferable in this respect.
Verum si quid ages, statim jubebo, Epigram. 33.
Of CITUM and SCITUM.
CITUM is long when it comes from do, because it follows the
fourth conjugation; as it is short when it comes from cieo t because
it follows the second. But citus signifying quick, lively, active, is
short ; whereas for divisus, it is long : as erctum citum, erctum non
citum. See Servius on the 8th book of the ^neis.
SCITUM is ever long, whether it comes from scio, or scisco. Sci-
tus, from scio, signifies handsome, pretty, well made, graceful ; Scitus
puer, Ter. Coming from scisco, it signifies ordained and decreed,
from whence we have plebiscitum, a decree of the people. Plaututf
plays with those two words in his Pseud, act. 2. sc. 4-.
Ps. Ecquis is homo scitus est ? CH. Plebiscitum non est scitius.
Where Lambinus is evidently mistaken, in saying that scitum had
the first syllable long in plebi$citum 9 but that every where else it
was short.
RULE
312 NEW METHOD. Book X.
RULE XII.
Of the Supines of Polysyllables.
1. The supines of polysyllables in UTUM are
long.
2. As are also those in ITUM, when they come
from a preterite in IVI.
3. But all others in ITUM are short.
EXAMPLES.
1. The supines of polysyllables in UTUM are
long, as solutum from solvo, solvi ; indutum, from in-
duo, indui; argutum from arguo, argui.
2. The supines in ITUM are also long, when they
come from a preterite in IVI ; as qu&sttum from qu&-
ro, qu&sivi ; cupJtum from cupio, cuptvi ; petttum from
peto, pettvi ; audttum from audio, audtvi.
3. The supines in ITUM are short, if they do not
come from a preterite in IVI ; as taciturn from taceo,
tacui ; agnitum from agnosco, agnovi ; cogriitum from
cognosco, cognovi; momtum from moneo, monui.
But the penultima in recensitum is long, because it
cometh from censio, censivi, and not from censep, cmmi.
OF THE INCREASE OF VERBS.
RULE XIII.
The nature of the Increase of Verbs.
When the verb hath more syllables in the
tenses than in the second person present^
this is called INCREASE.
Ex A M P LES.
The increase of verbs is ever regulated by the se-
cond person present : so that those tenses which do not
exceed this person in syllables, have no increase; as
amas, amant ; audis, audit. But those which exceed
it by one syllable, are said to have one increase ; as
) auditis ; where the second is called an in-
crease,
OF QUANTITY. 313
crease, because the last is never counted for such.
Those which exceed it by two syllables, have two
increases ; as amtibainus, docdbumus. Those which
exceed it by three, have three increases, as amayeri-
tis, &c.
Even the increase of the passive is regulated by the
second person of the active; as amaris, the second is
the increase. Amabriris, the second and third are in-
creases, measuring them by amas.
In regard to verbs common and deponents, we
must imagine the second person of the active, an4
regulate them in the same manner as the rest.
RULE XIV.
Of the Increase in A P
1. The increase in A is long.
%. But the verb do hath da short.
EXAMPLES.
1. A is always long in the increase of verbs, as ex-
probrare, stabam, bibdmm^fueramus.
The verb DO makes the increase DA short through*
out ; as damus, dabunt, dari } datum, &c.
Part he da bis poenas.
Likewise in its compounds circumdamus, circumda-
bunt, circumdare, venundare.
But every where else it hath A long like the other
verbs; dabamus, ddbdtur.
Qua jam for tuna dabatur. Virg,
RULE XV.
Of the Increase in E.
1. The increase in E is long.
2. Except in beris, eram, ero, erim. ,
3. Verbs of the third conjugation have it also
short in the first increase of the present
and preterimperfcct) where there happem
to be an R after E.
EXAMPLES.
1. E in the increase of verbs, is also long, generally
speaking, in all conjugations.
514 N E W M E T II O D. Book X.
.
In the first : as amemus, amaremus ; amaverunt;
dinar eris vel amarere, dedissemus.
In the second, docebam, docerem, docerer, docereris.
In the third, degebam, legerunt vel legere, kgissemus,
legeris vel legere, legetur, legemur.
In the fourth,, audieris vel audiere, audietur ; audi-
verunt vel audivere, Sec.
2. But it is always short in the following syllables,
beriSy eram, era, erim, through every person, amaberis
vel amabere; docueram ; potero, potuero ; legero, lege-
rim, legeris, Sec.
3. It is moreover short in verbs of the third conju-
gation, in the first increase of thie present and preter-
imperfect, where there happens to be an R after E ;
as legeris vel legere, in the present of the indicative
passive; legere in the imperative passive, and the infi-
nitive active ; legerem and legerer, in the preterim-
perfect subjunctive, active and passive.
But it is long even in the third, when one of these
conditions is wanting; as if it be in the second in-
crease, legererisvel legerere, legeretur, preterimperfect
passive of the subjunctive. .
If it be a preterimperfect that has not an R after
E ; as legebam, legebar, &c.
-. Or if it be any other tense than a present or a pre-
terimperfect, were it even then to have. an R after E ;
as legerunt \e\ legere in the preterite; legeris vel le-
gere, legetur in the future indicative. In like manner
scriberis, and laberis, &c. because the b then belongs
to the termination of the present, and not of the fu-
ture in bor.
Scriberis Variofortis 8$ hostium. Hor.
Sic tibi cumfiuctus subterlabere Sicanos. Virg.
And the like. Wherein the third conjugation con-
forms to the general rule.
A N N O.T A T I O N.
It seems that the penultima of the third person of the preterite
in ERUNT was heretofore short, or at least common, especially
in verbs of the third conjugation, and that one might say legerunt,
as well as legerant, legcrent, legcrint, legero, &c. this analogy being
particularly founded on the E followed by an R. Which may be
further confirmed by the authority of Diomedes, who, lib. 1. hath
these
OF QUANTITY. 515
these words, Fere in tertio ordine-pUrumque veteres tertia person^
jfinitiva temporis perfecti, numeri pluralist E mediam vocalem corri*
piunt, quasi legeruttt, emerunt, &c. And indeed Virgil does not
scruple to make it short, not only in those verbs of the third, but
likewise in others.
Matri longa decem tuleruntjfos^W/a menses. Eel. 4.
Miscueruntque herbas t 8f non innoxia verba. Georg. 3.
Obstupui, steteruntque com<, fy voxfaucibus hcssit. fiLn. 2.
For though some would fain read these passages with the third
person plural in erarit or erint ; yet, as Pierius observes on the
second example, the reading in erunt has been generally received.
Besides, otlier poets have used it in the same manner.
Nee cithara, intonsce profueruntve coma;. Tibul.
Abiturus illuc quo priores abierunt. Phaedr.
Nee tua defuerunt verba Thalasse mi/ii. Mart.
We might further produce a vast number of authorities, which,
shew that this is not a licentia poetica, as they call it, but the ancient
analogy of the language, and that we could not condemn a per-
son that would still c'huse to follow it, though it be always better to
make those words long, were it for no other reason but that the
ear, the chief judge of poetry, is more accustomed to it at present.
RULE XVI.
Of the Increase in I.
1. The increase in I is generally short.
%. But the first increase in the fourth conjuga-
tion is long :*
3. As also in velim, sim, malim, nolim.
4. All the preterites in I VI are long , but they
make IMUS short.
EXAMPLES,
1. The increase in I, generally speaking, is short, as
In the future of the first and second conjugation,
amabitis, docebitur.
In the present of the third, legimus, labitur, aggre-
ditur.
Even in the fourth, in the 2, S, and 4 increase,
audimini, audiremini, audiebammi.
But it is long in the first increase of this last con-
jugation, which is the most considerable in regard
to verse, audtre, mollJtur, sctrent, serv'itum, scJmus, tbo,
abibo.
3 The following are also long, slmus, veltmus, no*
HmuS) malmus, with the other persons, sltis, vetitis,
&c. 4. All
J516 NEW METHOD. Book X.
4. All the preterites in IVI .are long, audtvi. Event
in the third, pefivi, gutfszvi.
And they all make IMUS short in the plural, qu&-
simmus. Even in the fourth, audivimus, veriimus.
Observe therefore, that vemmus long is the present,
We are a coming; and veriimus short is the preterite,
tttf arc come. And so for the rest.
A NNOTATION.
In regard to the terminations of the subjunctire RIMUS and
RITIS, concerning which there have been such high debates
among grammarians ; Diomedes, Probus, and Servius will have
it that they are always long in the future, which Vossius seems to
favour, though he owns that there are authorities to the contrary,
as in Ovid ;
Obscurum nisi nox cumjecerit orbem ;
Videritis, Stellas illic ubi, &c. 2. Metam.
Again,
H&c ubi dixeritis, servet sua dona rogate.
In regard to the preterite the thing seeras still more uncertain-
Diomedes and Agroetius will have it short; on the contrary Probui
pretends it is always long.
Hence it plainly appears that those syllables were taken by the
poets sometimes one way and sometimes another, and therefore
we may hold them common, since Virgil himself says in the pre-
terite,
Namque ut suprevnamjalsa inter gaudia noctem
Egerimus, nosti, &c. .ZEn. 6.
For it is too weak an argument to say with Servius, that he wrote
thus through necessity, and by a poetic licence ; just as if he who
was prince of poets, and perfect master of his native language,
could not find another word to make the foot suitable to his verse.
And, as a proof of what I say, we find that RIS is rather .short
than long in the singular, as we shall shew hereafter when treat-
ing of the kst syllables ; which ought to be a presumption for the
plural.
RULE XVII.
r Of the Increase in O.
The increase in O occurs but seldom, and is always
long.
EXAMPLES,
The increase in O occurs in the imperative only,
and is always long, as amatdte, facitote.
Cumque loqui poterit ; matrem facitote salutet. Ovid.
OF QUANTITY. 317
RULE XVIII.
Of the Increase in U.
The increase m U is short ; but URUS is long,
as docturus, lecturus.
EXAMPLES.
The increase in U 13 short, as sunms, volumus.
Nos numerus sumus fyfruges consumere nati. Hor.
But the participle irt RUS, and the future of the
infinitive in RUM which is formed from thence, are
long, docturus, kcturus, amaturus, amaturum, &c.
OF THE INCREASE OF NOUNS.
RULE XIX,
What is meant by the Increase of Nouns.
1. The increase of nouns is when the genitive
hath more syllables than the nominative.
2. The increase of the genitive always regulates
the other cases.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase of nouns is when the other cages
have more syllables than the nominative : hence if the
genitive does not exceed the nominative in number of
syllables, there is no increase, as musa, musa; dominus r
domini : but in the plural, of musarum, dominorum, the
penultima is an increase.
2. The genitive ever regulates the increase of the
other cases, as sermo, sermonis, sermoni, sermonem, ser~
mone, scrmones, sermonum, where the o is alvVays long,
OF THE FIRST DECLENSIONS *>
The first declension has no increase but in the plural,
which comes within the rule we shall give lower down,
after we have gone through 4 the increases of the sin-
gular.
318 NEW METHOD.
RULE XX.
Increase of the Second Declension.
1. The increase of the second in the singular is
short.
2. Except Iber and Celtiber.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns of the second declension have their in-
crease short ; gener, generi ; puer, pueri ; prosper, pro-
sper i ; vir, mri ; satur, satur i.
2. Yet Ibtr, signifying an inhabitant of Iberia in
Asia, or of Spain, makes Iberi long.
As also its compound Ctltiber.
Mistis hie Colchus Iberis. Claud.
Gallorum Celtte, miscentes nomen Iberis. Lucan.
Vir Celtibens non tacende gentibus. Mart.
ANNOTATION.
We say likewise litres of the third declension : but then Priscian
thinks it is rather taken for the inhabitants of Iberia towards Col-
chis: yet from the above example it appears that Claudian did not
use it in this sense ; and the Greeks say "l^> "iC^or, to denote
both those nations. One would think that this long increase,
which has made its way into the second declension contrary to
the analogy thereof, was taken from thence,
INCREASE OF THE THIRD DE-
CLENSION.
RULE XXI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in L.
1. ALIS neuter is long.
2. ALIS masculine is short %
3. ILIS and ULIS are short.
4. EL1S and OLIS are long.
EXAMPLES.
1. The neuter nouns in AL make ALIS long in
the genitive, hoc animal, animalis.
2. The
OF QUANTITY. 319
2. The masculines make it short; hie Asdrubal,
Asdrubalis ; hie Annibal, Annibdiis.
3. The increase of nouns in IL and UL is also
short ; as vigil, vigilis ; pugil, pugitis ; consul, consu-
lts ; exul, exults.
4. Nouns in EL and OL make their increase long,
Daniel, Danielis ; sol, soils.
RULE XXII,
Increase of Nouns in N and O.
The increase in 1. ANIS, 2. ENIS, and
3. ONIS, is long.
4. INIS is short ; 5. except IN, INIS.
6. ONIS either in proper names or gentiles
varies.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase aw is long ; Paean, P (Earns; Ti-
tan^ Titanis.
2. The increase enis is long; ren, renis ; splen,
splenis ; siren, sirenis.
3. The increase onis is long; Cicero, Ciceronis;
sermo, sermonis ; Plato, Platonis.
4. The increase inis is short ; homo, hominis ; virgo,
virgmis ; or do, or dims ; carmen, carmmis.
5. Except those in IN which make INIS long;
as Delphin, Delphmis ; Salamin, mis; Phorcyn, the
name of a man, Phorcynis.
6. Proper names in On sometimes make Mis short,
as Memnon, M^mnonis ; and sometimes they make it
long, as Helicon, Helicdnis, in which respect we must
consult the practice of authors.
Gentiles for the most part make onis short, as Ma-
cedo, onis ; Saxo, onis : Except Burgundiones, which is
rather looked upon as long. Alvarez adds Eburones,
and a few others, in respect to which we must be de-
termined by custom. With regard to proper names,
there is very little certainty about them.
RULE
4 4k
*
I
NEW METHOD. Book X.
RULE XXIII.
Of the Increase in ARIS.
1. The increase ARIS in masculines is short.
2. (Add the neuters, nectaris, jubaris )
3. But the neuters in AR make ARIS long.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase ARIS is always short, if the noun
be masculine, as Ccesar, C<zsaris; lur, Idris, mas, ma-
rts ; par, pans ; dispar, disparts ; irnpar, imparts.
2. These two are also short, though neuters, nectar,
nectdris \jubar, jubaris ; with bacchar, aris, also neu-
ter, and the pen ultima short.
3. The other neuters make ARIS, long, as calcar,
calcaris ; lat/uear, laquearis; pulvinar, pulvinafis; ex-
emplar, exemplaris.
RULE XXIV.
Of the Increase ERIS.
1. The increase in ERIS /Vow ER is short.
2* Except Iber, crater, Ser, ver, and Reciraer.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in ER make the increase ERIS short, as
career, careens; mulier, mulieris; <zther, Athens; aer,
aeris.
2. Except the following, which make it long, Iber,
Iberis, a native of Iberia near Colchis. And this
noun is also of the second declension. See Rule 19.
Crater > ens ; Ser, seris ; the name of a people who
manufactured silk.
Felleraque ut Joins depectant lenuia Seres. Virg.
Ver, veris, the spring. Rtcimer, eris, in Sidonius, a
proper name ; and in short all Greek nouns that have
an n in the increase, aspoder, iris; spinier, >im, c.
RULE XXV.
, Of the Increase of Nouns in OR.
1. All the masculines in OR make ORIS long.
2. Except Memon
3. Tht
OF QUANTITY. 321
3. The neuters in OR, 4. as also Greek nouns,
5. and arbor, make ORIS short.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in OR, when of the masculine gender,
make their increase long, as timor, timorls\ lepor, le-
poris; vigor ; vigoris; decor , decoris.
Indulget nata decori. Ovid.
2. Yet memor hath memo'ris short, because it is an
adjective, and heretofore they used to say mcmdris and
hoc memore.
3. If they be neuters, they make ORIS short,
marmor, marmoris ; teyuw, aqu&ris ; hoc fidor, adtiris.
4. Greek nouns in OR have-also a short increase,
Hector, Hectoris ; Nestor, NeMris ; Castor, oris ;
rhetor, rhetoris.
5. Arbor hath also arboris short.
RULE XXVI.
Increase of Nouns in UR.
1. The increase of nouns in UR is short.
%. Except fur, fur is.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in UR make their increase short ; whe-
ther in ORIS, &sfemur,femoris\ robur, roboris\ jecur,
jecoris ; ebur, ebdris : or in URIS, as murmur, mur-
muris ; turtur, turturis ; vultur, vulturis ; Ligur, Li-
guris.
2. Yetjfar makesy^m, long; as also trifur, trifuris.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we must refer the Greek nouns in YR, as martyr (or
warturj maniris t or marturos ; and the like.
RULE XXVII.
Of the Increase of Nouns fn AS.
1. The increase ADIS from AS is short.
%. Vzsisfrom vas is long.
3. But mans from mas is short.
VOL. II. Y EXAM-
NEW METHOD. Book X.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns iii AS make the increase ADIS short;
whether they be femi nines, as Pallas, Palladia, the
goddess Minerva ; lampas, ddis, a lamp ; or whether
they be masculines, as Areas, Arcadia, an Arcadian ;
vtis, vtidis, bail, or surety.
2. But va&, vasis, neuter, is long, a vessel.
3. Mas, mdris, is short.
RULE XXVIII.
Of the Increase AXIS.
1. The increase ATIS from AS is long, ex-
cept anas, anatis,
2. But from other nouns ATIS is short.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase ATIS is long, when it comes
from a noun in AS, as cztas, &tatis\ pietas, pietatis;
dignitas, dignitatis,
Except anas, which hath anatis short.
2. The increase ATIS is short, when it comes
from other nouns than those in AS, for instance from
nouns in A, cenigma, <mgmatis; dogma, dogmatis. As
also
Hepar, hepatis or hepatos, short.
RULE XXIX.
Of the Increase of Nouns in ES.
1. Nouns in ES make their increase short.
2. Except merces, quies, locuples, haeres.
3. And Greek nouns which make ETIS.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in ES make their increase short, as miks,
militis; Ceres, Cereris; pes.pZdis ; interpret, interpr&tis;
seges, seg&is. Likewise pr&ses, pr&sidis, and the other
derivatives of sedeo.
2. These are excepted, merces, mercedu ; quies,
quietis; locuples, lacupbtis; h&ret, h&re&s.
8. And
OF QUANTITY. 323
3. And Greek nouns which make ETIS, as lebes,
lebeiis; tapes, tapetis; magnes, magnetis; Dares, Dare-
tis ; and others.
ANNOTATION.
Prces makes also nr&dis long, as likewise ces t ceris; but this is
by reason of the diphthong. And bes makes bessis long by position.
Formerly they used also to say mansues> 5/w, long ; as likewise
inquiesy etis. But at present we say rather mansuetus, i, inquietus, i ;
where the penultima still remains long, because of their original.
RULE XXX.
Of the Increase of Nouns in IS.
1. The increase of Nouns in IS is short.
2. Except Quiris, Sarunis, glis, lis, Dis.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase of nouns in IS is short, as pulvis,
pulveris\ sanguis,sangmnis; Chans, Chan f is, usual in
the plural ; Chafites, the graces.
2. In the following it is long. Quiris, QuirJtis ;
Samnis, Sammtis ; glis, gliris ; lis, Utis ; Dis, Ditis.
RULE XXXI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in OS.
1. The increase of nouns in OS is long.
2. Except bos, compos, and impos.
EXAMPLES.
1. The increase of nouns in OS is long, as os, oris;
dos, dotis ; custos, custodis ; nepos, nepbtis.
Greek nouns in OS have also a long increase, as
rhinoceros, otis ; likewise Tros, Trois ; heros, herois ;
Minos, Min'ois, though followed by a vowel, because
in Greek they are written with an w.
2. These are short, bos, btivis; compos, comptitis ;
impos, imptitis.
RULE XXXII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in US.
1. Nouns in US have their increase short.
2. Except the comparatives in US.
Y 2 3. And
324 NEW METHOD. Book X.
3- And nouns that make the genitive in URIS,
U-DIS, and UT1S.
4. But pecus makes pecudis short ; as intercus,
intercutis.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns ending in US have their increase short,
as munus, muneris ; corpus, corporis ; lepus, leporis ;
tripus, tripodis', decus, or is.
2. The comparatives in US make their increase
long, as melius, melioris ; majus, majdris ; because they
borrow it of the masculine, as major, majoris, &c.
3. Nouns whose genitive is in URIS, UDIS, or
UTIS, make their increase long, as jus, juris; tellus,
telluris ; incus, incudis ; virtus, virtutis ; salus, salu-
tis, Sec.
4. These are excepted, pecus, pecudis, a sheep, a
flock; intercus, intercutis, a dropsy.
ANNOTATION.
This shews, as we have elsewhere observed, that they come
rather from pecudis, hujus pecudis ; intercutis, hujus intercutis, than
from pecus or intercus, which in all likelihood would follow the
analogy of the other nouns in us, that have utis long. See vol. i.
p. 85, 86. and p. 167. col. 2.
Liguris, the name of a people, is also short ; which shews that
it comes rather from Ligur, as Verepeus has given it, than from
Ligus~.
The names of places in US of Greek original make UNTIS,.
and of course are long by position, as Opus, Opuntis, the name of
a town, and such like.
RULE XXXIII.
The Increase of Nouns ending in S with another Consonant.
1. Nouns ending in S with another consonant
make their increase short.
%. Except gryps, Cyclops, hy drops, pkbs,
and Cercops.
E X A M.P L E S.
1. The increase of nouns ending in S, with ano-
ther consonant, is short ; as ccelebs, ccelWis ; hyems,
hyemis, Dolops, Doltipis ; inops, intipis ; auceps, aucujw ;
2. But
OF QUANTITY. 325
2. But these have their increase long; gryps, gry-
phis; Cyclops, Cyclopis ; hy drops, hydropis, whence
comes hydropicus; plebs, plebis ; Cercops, Cercopis, the
name of a people, who for their malice were meta-
morphosed into apes, Ovid. Metam.
RULE XXXIV.
Of the Noun caput and its compounds.
The noun caput and its compounds, have a short
increase.
EXAMPLES.
Caput, and all its compounds are short in their in-
crease through every case singular and plural, capitis,
cafiite, capita, cap^tibus ; sinciput, sindifittu ; occiput,
occipttis ; anceps, ancifitis ; biceps, bictyitis.
RULE XXXV.
Of the Nouns in X which form their Genitive in GIS.
1. The increase in GIS is short.
%. Except frugis, legis, regis.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in X, whose genitive is in GIS, make
their increase short, as Allobrox, Allobrtigis ; conjux,
conjugis ; remex, remigis > Phryv, Phrygis.
Q. The following are excepted, frux, frugis ; rex,
regis; as also lex, legis; but its compounds vary ;
aquilex, aquilegis, short ; Lelex, LelZgis, short, the
name of a people ; exlex, exlegis, an outlaw.
RULE XXXVI.
Of the Increase of Nouns in AX.
1. The increase AClSfrom AX is long.
%. Except abax, smilax, climax, storax, fax.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in AX make their increase long, as pax,
pads ; ferax, feracis ; Jornax, fomacis.
%. These are excepted, abax, abdcis ; smilax, smi-
lads; a yew tree ; climax, climads ; storax or styrax,
styrads ; fax, ftids.
Add
326 NEW METHOD. Book X.
Add to these Arctopkylax, ads, a heavenly constel-
lation, and a few more Greek names.
RULE XXXVII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in EX.
1. The increase of nouns in EX is short.
2. Except halex, vervex, and fex.
EXAMPLES.
1. All nouns in EX have their increase short, as
nex, neds ; prex, precis \frutex,fruticis ; vertex, verfids.
2. These three excepted, halex, halecis ; vervex,
yerveds ; fex, feds.
ANNOTATION.
To these some are for adding vibex. But we choose rather to say
vibix, ids> according as we have marked it in the genders, vol. i,
P. 55. and then it will follow the next rule.
RULE XXXVIII.
Of the Increase of Nouns in IX.
1. Nounsin IX.ICIS, have their increase long;
2. Except filix, pix, vix, larix, calix, eryx,
varix, fornix, salix ;
3. To which add nix, nivis.
EXAMPLES.
1. Nouns in IX make their increase in ICIS long;
as radix, r adieu \ feiix,fel7cis', victrix, viclrtcis ; vibix,
vibtcis.
2. The following are excepted, flix, jittcis ; pix,
picis; vix, vYcis, in the plural wees; tarix, lands;
calix, cat ids ; eryx, erjjds/; varix, variety; fornix,Jor
riids; salix, sattds.
3. Nix likewise makes mvis short.
RULE XXXIX.
Of the Increase OCIS.
1. Nouns in OX make the increase ocis long ;
2. Except praecox, and Cappadox.
EXAMPLES.
' 1. The increase OCIS from nouns in OX is long ;
as vox, vocis', feroxijerocis; velox, velocis.
A 2. These
OF QUANTITY. 327
2. These are excepted; prizco?, pr&cdcis; Cappa-
dox, Cappadocis.
RULE XL.
Of the Increase UCIS.
1. The increase UCIS from UX is short.
2. Except lux and Pollux.
EXAMPLES.
2. Nouns in UX make their increase UCIS short; as
dux, duels ; redux, reducis ; crux, cruets ; nux, nucis ;
trux, trucis.
2. The following are excepted ; lux, liicis; Pollux^
Pollucis.
Tails Amiclaei domitus Pollucis habenis. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
In these latter rules, as in a great many others, we have omitted
several words, that are not only more difficult to learn, but likewise
less useful, since they occur but seldom, and it will be sufficient to
observe them in the use of authors.
Such are atrax, atax, colax, panax, Pharnax, Syphax, which
make their increase A CIS short. Such are also cUix, coxendix, his-
trix t natrix, onyx, sardonyx, which shorten ICIS, &c.
Of the INCREASE of the other DECLENSIONS.
The other two declensions, as well as the first, have
no increase, except in the plural. This should he re-
ferred to the following rule, which likewise includes
the second and third declensions for the increase be-
longing to this number.
RULE XLI.
Of the Increase of the Plural.
1. In the plural increase, I and U are short ;
%. But A, E, O, are long.
EXAMPLES.
The plural increase is when the other cases exceed
the nominative plural (which always depends on the
genitive singular) in number of syllables.
1. And then it makes I and U short; as sermones,
sermohUus-, wites, vifibus; manus, n&nuum \ portus,
portuum, portiibus.
2. But
328 NEW METHOD. Book X.
52. But A, E, O, are long; as musce, musarum ; res,
rerum, rebus \ medici, medicorum ; duo t duorum.
ANNOTATION.
Here we are to observe that there is a singular increase even in
the plural ; as in this word sermonibus, the second is a singular in-
crease, and is long, because it is ruled by the genitive sermonis.
But the penultima is a plural increase, because it has more sylla-
bles than this same genitive, and therefore belongs to this rule of
plurals.
The former is long in bubus as well as in bobus, because it is
wily, a Syncope for bovibus ; which happens also to bucula for bovi-
:ula. True it is that Ausonius has made the former short in bubus 9
considering it as in the singular increase of bos, bovis ; but the au-
thority of Horace, Ovid, and Lucretius, is preferable to his.
Paterna rura bobus exercet suis, Epod. 2.
Non profecturis littora bobus aras. Ovid.
OF THE LAST SYLLABLE.
RULE XLII.
A final.
1. A at the end of words is long ;
2. Except ita, eia, quia, puta ;
3. But it is short at the end of nouns ;
4. Except the ablative case ;
5. And the vocative of Greek nouns in AS.
EXAMPLES.
1. A is long at the end of words, as ama, pugna,
interea, ultra, memora, triginta, and the like.
2. There are four adverbs that have the last short;
ita, eia> quia, puta, for videlicet.
Eia per ipsum ;
Scdnde age. Val. Flaccus.
0cputa nonjustum est, illudmale, rectius istud.
Persius, sat. 4.
3. The nouns are short through all their cases end-
ing in A, except the ablative.
The Nomin. Forma* bonum fragile est. Ovid
The Accus. Hectoia donavit Priamo. Ovid.
The Vocat. Musa mihi causas raemora. Virg.
- The
OF QUANTITY. 329
The Plural Dederas promissa parenti. Virg.
4. The ablative is long.
Anchor a de proraj'tfdtar. Virg.
5. The vocative in A of Greek nouns in AS is also
long.
Quid miser um jEnea laceras ? Virg.
But from the other terminations it is short, as we
shall see presently.
ANNOTATION.
Of the Vocative, ending in A.
The vocative of Greek nouns in ES is short when it ends in
A, as Anchisa, Thyesta, Oresta, &c. because then this case can be
only of the Latin declension. But these same nouns having E in
the vocative, make it long, because this is a Greek case, and fol-
lows the Greek declension, which has an in.
The Cohans likewise gave the termination A to a great many
nouns that were in AS in the common language, as Mida for Mi-
das, Hyla for Hylas, &c. and then their vocative may be short.
Hence it is that Virgil in the vpry same verse has made this last
syllable both long and short in the vocative.
Clamassent, ut littus Hyla, Hyla omne sonaret. Eel. 6.
Unless we choose to attribute the length of one to the caesura, and
the shortness of the other to the position of the next vowel.
Of some Adverbs in A,
ANTEA is long in Catullus and Horace :
Petti, nihil me, sicut antea juvat,
Scribere Versiculos. Epod. 11.
CONTRA is long in Virgil.
Contra non ulla est oleis cultura : neque ilia.
We find it short in Ausonius, and in Manilius, who was his con-
temporary. But in regard to the verse, which the Jesuits Alvarez
and Ricciolius quote from Valerius Flaccus to authorize this
quantity ;
Contraque Lethtzi quassare silentia rami ;
It proves nothing, because the passage is corrupted, and the right
reading is this :
Contra Tartareis Colchis spumare vznenis,
Cunctaque Lethai quassare silentia rami
Perstat.'
POSTEA an adverb is long, according to G. Fabricius, in his
treatise of poetry, as Vossius observeth. Which appears likewise
by this iambic of Plautus.
Si autoritatem postea defugeris, In Pcenul. act. 1. sc. 1.
We might also prove it to be short by this verse of Ovid, 1. Fast.
Postea mirabar cur non sine litihus esset.
But it seems we ought to read it in two words, post ea, as Vossiug
says, because being an adverb it is long every where else.
POSTILLA
330 NEW METHOD. Book X.
POSTILLA is also long in Ennius and in Propertius, 1. 1. El. 15.
Hysipile nullos postilla sensit amores.
PUTA for videlicet, of which some have doubted, is short, as ap-
peared by Servius on the 2. Mn. where observing that the adverbs
in A are reckoned long, he particularly excepts puta and ita. This
is further confirmed by the above-quoted verse out of Persius, HOG
puta, &c. as Priscian likewise quotes it, lib. 15. and as Casaubon
declares he found it in MSS. though some editions read puto.
With respect to the passage of Martial, which is quoted from lib. 3.
epigram. 29, Esse puta solum, &c. it is plain that puta is there for
cense or crede, and is not then an adverb.
ULTRA is long in Horace ;
Ultra quam satis est virtutem $i petal ipsaw.
In Virgil ;
Quos olios muros qua jam ultra mania habetis ?
As likewise in Juvenal, Persius, and others.
And in vain does Erythraeus quote Serenus to make it short ;
Curaque nil prodest, nee ducitur ultra cicatrix,
since the best copies have ulla.
Of the Nouns in GINTA.
The nouns in GINTA are esteemed doubtful by some, because
they are found short in the old poets, as in Lucilius, and in those
of a later date, as Ausonius, Manilius, and others : but those of
the intermediate time, who flourished during the purity of the
language, always made them long.
Triginta cajntum foetus enixajacebit. Virg.
And the surest way is to follow this quantity. For as to the passages
they quote from Martial to prove their being short, Vossius shews
that they are corrupted.
RULE XLIII.
E final.
1. E at the end of words is short ;
%. But at the end of Greek nouns it is long ;
3. And at the end of 'nouns of the oth declension;
4. And q/*olie, ferme", fere :
5. And of all adverbs formed of US.
6. But bene, male, infe'rne 1 , superne, are short.
7. The imperative of the second conjugation is
long :
8. As are also these monosyllables me, ne, se, te.
EXAMPLES.
1. E is short at the end of words, zsfuriosS, utiU,
parte, ille,frangere, docerg, sine, mentt, pane 9 Achillt.
Haud
OF QUANTITY. 331
flaud sguidem sine mente reor, sine numine divwn
Adsumus. Virg.
2. Greek nouns are long in whatever case they
happen to be, when they are written with an tj, accord-
ing to what hath been already observed, p. 329, as
Lethe. Anchise, Cete, Mole, Tempe, &c.
ANNOTATION.
Achilla and HercuU are found sometimes short :
Quique tuas proavus fregit Achille domos. Propert.
But then we may say it is rather according to the Latin declen-
sion, than the analogy of the Greek. Which frequently happens
to nouns that follow the third declension in Latin.
3. E is long at the end of words of the fifth de-
clension ; as, re, die, reguie ; also hodie, postridie, and
the like, taken from dies.
Nocte diequesuumgestare inpectore testem. Juven.
fame is also long, and ought to be placed here, be-
cause it is really an ablative of the fifth declension,
which came from fames, famei, just like plebts, plebei,
in Livy and Sallust.
4. These words are long in the last syllable, ferme,
fere, ohe.
Mobilis ( varia est ferme" natura malorum. Juven.
Jamgue fere sicco subductte littore puppes. Virg.
Importunus amat laudari, donee ohejV/m Hor.
5. Adverbs formed of nouns of the second declen-
sion have also E long ; as indigne, pr&cipue, platide,
minime, summe, valde (for valide) sancte, pure, sane,
Sec.
6. Except bene and male, which are short :
Nil hene cumjacias, fads attamen omn'ut belle. Mart.
Inftrne and supernV ought also to be excepted as
short, unless we had authority for the contrary, which
is not perhaps to be found. For thus it is in Lucre-
tius :
Terra superne t remit , magm$ COMCUSM ruhris.
Upon whicli Lambinus says : Aliliitsj-tm duciultimam
syllabam advcrbii SUPLRNE, breve in ewe: itaijue eos
errare qui hoc loco $$ simiiibus legi volant SUPEKNA.
"U hich neither Despauter, nor Alvarez, nor Ricciolius
have observed.
7. The
332 NEW METHOD. Book X.
7. The imperatives of the second conjugation have
also E long, as mone, vide, habe, doce.
The other imperatives are short. Vide and vaK are
also sometimes short. And cave is but seldom long.
Vade, vale, cave ne titubes, niandataque frangas.
Hor.
Idque, quodignotifaciunt, vale dicere saltern. Ovid.
8. Monosyllables make E long, as me, ne, se, te.
ANNOTATION.
From this rule of monosyllables we must except the enclitics
que, lie, ve, and these other particles ce, te, or pte, as tuque, hicce,
tuapte, &c. because they are joined in such a manner to the other
words, that they form but one, and are no longer considered as
separate monosyllables.
In regard to imperatives as well of this as of the precedent rule,
we may observe with Vossius, that the reason of their being long,
is because they are formed by contraction. For ama, he says, comes
from amae ; just as the Greeks say //,?, '/*, mete. And thus
doceo should have docee, the last short, of which they have formed
by contraction doce, the last long ; just as in Greek we say 3oxee,
Sow/. And though there are some imperatives of the second also
short, this is because those verbs were heretofore of the second
and third conjugation, as some of them are still ; for we sayfalgeo,
es, andfulgo, is ; tergeo, es, and tergo, is, &c. And hence it is that
we find responds and salve short in Martial.
Si quando veniet ? dicet : responde, poeta Exierat*
Lector salve. Taces, dissimulasque ? Vale. Idem.
Though all these verbs are rather long or short, according to the
conjugation in which they have continued.
RULE XLIV.
I final.
1. I at the end of words is long.
2. Buf mihf, tibi, cuf, sibf, ubi, ibi, are
doubtful.
4. Nisi and quasi are short ;
4. As are also the neuter nominatives,
5. With the Greek datives,
6. And Greek vocatives.
EXAMPLES.
1. I at the end of words is long, as ocult, MercurJ,
class!.
Diem spectant l&sos oculi, l&duntur 8$ ipst. Ovid.
2. The
OF QUANTITY. 333
p The following have I either long or short, mihi,
ij cut, sibi, ubi, ibl.
3. And. these have it short, nm, quasi.
4. As also the neuters in I or Y, Mpfr Moljf,
gumnii, sinapij hydromdi, &c. To which we may join
these Greek nouns, as Mesori, Payrii, Phaoti, Phar-
mutiy Tybi, &c.
5. The datives of Greek nouns are also short, as
Mino'idiy Palladi^ Thetidi, Paridi, Tindaridi, Phillidt,
&c.
6. As also their vocatives, whether in I or Y ; as
Adorn, Akxi, Amarilli, Brisei, Cecropt, Chely, Daphw,
Inachi, Lycaoni, Pan, Phylli, Thai, Tyndari, whereto
we ought likewise to refer all the patronymics in IS,
which make IDOS.
ANNOTATION.
Uti is long, as also velutl.
Namque videbat utl bellantes Pergama circum. Virg.
Improvisiim aspris velutl qui sentibus anguem. Id.
But sicutt is short in Lucretius and elsewhere, and perhaps is not
to be found of a different quantity, though grammarians mark it
as common. Ut tque is short. Ibidem, ubique and ubivis are long,
though they come from ibi and ubi common. Some have fancied
them doubtful because of this verse of Horace.
Non ubi vis coramve quibuslibet. In media qui ;
But we must pronounce it in two words ubi vis, or according to
others ubi sis. Sicubi, though common, is generally long.
Nisi and quasi, which I have marked as short, are reckoned
common by some, because there are some authorities for it in the ,
latter poets, and in Lucretius, who says :
Et devicta quasi coganturjerre patique.
But the best authors constantly make them short.
Quoque sit armento, veri quasi nescia quceri. Ovid.
N'ihil hie nisi carmina desunt. Virg.
As for the Greek nouns, we are to observe that these are some-
times found also long, as Orestl,, Pyladi y and the like datives, be-
cause this termination is then entirely Latin, those cases in Greek
being 'Of e'rn, rii/Aa&u, which are of the first declension of simples.
Nor can we even shorten the datives that arise from contraction,
as Demosthem t AVJ/XOO-SE'VE/, metamorphosi, [ASTapof Quart <, because this
would be contrary to the general rule. And if we would also re-
fer Oresti to this rule of contraction, we should find more reason
to make it long, because it will come from 'o^e'rw, as Socrati from
and so for the rest.
334 NEW METHOD. Book X.
RuLE.XLV.
O final.
1. O at the end of words is doubtful :
2. But the datives and ablatives in O are long.
3. O in these words is short : imo, duo, scio,
modo, cito. 4. In eo it is long ;
5. As also in monosyllables.
6. And in adverbs derived from nouns.
EXAMPLES.
1. O at the end of words is sometimes long, and
sometimes short; as led, quando, nolo.
2. The datives and ablatives in O are long, somnd,
vento, odid.
Nutritur vento, vento restinguitur ignis. Ovid.
3. O is short in the following words, imo, duo, scio,
and its compound nescio, modo, with its compounds
quomodd, dummodo, &c. cito. To which we may add
egtf, cedo, (for die) illico, which are more usually short.
4. Ed is long, and so are its compounds, adeo 9 ideo,
Ibit eo, quo vis, zonam qui perdidit, inquit. Hor.
5. Monosyllables are long, do, sto, pro.
Jam jam efftcad do manus scientice. Hor.
<S \JLr
6. Adverbs derived from nouns are long, because
properly speaking they are only ablatives, as subito,me-
rito, multo, false, primo, eo, vero. Ergo is always lopg,
because it comes from %yw : but sero is doubtful.
ANNOTATION.
We find modo long in Catullus.
Hoc quidputemus esse? qui modo scurra.
Sero being doubtful follows the general rule. For though it is
more frequently short, yet we meet with it also long.
Heu sero revocatur amor, seroque juventa, Tibul.
Hereto some add sedulo, crebro, and mutuo ; but they are more
commonly long.
Prof'ecto is also long, because it is derived from pro facto >, by
changing A into E, according to what has been said, p. 252. Yet
we find it also short in Terentianus Maurus.
Now the reason why is not only sometimes long, and some-
times short, but also generally common of its nature, is because
it answers to these two Greek vowels e and u, in imitation of which
the Latins pronounced several of their words. And thence also
it
OF QUANTITY. 335
it comes that O in Latin is oftener long than short. For in the
first place the antients made the verbs almost always long, because
in Greek it is an u. And Corradus excepts from this rule no more
than scio and nescio, which Victorinus asserts to have been made
short, to distinguish them from the datives and ablatives ; scio from
sciusy whence cometh sciolus ; and nescio from nescius. Vossius
however adds cedo for die.
Facti crimen habet. Cedo, si conata peregit. Juven.
And he shews that thought he most eminent poets make O more
usually long in the other verbs, yet those who flourished some-
what later, generally made it short : as Martial.
Nee volo boletos : ostrea nolo : tace.
Secondly, the datives and ablatives are always long for the same
reason ; Kvg o>, efyw, &c.
Thirdly, all the other cases which in Greek end with an &>, are
long in Latin, as Alecto, Echo, Sappho, hujus Androveo, hunc Atho,
&c. But those which end with a v after u t are reckoned common
in Latin, as nxarwv, Plato; S^UKM, draco; though Corradus will
still have them to be only long, as indeed Victorinus affirms that
they were always reckoned by the antients.
Fourthly, the gerunds in DO, according to the same Corradus,
and Valerius Probus, ought always to be long. And the reason
is because they are only nouns, as we have shewn in the remarks
on Syntax, book 6. And though they may be sometimes found
short in Tibullus, Juvenal, and Ovid; yet they are not so in
Virgil, who constantly makes them long.
Fifthly, tTie interjection O is long by nature, because it is an u.
O lux DardanicBj spes ojidissima Teucrum, Virg.
And if it be ever short, it is merely by position, that is because of
the vowel that follows it.
Te Condon o Alexi, Idem.
which we shall account for hereafter, when we come to speak of
the manner of scanning verse.
RULE XLVL
U final.
Words ending in U are long, as vultu.
EXAMPLES.
U is long at the end of words, vultu, cornu, pronip-
tu, Panthu.
Tantum ne pateas verbis simulator in ipsis
Effice, nee vultu destrue dicta tuo.
ANNOTATION.
Words ending in u are long, because this Latin u was pro-
nounced with a full sound, like the French diphthong ou, as we
have shewn in the Treatise of Letters, book 9. c. 4. n. ^2. p. 255.
But those which terminate in Y (which was pronounced like the
French
536 NEW METHOD. Book X.
French uj, are short, Moly, Tiphy, &c. Yet indu, which was used
for z, and nenu for HOW, are short. They are both still to be seen
in Lucretius.
RULE XLVIL
B and C final.
1. B at the end of words is short :
2. C is long.
5. Except nee and donee, which are short ;
4. Except also, fac and hie the pronoun, which
are doubtful.
EXAMPLES.
1. B at the end of words is short, as ab, ob, sub,
puppi sicjatur ab alta. Virg.
2. C is long, as ac y htc the adverb, hoc, due, sic. ,
Sic oculos, sic ille manus, sic oraferebat. Virg.
3. These two are short, nee, dome :
Donee erisfelix, multos nwnierabis amicos. Ovid.
4. The following are doubtful ; Jac, the impera-
tive offacio, and hie the pronoun.
Hie vir hie cst, tibi qutm promitti sapius audis. JEn. 6.
Hie gladiojidens, hie acer 8$ arduus hast a. JEn. 12.
ANNOTATION.
The adverb hie is long, because it was pronounced almost like
, says Vossius, whence it is that in antient marbles, we often
find it written thus, HEIC. But as for the pronoun hic 9 Voss. 2.
de arte Gram. c. 29. says it is always short by nature^ and. that
whenever we find it long, it is because the c had the full sound of
a double letter ; for which he has the authority of Victorinus,
Probus, and Capella. To understand this, it must be observed,
agreeably to whauPriscian says, lib. 13. that this pronoun hic 9
hcec, hoc, frequently assumed the particle c, hicce, hcecce, hocce,
and that this final e being lost by Synalepha, there remained only
two cc t hicc, hcecc, hocc, which is also confirmed by Longus in his
orthography. Be that as it may, -there is no doubt but this pro-
noun is much oftener long than short. Horace constantly, makes
it long; and for twice that we find it short in Virgil, Solus hie
inflexit sensus, ./En. 4. with the other above quoted of the 6th, it
is above fifteen times long, whether he wrote it with two cc t or
otherwise. The same may be said also of hoc, which is always
long in the best author*.
But take notice that the verse which Smetius quotes on this
occasion, from ^En. 11. ,
>Hic annisgravis, atqueanimi maturus Aides t
proves nothing, because hie is there au adverb -only.
OF QUANTITY.. 33?
Tac, for the imperative ofjacio, is always long by nature.
Hoc fac Armenios Ovid.
And if we sometimes find it short, it is because they used for-
merly to writejhce, according to Vossius after Julius Scaliger and
Verulen, as in the same poet.
Jane face ccternos pacem, pacisque ministros,
though Giffanius is of a contrary opinion.
RULE XLVIII.
D and L final.
1. D is short at the end of words ;
2. As likewise L, 3. Except nil, sol, sal ;
4. And Hebrew words, as Daniel.
EXAMPLES.
1 . D is short at the end of words, as ad, sed, quid-
quid, istud.
Q. Words that terminate in L are also short, as
tribunal, J el, mil, semel, pervigil, pol, procul.
3. The following are excepted., ml, sol, sal.
4. Hebrew names are also excepted, as Daniel,
Michael, Michol, Raphael, &c.
ANNOTATION.
Nil is long, because it is a contraction for nihil, which is short,
according to the general rule ;
De nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti. Persius.
The following verse of Ovid is brought against us.
Morte nihil opus est, nihil Icariotide tela.
But then the reason of the last of nihil being long in the second
foot, is because of the caesura.
Of Words ending in M.
The Greeks, as we have observed, p. 267. did not end any
word at all with this letter, but it was a common termination
with the Latins. Yet as it is always cut off in verse before a vowel,
there is no necessity for giving any rule about it. However, we
may observe that the ancients let it stand and made it short.
Vomerem atque locis avertit seminis ictum. Lucr.
And if we find it sometimes long, this is in virtue of the caesura,
as
H<zc "eadem ante illam, impune <$ Lesbia fecit. Propert.
In composition it is also short.
Quo te circumagas. Juven.
Concerning which see what is said in the third section of this book,
c. 3. n. 1. speaking of the Ecthlipsis.
VOL, II. Z RULE
NEW METHOD. Book X.
RULE XLIX.
N Final.
1. N is long at the end of wards :
2. Except an, in, and clein ;
3. Except also nouns in EN making inis;
4. -4s likewise tamen a/id viden'.
EXAMPLES,
1. N is long at the end of words; as Dan, lien, en,
quln, stn.
Also in Greek words masculine and feminine, as
Titan, Syren, Salamm, Phorcyn.
Likewise Acteon, Corydon, and the like, which
have .
Arid Greek accusatives of the first declension, a$
JEntan, Anctiisen, Calliope n
As well as the genitives plural, as Cimmeron, be-
cause it is also an w.
2 In the following N is short, an, "in ; likewise
JbrsSn aiHlfof&ititn, compounded of an.
Also dtin, protn, for deinde, proinde.
3. Nouns in EN, that make INIS, are also short,
as nomen, nominis ; pecten, pectinis ; tibicen, tibicinis.
4. As likewise tamen, and its compound attamen.
Also viden', and such like ; as nostin, am\ saCin\
eg6n\ mmtin, which are said by apocope instead of
videsne, mmone ? &c.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we may add the Greek nouns in ori^ which are of the
second declension in Latin, as Ilion, and the like, which in Greek
have an omicrbn. As also the accusative of nouns whose nomi-
native is short ; as Maicm, Eginaii, Alexln, Thetm, Itm f Scorpion $
and the datives plural in in, as Arca^in.
RULE L.
R Final.
1. R at the end of words is short:
2. But Greek nouns in E.R that increase in the
gmitive, are long ;
3. Add to these cur, fur, lar, far, ver, hir, nar,
4. Also par, and its compounds, a& dispar.
OF QUANTITY. 339
I
EXAMPLES.
1. R is short at the end of words, as Ctesar, calcdr,
imblr, differ, linter, v?r, giadiattir, robur.
2. Greek nouns in ER are long, when they in-
crease in the genitive ; whether this increase be short,
as aer, (Ether, Ms ; or whether it be long, as Crater -,
gazer y poder, Recimer, spinter, eris. As also Iber,
though its compound Celtiber is short, conforming
thus to the Latin analogy.
Ducit ad auriferas qudd me Salo Celtibgr oras. Mart.
Despauter mentions this noun as doubtful, but with-
out authority. Its increase indeed is long, as may be
seen above, rule 20. p. 313.
The other Greek nouns that have no increase in the
genitive, are short, as pater, mater.
3. The following words are also Ibng, cur, fur,
lar,far, hJr, nar, and ver, which last may be ranked
among the Greek nouns, since it comes from &*, ?,
as we have already observed.
4. Par and its compounds are also long, compar,
dispdr, impar, suppdr, &c.
Ludere par impar, cquitare in arundine longa. Hor.
ANNOTATI ON.
Vir is oftener short. Yet we find it long in this verse of Ovid,
De grege nunc tibi vlr fy de grege natus habendus. Ovid.
Cor is also doubtful, according to Aldus.
Molle cor ad timidas sic habet ille preces. Ovid.
Molle meum levibus cor est molabile telis. Id.
Unless the passage be corrupted ; for every where else it is short.
Greek nouns in OR are always short, though in their own lan-
guage they have an u, as Hector, Nestor, &c. But it is not the
same in regard to the termination ON, which continues always
long when it comes from u, as we have shewn in the precedent
rule. For which this reason may be given, according to Camerius,
that the termination ON is entirely Greek, and therefore retains
the analogy and quantity of the Greek, otherwise, to latinize it,
we should be obliged to change it into O, as Plato, Cicero, &c.
whereas the termination OR being also Latin, nouns borrowed
from the Greek conform to it intirely without any alteration, and
therefore are of the same nature and quantity as the Latin.
z 2 RULE
340 NEW METHOD. Book X.
\
RULE LI.
AS Final.
1. AS at the end of words is long.
2. But AS, ADIS, is short.
3. Join thereto the Greek accusative ;
4. With the nominative anas.
EXAMPLES.
1. AS at the end of words is long, as at as, Thomas,
jEneas,fas, mfds; Pallas, antis ; Adamas, antis.
2. Greek nouns in AS, which make the genitive in
ADIS, are short, as Areas, Arcadis ; lampds, lampadis ;
Pallas, Palladis ; Ilias, Iliados.
, 3. The Greek accusatives of nouns, which in
Latin follow the third declension, are likewise short,
as Naiadas, Troas, Delphinas, Arcadas.
Palantes Troas agebat. Virg.
4. The noun anas is short, as in Petronius,
Et pictis anas enovata pennis.
And even the very analogy of the language shews it,
having a short increase in the genitive anatis.
RULE LI I.
ES Final.
1. ES at the end of words is long.
%. Except Es/row Sum, with its compounds.
3. And penes.
4- Greek nouns in ES are also short.
5. As likewise Latin nouns with a short increase.
6. Except pes, Ceres, aries, abies, and paries.
EXAMPLES.
1. ES at the end of words is long, as nubes, artes,
Cybeles, Joannes, locuples, Anchises, decies, venies, &c.
2. The verb sum makes es short, with its com-
pounds potes y ades, &c. But es from edo is long, be-
cause it is a crasis for edis, of which they made eis, es.
3. The
f
OF QUANTITY.
3. The preposition penes is also short.
4. Likewise Greek nouns of the neuter gender, as
hipppmanes, cacoethes, &c.
The plural of Greek nouns that follow the third
declension of the Latins, makes ES also short in the
nominative and vocative, as A ma zones, Arcades, aspi-
des, Delphines, Erinnides, gryphes, heroes, Lynces, Mi-
mallones, Naiades, Nereides, Or cades, Phryges, Thrace's,
Tigrides, Troades, Troes, &c. But the accusative in
ES of these very nouns is long, because it is entirely a
Latin case, the Greek accusative ending in AS. Thus
hos Arcades is long, and hos Arcadas is short.
5. The Latin nouns in ES, whose increase is short,
have es also short in the nominative singular, as miles,
wilitis; seges, segetis; pedes, ped^itis. But those whose
increase is long, are long, as hares, edis ; locuples, etis.
6. The following have ES long, notwithstanding
that they have a short increase, Ceres, Cereris',pes,pdis.
Hie fart a pr emit ur anguio Ceres omni. Mart.
Pes etiam et camuris hirtcz sub cornibus aures. Virg.
ANNOTATION.
Hereto we might join these three, abtes, abietis ; aries, arietis ;
paries, parietis ; though it seems to be rather the caesura that makes
them long ; for perhaps they will not be found of this quantity in
any other situation.
With regard to what is objected against the compounds of pes t
thatprtepes is short in Virgil,
praepes ab. Ida.
And perpes in S. Prosper,
In Christo quorum gloria perpes erit.
It is evident that neither of these nouns is compounded of pes,
perpes being the same as perpetuus, and prcepes coming from ir^tril^s,
prtevolanSy which was first of all in use among the augurs.
We must own that Ausonius shortens bipes and tripes, and
Probus teacheth that alipes and sonipes are likewise short. But the
contrary appears in Virgil, Lucan, and Horace. Therefore it is
better always to make them long, like their simple.
Poets who flourished towards the decline of the Latin tongue,
have taken the liberty to shorten the last m fames, lues, proles,
plebes, which is not to be imitated. Cicero likewise has made the
final short in alites, and in pedts the plural of pes, and Ovid in ty-
gres, as conformable to the Greek analogy.
RULE
643 NEW METHOD. Book X,
RULE LIII.
IS Final
1. IS at the end of words is short.
%. But the plural cases are always long.
3. As also the nominative singular of nouns that
have a long increase.
4. Likewise such verbs as answer in number and
tense to audis.
5. With Fis, sis, vis, an^ veils.
EXAMPLES.
1. IS at the end of words is short, as amafis, mquis,
quis, w, pronoun ; cUs, preposition ; virgiriis, vultis,
&c.
Y has a great relation to I, for which reason it is
also short, as Chelys, Cctpj/s, Libys, &c.
2. The plural cases are always long, as virls, armls,
musls, siccls, glebls, nobls ; omnls for omneis, or omnes ;
urbls for urbeis, or urbes ; qum for qwbus ; vobis, &c.
Gratis andforJs are also long, in this respect par-
taking of the plural cases.
Dat gratis ultro dat mihi Galla, nego. Mart.
Wherein P. Melissus, in a letter to Henry Stephen,
acknowledges himself to have been heretofore mis*
taken.
3. Nouns in IS are long, when their increase hap-
pens to be long, as SimoJs, entis ; Pyrois, entis ; Us, J-
tis ; dis, ditis ; Samrifs, ttis ; QuirJs, itis ; S alarms, 1ms ;
gits, glJris ; semis, semlssis.
But those of a short increase are also short, as san-
gms, sangui/ris.
3. Verbs make IS long in the second person singular ;
whenever the second person plural in itis is long.
As in the present of the fourth conjugation, audjs,
wescJs, sentis, vents.
5. As jls from flo, sis from sum, and its com-
pounds, possls, prosls y adsls.
As vis from volo, and its compounds, mavis ; as
also quamvls, cuwls.
Likewise veils, malls, noils.
And
OF QUANTITY. 34S
And in fine according to some, bsfadTs, ausis, which
follow the same analogy.
ANNOTATION.
Some will have bis, nescis, possis, veils, and pulvis to be com-
mon ; which is not without authority. But pulvis is long in Vir-
gil by caesura; and as for the others, it is always better to follow the
general rules.
Christian poets sometimes make IS short in the fourth, as
- non tu
Pervenls ad Christum, sed Ckristus pervenit ad te. SeduL
which is not to be imitated.
Of the termination RIS in the subjunctive.
In regard to the termination RIS of the subjunctive, it is so
often long and short in verse, that some have been led thereby to
believe it was long in the future, and short in the preterite. But
this distinction is by no means satisfying; for as we have shewn in
the remarks on Syntax, book 6. p. 107- the preterite in rim is often
made to express the future, as well as the past ; and therefore we
may say in general, that whether in the preterite, or the future,
we may always make them short, as sufficiently appeareth from the
following examples.
Quas gentes Jtal&m, aut quas n$n orayerjs urbes, Virg.
Gr&culus esitriens in ccelum jusser|s ; ibit, Juven.
Dixeris, egregie, &c. Hor.
", Dixeris tzstuo, sudat. Juven.
> Namjrustra vitium vitaveris illud. Hor.
Is mihi, dives eris, si cansas egerls, inqmt. Mart.
And if we should be asked, nevertheless, whether it be true, that they
are also sometimes long in the future, it is certain there are exam*
pies thereof.
Miscuerls elixa, simul conchylia turdis. Hor.
But this may be referred to the csesura. At least I never met with
them long, except on such an occasion. Which shews that we may
abide by what Prohus says, that this syllable RIS is always short,
whether in the preterite, or in the future subjunctive.
Some have also remarked that this last syllable RIS is long only
when the antepenultimais short, as we see in attufeiu, audieris, bibc-
riSj dederis, credideris, fuZrls, and others ; so that the penultima
being likewise short in all those wt>rds, there is a necessity for
lengthening the last, in order to admit them into verse. Therefore
they will have this to be only a licence, which has nevertheless
become a rule ; whereas if the antepenultima is long, this last syl-
lable will be ever short according to its nature, as appears in dlxeris^
lsgeris,Jecer$s, jwnxeris, qucesweris, vlderis, and others. This re-
mark has some foundation, since it is generally true : but in words
where they pretend ft ^ tog by poetic liceaoe, there is always $
caesura,
RlJXE
344 NEW METHOD, Book X.
RULE LIV.
OS Final.
1. OS at the end of words is long.
%. Except compos, impos.
3. Also Greek nouns written with omicron.
4. And os, ossis.
EXAMPLES.
1. OS at the end of words is long, as hands, ros>
os, oris, the mouth ; viros, &c.
2. Compos and impos, which Aldus supposeth to be
long, are short.
Insequere, 8$ voti postmodo compos eris. Ovid.
3. Greek nouns are short, when written in Greek
with an omicron, as Arclds, melbs, Chads, Argfts^ Ilifts;
and the genitives in OS, as Arcados, Palladtis, Tethytis,
But nouns written in Greek with Iomega are long, a
Athos, Herds, Androgeos, &c.
Vweret Androgeos utlnam. Ovid.
4. These nouns are also short, tts, ossis, a bone ; extis,
one that has no bones.
Exos < e,ranguis tumidos perfluctuat artus. Lucret.
RULE LV.
US Final.
1. US at the end of words is short.
2. Butnounsthatretain\Jinthegenitivearelong.
3. US is also long in four cases of the fourth
declension.
4. As likewise in Tripus.
EXAMPLES.
1. US is short at the end of words,. as tuus, illius,
intus, sensibus, vulnus, impetus.
2. Nouns that retain U in the genitive are always
long, whether they make it in UNTIS, URIS, UTIS,
UDIS, or ui's, as Opus, Opuntis, the name of a town;
tellus, telluris', rus, runs ; jus, juris; salus, salutis; vir-
tus, virtutis ; palus, paludis ; grus, gru'is ; sus, suis.
ANNO-
OF QUANTITY. 345
ANNOTATION.
Palus occurs but once in Horace,
Regis opus, stcrilisque dm palus, aptaque remis.
Which is more to be remarked than imitated, though Palerius
followed the example in his poem on the immortality of the soul.
Interciis, utis, is also short, because the nominative was intercutis^
hujus intercutist of which they h:\ve made intercus by syncope.
Teltus is likewise short in Martianus Capella,
Interminata marmore telliis erat.
But this author often takes such liberties, in which his example
is by no means to be copied.
3. Nouns of the fourth declension are also short in
the nominative and vocative singular, as hie jructus,
hcsc manus.
Hie Dolopummznus, htcscevus tendebat Achilks.Virg.
But these very nouns are long in the other cases in US,
which are four; namely, the genitive singular, the
nominative, accusative, and vocative plural; because,
as we have observed when treating of the declensions,
vol. 1. p. 123. this, termination us comes from a con-
traction in all those cases, viz. uis in the genitive,
manuis, mantis ; and ues, us, for the other three, ma*
nues, mantis, &c.
4. Tripus, tripodis, is also long in the last of the IKH
jninative. To which we may add Melampus.
ANNOTATION.
Greek nouns ending in oy? make us long in Latin, because it
comes from the diphthong, as Amathus, JESUS. As likewise cer-
tain genitives that come from the Greek termination oos, ovs, as
Manto, Mantus; Sappho, Sapphus ; and the like. There are only
the compounds of novs (excepUrtpwand Melampus) that are short;
as PolipuSf CEdipiis, &c. because they drop the v of the diphthong
according to the ./Eolians, and only change o* into us, as we find
by the genitive which makes odis, and not oudis and untis.
Nouns in eus are also long by reason of the diphthong, as Atreus,
Orpheus, Briareus.
The ancients used to cut off S at the end of the words in verse,
just as we do M ; hence they said aliu', dignu 1 , montibu* ; which
lasted tilt Cicero's and Virgil's time.
RULE LVI.
T Final.
T at the end of z&ords is short.
E X A M-
345 NEW METHOD. Book X,
EXAMPLES.
T at the end of words is short, as audiit, kgit, ca*
putjjugit, amat y &c.
ANNOTATION.
T final was heretofore common, as Capella witnesseth, and as
we still see in Ennius : but at present it is looked upon as short.
And if we find it sometimes long, this is owing to the caesura, at
in Martial,
Jura trium petilt Casare discipulorum.
And in Ovid,
Nox abut, oriturque Aurora, Palilia poscor.
We are not even allowed, as some pretend, to make it long in
the last syllable of the preterites formed by syncope ; and if we
sometimes find it thus, it is always in consequence of the caesura, as
in Horace,
ut iniqua mentis Asellus y
Cum gravius dorso subilt onus.
However, if beside the syncope of the U, there is also a synere-
sis of two ii, then in virtue of this contraction of two syllables
into one, the T, like any other letter, may become long, pur-
suant to what we observed in the first rule. Thus in Virgil, ^En.
lib. 9.
Dum trepidant, it hasta Tago per tempus utrumque.
For it is there in the preterite instead of Ut. Likewise in Ovid,
1. Trist. eleg. 9.
Dardaniamque petit autoris nomen habentem.
for petiitj and the like ; though, generally speaking, they are with
a cassura, as in the last example.
RULE LVII.
Of the Last Syllable of the verse.
The last syllable of the verse is always common.
EXAMPLES.
The last syllable of every verse is common, that is,
we may look upon it as short or long, just as we will,
without being confined to any rule ; as in this verse
from Virgil :
Gem mlmica mlhi Tyrrhenum navigat asquor.
The last of the word aqutir is short by nature,
though it passeth as long.
And in this other verse put of Martial,
Nobis non licet esse tarn riisertis,
the
OF QUANTITY. 347
the last of disertts is long by nature, though it is
here supposed to be short.
OBSERVATIONS ON DIVERS SYLLABLES
whose quantity is disputed.
THIS is all we had to mention in regard to the rules
of quantity. The syllables not included in these rules,
ought to be learnt by the use and authority of the poets, such as
most of those in the middle of words, and all those which are
called NATURE, of which we have given some hints in different,
parts of the annotations.
But as there are many words whose quantity is often disputed,
and others where it is perverted by following the authority of cor*-
rupt passages, or of authors no way deserving of imitation ; 1 shall
therefore give here a list of such as I thought the most necessary to
be observed.
List of words whose quantity is disputed.
AB s T E M i u s, the second long,
though Rutilius would fain have
it short.
Si forte in media positomm abstemius
herbis. Hor.
AFFATIM, the second short in a
verse of Accius's, which is in the 2d
Tusc.
Turn jecore opir^o farta Sf saliata
affatim.
Some have insisted on its being long
because of this verse of Arator,
Suppelit affatim exemplar um copiq,
nosque.
But besides that we might scan it per-
haps without making an elision of the
M, as was frequently practised by the
ancients, and thus make a dactyl of af-
fatim, we must further observe that this
poet (who flourished under Justinian at
the same time with Priscian and Cassio-
dorus) is not so exact in his poetry, as
to be of any authority with us.
ANATHEMA, when it signifies a
person excommunicated, as in St. Paul,
1. Cor. xvi. 21. is generally written in
Greek with an e, and therefpre hath the
peHultima short. I}at when it denotes
a present or an offering hanged up in
temples and churches, it is commonly
written with an , as in St. Luke,
xxi. 5, and elsewhere j and therefore it
hath the penult ima long : though some-
times the orthography of it is altered ;
fceiug still but one and the sauae word,
compounded of T&n/u.t, ponn, which
takes either the 9 or the c in both signi-
fications ; and theu the quantity will be
also changed.
ANTEA. See p 329.
ARCHYTAS hath the pemiltima long,
as Vossius observes, and as appeareth
by this verse out of Propertius,
Me crfat Archytqe salons tyabyfomiitf
htros,
And by this other of Horace, lib. J,
Od. 28.
Tie marts ft ierre, nuwereqw <wint)f
arena
Mensosem cohibent Archyta.
And therefore it is wrong in Aratus,
S. Sidonius, and Fortunatus, to make
it long.
AREOPAGUS, the penultima doubt-
ful. Some derive it from pagtif, the
former long, as coming from *r>^,
forts : and St. Austin explains it ncurn
Mortis; wherein he is followed by
Budeus with most of the Greek and
Latin dictionaries. Others derive it
from viyoq, collis, the penultima short j
which is the opinion of Vossius, Ricci-
olius, and others, founded on th's,
that it appears by Euripides, Pausanias,
Hesychius, Suidas, and the Etymologist,
that this place was elevated, and ap-
peared as it were on an eminence.
AZYMUS, the second commonly short
in Prudentius, and in the hymn of the
first Sunday after Raster.
348
NEW METHOD.
Book X.
Sincerilatis azyma. Yet by right it
should be long, being a word compound-
ed of privative and {U/EAI, fermentum,
whereof the former is long, as appears
by vfA<ufjta, in Nicander, derived from
the same root, M>j /u-iv tin u/xi|ua xaxox
pfcVC, &0.
CANDACE, Kavfrajoj, the penultima
may be pronounced long in prose, by
following the accent. But in verse it
is short, the same as Canace, Panace,
and the like ; which is further confirmed
by this verse of Juvenal.
Candacis JEthiopum dicunt arcana
modosque.
CICURAUE is to be found no where
but in a very corrupt verse of Pacuvius's,
quoted by Vavro. Yet the two first
syllables are supposed to be short, as
well as cicuris.
Cis, a preposition, is reckoned short
by Vossius, though there is no ancient
authority for it. But the analogy
seems to require it. The same may be
said of bis, which is always short in
Ovid, though Arator has made it long.
This may be further confirmed by the
authority of its derivatives. For though
crtraque is long in Horace, by virtue of
the mute and liquid, yet citro is short in
Sidonius, and citimus in Fulgentius, in
his Astronomies.
Siuu, citimus limes diipescit nubila
puris.
For which reason Buchanan is censured
for having made the first long in citimus
and citerior.
CLEOPATRA has by nature the pe-
nultima common, because of the mute
and liquid ; for it comes from nrarng.
So that in prose we ought to place the
accent on the antepenuitima. But the
first and second being always short, the
third must needs be long in hexameter
and pentameter verses.
CYTHEREA hath the antepenuitima
short in Homer, writing it with an s.
sfutt, as it is derived from lotos. But
Hesiod writes it with an w, and there-
fore makes it long. Virgil constantly
shortens it. But in Ovid we likewise
find it long.
Parce melh Cytherea, manent immota
tuorum. yKn. 1.
Annuit atgue dolis risit Cytherea re-
pertis. JEn. 4.
Mota Cyther6a est leviler sua tempora
myrto. Fast. 4.
CoNorEUM hath the penultima
long in Juvenal ; but it is sho 
